Acura 2009 TSX Owner's Manual

０８／０２／０６２０：２３：４６３１ＴＬ１６０００００２

Main Menu

Introduction

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2009 Acura TSX was a wise investment.

It will give you years of driving pleasure.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so you can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

2009 TSX i

０８／０２／０６２０：２３：５１３１ＴＬ１６０００００３

Main Menu

Introduction

California Proposition 65 Warning

WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly ref erred to as event data recorders. These devices record f ront seat belt use, f ront passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the f ailure of any airbag system component.

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

ii 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２４：０３３１ＴＬ１６０００００４

Main Menu

A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:

Saf ety Labels − on the vehicle.

Saf ety Messages − three signal words: preceded by a safety alert symbol

These signal words mean:

, , or CAUTION .

and one of

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY

HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY

HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

Saf ety Headings −

Safety Precautions.

such as Important Safety Reminders or Important

Saf ety Section

Instructions −

− such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it carefully.

2009 TSX iii

2009 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ..........................................................................................................................................................

i

A Few Words About Safety .............................................................................................................................. iii

Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) .................................................................................................... 3

Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) .................................................... 5

Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard and steering column) .......... 57

Features (climate control,audio,steering wheel,security,cruise control,HomeLink ® ,and other convenience items) ........... 165

Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break in, and cargo loading) ...................................................................... 355

Driving (engine and transmission operation) ................................................................................................ 373

Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)........................................... 407

Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses) .............................. 457

Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ....................................... 483

Warranty and Client Relations (U. S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) .......... 501

Authorized Manuals (U. S. only) (how to order) ......................................................................................... 505

Index ............................................................................................................................... ........................................ I

Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)

０８／０２／０６２０：２４：３６３１ＴＬ１６０００００７

Main Menu

Overview of Contents

Contents

A convenient reference to the sections in this manual.

Your Vehicle at a Glance

A quick reference to the main controls in your vehicle.

Driver and Passenger Saf ety

Important information about the proper use and care of your vehicle’s seat belts, an overview of the supplemental restraint system, and valuable information on how to protect children with child restraints.

Instruments and Controls

Explains the purpose of each instrument panel indicator and gauge, the multi-information display, and how to use the controls on the dashboard and steering column.

Features

How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

Bef ore Driving

What gasoline to use, how to breakin your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.

Driving

The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park; plus what you need to know if you’re planning to tow a trailer.

Maintenance

The maintenance minder shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer for maintenance service.

There is also a list of things to check and instructions on how to check them.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and details how to handle them.

Technical Inf ormation

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.

Warranty and Client Relations

(U.S. and Canada only)

A summary of the warranties covering your new vehicle, and how to contact us for any reason. Refer to your warranty manual for detailed information.

Authorized Manuals

(U.S. only)

How to order manuals and other technical literature.

Index

Service Inf ormation Summary

A summary of the information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

2 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０７１７：３１：００３１ＴＬ１６０００００８

Main Menu


DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG

(P.

9 )

MIRROR CONTROLS

(P.

145 )

DRIVING POSITION

MEMORY SYSTEM

BUTTONS (P.

142 )

POWER DOOR LOCK

MASTER SWITCH

(Unlocking Fuel Fill Door)

(P.

124 )

POWER WINDOW

SWITCHES

(P.

147 )

TRUNK RELEASE

BUTTON(P.

130 )

HOOD RELEASE

HANDLE (P.

359 )

＊ : If equipped

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

(P.

70 )

MOONROOF SWITCH

(P.

151 )

ACCESSORY POWER

SOCKET (P.

156 )

Vehicle with navigation system is shown.

USB ADAPTER

CABLE ＊

(P.

199 , 208 , 259 , 269 )

2009 TSX

AUXILIARY INPUT

JACK (P.

288 )

HOMELINK BUTTONS

(P.

303 )

PASSENGER’S FRONT

AIRBAG (P.

9 )

AUDIO SYSTEM

(P.

174 )

CLOCK ＊

(P.

290 )

COMPASS ＊

(P.

295 )

HAZARD WARNING

BUTTON (P.

117 )

CLIMATE CONTROL

SYSTEM (P.

166 )

ACCESSORY POWER

SOCKET (P.

156 )

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

(P.

376 )

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

(P.

379 )

CONTINUED

3

０８／０２／０６２０：２４：５３３１ＴＬ１６０００００９

Main Menu


HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS (P.

111 )/

FRONT FOG LIGHTS

＊ 3

(P.

115 )

INSTRUMENT PANEL

BRIGHTNESS(P.

115 )

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/

WASHERS (P.

110 )

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF

INDICATOR (P.

33 )

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL

BUTTONS (P.

287 )

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST

(VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

(P.

399 )

CENTER DISPLAY ＊ 2

INTERFACE DIAL ＊ 2 (P.

222 )

SELECTOR KNOB ＊ 3 (P.

175 )

HAZARD WARNING

BUTTON (P.

117 )

REAR WINDOW

DEFOGGER/HEATED

MIRROR BUTTON

(P.

117 , 146 )

BLUETOOTH

HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM

VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

(P.

308 )

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE

CONTROL BUTTONS ＊ 2

CRUISE CONTROL

BUTTONS (P.

299 )

MULTI-INFORMATION

BUTTONS (P.

71 ) HORN ＊ 1

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS (P.

118 )


SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

(P.

141 )

4

＊ 1 :

＊ 2 :

＊ 3 :

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.

Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

If equipped

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２４：５８３１ＴＬ１６００００１０

Main Menu

Driver and Passenger Safety

This section gives you important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers. It shows you how to use seat belts. It explains how your airbags work. And it tells you how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.

Important Safety Precautions .........

.

6

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features .......

.

7

Seat Belts .......................................

.

8

Airbags ...........................................

.

9

Protecting Adults and Teens .........

.

11

1 . Close and Lock the Doors .....

.

11

2 . Adjust the Front Seats

3 . Adjust the Seat-Backs

...........

............

.

.

13

14

4 ...

14

5 . Fasten and Position the

Seat Belts .............................

.

15

6 . Maintain a Proper Sitting

Position ................................

.

17

Advice for Pregnant Women .....

.

17

...

18

Additional Information About

Your Seat Belts .......................

.

19

..

19

Lap/Shoulder Belt ......................

Automatic Seat Belt

.

20

Tensioners ...............................

Seat Belt Maintenance ...............

.

.

21

22

Additional Information About

Your Airbags ...........................

.

23

Airbag System Components ......

.

23

How Your Front Airbags

Work .........................................

.

25

...

29

How Your Side Curtain Airbags

Work .........................................

.

31

..

31

How the Side Airbag Off

Indicator Works ......................

.

32

How the Passenger Airbag Off

Indicator Works

Airbag Service

......................

.............................

.

33

.

34

Protecting Children − General

Guidelines ................................

.

36

All Children Must Be

...

34

Restrained ...............................

.

36

All Children Should Sit in a

Back Seat .................................

The Passenger’s Front Airbag

.

37

Can Pose Serious Risks .........

If You Must Drive with Several

.

37

Children ...................................

If a Child Requires Close

.

39

Attention ..................................

.

39

...

39

Protecting Infants and

Small Children .........................

.

41

Protecting Infants .......................

Protecting Small Children .........

.

.

41

42

Selecting a Child Seat .....................

.

43

Installing a Child Seat

With LATCH

....................

...............................

.

.

44

46

With a Lap/Shoulder Belt

With a Tether

.........

..............................

.

.

48

50

Protecting Larger Children ...........

.

51

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Using a Booster Seat

...............

..................

.

51

.

52

When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front ....................................

.

53

...

54

Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............

.

55

Safety Labels ...................................

.

56

2009 TSX 5

０８／０２／０６２０：２５：１０３１ＴＬ１６００００１１

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Important Safety Precautions

You’ll find many safety recommendations throughout this section, and throughout this manual.

The recommendations on this page are the ones we consider to be the most important.

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly (see page 15 ).

Restrain All Children

Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/ shoulder belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat

(see pages 36 − 54 ).

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained.

Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Don’t Drink and Drive

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with

6 2009 TSX every additional drink. So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.

Control Your Speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

Keep Your Vehicle in Saf e

Condition

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance (see page 409 ).

０８／０２／０６２０：２５：１８３１ＴＬ１６００００１２


Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

(7)

(10)

(1) (8) (9)

(5)

(4) (3)

(2)

(2)

(7)

(8)

(6)

(11)

(1) Safety Cage

(2) Crush Zones

(3) Seats and Seat-Backs

(4) Head Restraints

(5) Collapsible Steering Column

(6) Seat Belts

(7) Front Airbags

(8) Side Airbags

(9) Side Curtain Airbags

(10) Door Locks

(11) Seat Belt Tensioners

2009 TSX

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to protect you and your passengers during a crash.

Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengers can’t take full advantage of these features unless you remain sitting in a proper position and always wear your seat belts . In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.

The following pages explain how you can take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.

7

０８／０２／０６２０：２５：３３３１ＴＬ１６００００１３



Seat Belts

Your vehicle is equipped with seat belts in all seating positions.

Your seat belt system also includes an indicator on the instrument panel and a beeper to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.

Why Wear Seat Belts

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device for adults and larger children. (Infants and smaller children must be properly restrained in child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and all

Canadian provinces require you to wear seat belts.

Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicle so you can take advantage of the vehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:

−

−

−

− frontal impacts side impacts rear impacts rollovers

Help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle and against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown out of the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good position should the airbags ever deploy. A good position reduces the risk of injury from an inflating airbag and allows you to get the best advantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.

What You Should Do:

Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly.

8 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２５：４１３１ＴＬ１６００００１４


Airbags


Your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (SRS) with front airbags to help protect the heads and chests of the driver and a front seat passenger during a moderate to severe frontal collision (see page

25 for more information on how your front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags to help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact (see page 29 for more information on how your side airbags work).

In addition, your vehicle has side curtain airbags to help protect the heads of the driver, front passenger, and passengers in the outer rear seating positions during a moderate to severe side impact (see page

31 for more information on how your side curtain airbags work).

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

9

０８／０２／０６２０：２５：４９３１ＴＬ１６００００１５



The most important things you need to know about your airbags are:

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

They are designed to supplement the seat belts.

Airbags of f er no protection in rear impacts, or minor f rontal or side collisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So while airbags help save lives, they can cause minor injuries or more serious or even fatal injuries if occupants are not properly restrained or sitting properly.

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.

The rest of this section gives more detailed information about how you can maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.

10 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２６：０２３１ＴＬ１６００００１６


Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction

The following pages provide instructions on how to properly protect the driver, adult passengers, and teenage children who are large enough and mature enough to drive or ride in the front.

See pages 36 − 54 for important guidelines on how to properly protect infants, small children, and larger children who ride in your vehicle.

1.

Close and Lock the Doors

After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure the doors are closed and locked.

Your vehicle has a door/ trunk open indicator (red) on the instrument panel to indicate when any door or the trunk lid is not tightly closed.

See page 124 for how to lock the doors, and page 65 for how the door/ trunk open indicator works.

Your vehicle also has a door and trunk open indicator on the multiinformation display to indicate when a specific door or the trunk is not tightly closed. You will see the appropriate indicator(s) for each condition.

You will also hear a beep when you turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position, and each time you open any door or the trunk with the key in the ON (II) position.

The above illustration shows that all doors and the trunk are open.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

11

０８／０２／０６２０：２６：１１３１ＴＬ１６００００１７



When the trunk is not tightly closed, this indicator will come on.

When one or more doors or the trunk lid are not tightly closed, the corresponding indicator for each condition will come on.

The above example shows the front right and rear left doors, and the trunk open.

Locking the doors reduces the chance of someone being thrown out of the vehicle during a crash, and it helps prevent passengers from accidentally opening a door and falling out.

Locking the doors also helps prevent an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door when you come to a stop.

Your vehicle has the auto door locking/unlocking feature. For more information, see page 99 .

12 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２６：２０３１ＴＬ１６００００１８



2.

Adjust the Front Seats

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the rear as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle.

Have a front passenger adjust their seat as far to the rear as possible.

If you sit too close to the steering wheel or dashboard, you can be seriously injured by an inflating front airbag, or by striking the steering wheel or dashboard.

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration and Transport

Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest. In addition to adjusting the seat, you can adjust the steering wheel up and down, and in and out (see page 118 ).

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.

Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible.

See page 134 front seats.

for how to adjust the

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

13

０８／０２／０６２０：２６：３２３１ＴＬ１６００００１９



3.

Adjust the Seat-Backs

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their seatback to a comfortable, upright position.

4.

Adjust the Head Restraints

Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

See page 134 seat-backs.

for how to adjust the

Adjust the driver’s head restraint so the center of the back of your head rests against the center of the restraint.

Have passengers adjust their head restraints properly as well. Taller persons should adjust their restraint as high as possible.

14 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２６：４１３１ＴＬ１６００００２０



Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and you can be seriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.

Properly adjusted head restraints will help protect occupants from whiplash and other crash injuries.

See page 136 for how to adjust the head restraints and how the driver’s and front passenger’s active head restraints work.

5.

Fasten and Position the Seat

Belts

Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the belt is securely latched. Check that the belt is not twisted, because a twisted belt can cause serious injuries in a crash.

2009 TSX

Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly.

This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder.

CONTINUED

15

０８／０２／０６２０：２６：４９３１ＴＬ１６００００２１



This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.

Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.

If the seat belt touches or crosses your neck, or if it crosses your arm instead of your shoulder, you need to adjust the seat belt anchor height.

RELEASE BUTTON

The front seats have adjustable seat belt anchors. To adjust the height of an anchor, press and hold the release button and slide the anchor up or down as needed (it has four positions).

Never place the shoulder portion of a lap/shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back.

This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to work properly, it may not protect the occupant in a crash.

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt.

Using a seat belt that is not working properly can result in serious injury or death.

Have your dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

See page 19 for additional information about your seat belts and how to take care of them.

16 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２６：５９３１ＴＬ１６００００２２



6.

Maintain a Proper Sitting

Position

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.

Advice f or Pregnant Women

Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt, and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

17

０８／０２／０６２０：２７：０８３１ＴＬ１６００００２３



When driving, remember to sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. When riding as a front passenger, adjust the seat as far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by a crash or an inflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it’s okay for you to drive.

Additional Saf ety Precautions

Two people should never use the same seat belt.

If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.

Do not put any accessories on seat belts.

Devices intended to improve occupant comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability of the belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a f ront airbag.

Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Keep your hands and arms away f rom the airbag covers.

If your hands or arms are close to an airbag cover, they could be injured if the airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the f ront airbag covers.

Objects on the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Do not attach hard objects on or near a door.

If a side airbag or a side curtain airbag inflates, a cup holder or other hard object attached on or near the door could be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone.

18 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２７：２０３１ＴＬ１６００００２４


Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components

Your seat belt system includes lap/ shoulder belts in all seating positions.

The front seat belts are also equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners.

This system uses the same sensors as the front airbags to monitor whether the front seat belts are latched or unlatched, and how much weight is on the front passenger’s seat (see pages 27 and 28 ).

The seat belt system includes an indicator on the instrument panel and a beeper to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the front seat belts. If you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before your seat belt is fastened, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash. If your seat belt is not fastened before the beeper stops, the indicator will stop flashing but remain on.

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT

BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display.

If a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt, the indicator will come on about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON

(II) position.

If either the driver or a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt while driving, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash again at regular intervals.

In addition to the seat belt reminder indicator in the instrument panel, you will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT

BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER

SEAT BELT’’ message. This remains displayed if you ignore it and do not fasten the seat belt while driving.

When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator should not come on and the beeper should not sound.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 19

０８／０２／０６２０：２７：３０３１ＴＬ１６００００２５



If the indicator comes on or the beeper sounds when the driver’s seat belt is latched and there is no front seat passenger and no items on the front seat, something may be interfering with the monitoring system. Look for and remove:

Any items under the front passenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear of the seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Lap/Shoulder Belt

The lap/shoulder belt goes over your shoulder, across your chest, and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is latched (see page 15 for how to properly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the red

PRESS button on the buckle. Guide the belt across your body so that it retracts completely. After exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the way and will not get closed in the door.

All seat belts have an emergency locking retractor. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely in your seat while it keeps some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor automatically locks the belt to help restrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions except the driver’s have a lockable retractor that must be activated to secure a child seat (see page 48 ).

20 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２７：４１３１ＴＬ１６００００２６



If the shoulder part of the belt is pulled all the way out, the lockable retractor will activate. The belt will retract, but it will not allow the passenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor, unlatch the buckle and let the seat belt fully retract. To refasten the seat belt, pull it out only as far as needed.

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

For added protection, the front seat belts are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners. When activated, the tensioners immediately tighten the belts to help hold the driver and a front passenger in position.

The tensioners are designed to activate in any collision severe enough to cause the front airbags to deploy.

If a side curtain airbag deploys during a side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle will also deploy.

The tensioners can also be activated during a collision in which the front airbags do not deploy . In this case, the airbags would not be needed, but the additional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated, the seat belts will remain tight until they are unbuckled.

2009 TSX 21

０８／０２／０６２０：２７：５０３１ＴＬ１６００００２７



Seat Belt Maintenance

For safety, you should check the condition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily. If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem (see page

442 ). Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide good protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.

Acura provides a limited warranty on seat belts. See your Acura Warranty

Information booklet for details.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash, it must be replaced by your dealer. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect the anchors for damage and replace them if needed. If the automatic seat belt tensioners activate during a crash, they must be replaced.

Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.

22 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２７：５８３１ＴＬ１６００００２８


Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components

(8)

(1) (15) (8) (9) (2) (7) (12) (11) (5)

(14)

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag

(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag

(3) Control Unit

(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners

(5) Side Airbags

(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor

(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors

(8) Front Impact Sensors

(3)

(6)

(10)

(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)

(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors

(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/

OPDS Sensors Control Unit

(13) Side Impact Sensors (Second)

(14) Side Curtain Airbags

(15) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

(16) Safing Sensor

2009 TSX

(4) (5)

(13)

(16)

(7)

(14)

(4)

(10)

(13)

CONTINUED

23

０８／０２／０６２０：２８：０９３１ＴＬ１６００００２９



Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraint system) front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger’s airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS

AIRBAG’’ (see page 25 ).

Two side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE

AIRBAG’’ (see page 29 ).

Two side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE

CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

31 ).

Automatic front seat belt tensioners (see page 21 ).

Sensors that can detect a moderate to severe front impact or side impact.

Sensors that can detect whether a child is in the passenger’s side airbag path and signal the control unit to turn the airbag off (see page 30 ).

Sensors that can detect whether the driver’s seat belt and the front passenger’s seat belt are latched or unlatched (see page

19 ).

A driver’s seat position sensor that monitors the distance of the seat from the front airbag. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force

(see page 27 ).

Weight sensors that monitor the weight on the front passenger’s seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs

(29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child), the passenger’s front airbag will be turned off (see page 28 ).

A sophisticated electronic system that continually monitors and records information about the sensors, the control unit, the airbag activators, the seat belt tensioners, and driver and front passenger seat belt use when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position.

24 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２８：２０３１ＴＬ１６００００３０



An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbags, sensors, or seat belt tensioners

(see page 31 ).

An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you that the passenger’s side airbag has been turned off (see page 32 ).

An indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the passenger’s front airbag has been turned off

(see page 33 ).

Emergency backup power in case your vehicle’s electrical system is disconnected in a crash.

How Your Front Airbags Work

If you ever have a moderate to severe frontal collision, sensors will detect the vehicle’s rapid deceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is high enough, the control unit will instantly inflate the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags, at the time and with the force needed.

During a frontal crash, your seat belt restrains your lower body and torso, and the front airbag helps protect your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if there is no passenger in the front seat, or if the advanced airbag system has turned the passenger’s airbag off (see page 28 ).

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 25

０８／０２／０６２０：２８：３０３１ＴＬ１６００００３１



After inflating, the front airbags immediately deflate, so they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility, or the ability to steer or operate other controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is one-tenth of a second, so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see what looks like smoke. This is actually powder from the airbag’s surface.

Although the powder is not harmful, people with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Dual-Stage Airbags

Your front airbags are dual-stage airbags. This means they have two inflation stages that can be ignited sequentially or simultaneously, depending on crash severity.

In a more severe crash, both stages will ignite simultaneously to provide the quickest and greatest protection.

In a less severe crash, one stage will ignite first, then the second stage will ignite a split second later. This provides longer airbag inflation time with a little less force.

26 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２８：４３３１ＴＬ１６００００３２



Dual-Threshold Airbags

Your front airbags are also dualthreshold airbags. Airbags with this feature have two deployment thresholds that depend on whether sensors detect the occupant is wearing a seat belt or not.

If the occupant’s belt is not latched , the airbag will deploy at a slightly lower threshold, because the occupant would need extra protection.

If the occupant’s belt is latched , the airbag will inflate at a slightly higher threshold, when the airbag would be needed to supplement the protection provided by the seat belt.

Advanced Airbags

Your front airbags are also advanced airbags. The main purpose of this feature is to help prevent airbagcaused injuries to short drivers and children who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to work properly:

Occupants must sit upright and wear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on or under the seats, cover the sensors, or put any objects or metal items under the front seats.

Back-seat passengers should not put their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructions could damage the sensors or prevent them from working properly.

DRIVER’S

SEAT

POSITION

SENSOR

The driver’s advanced front airbag system includes a seat position sensor under the seat. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force, regardless of the severity of the impact.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 27

０８／０２／０６２０：２８：５１３１ＴＬ１６００００３３



If there is a problem with the sensor, the SRS indicator will come on, and the airbag will inflate in the normal manner regardless of the driver’s seating position.

PASSENGER’S

SEAT WEIGHT

SENSOR

The passenger’s advanced front airbag system has weight sensors under the seat. Although Acura does not encourage carrying an infant or small child in front, if the sensors detect the weight of an infant or small child (up to about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off.

Be aware that objects placed on the passenger’s seat can also cause the airbag to be turned off.

When the airbag is turned off, a

‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in the center of the dashboard comes on (see page 33 ).

If the weight sensors detect there is no passenger in the front seat, the airbag will be off. However, the passenger airbag off indicator will not come on.

28 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２９：０１３１ＴＬ１６００００３４


To ensure that the passenger’s advanced front airbag system will work properly, do not do anything that would increase or decrease the weight on the f ront passenger’s seat.

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger’s seat.

Moving the front seat forcibly back against cargo on the seat or floor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the front passenger seat, or placing heavy items in the seat-back pocket.

Moving the front seat or seat-back forcibly back against the folded rear seat.


Also, make sure the floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is properly positioned on the floor

(see page 442 ). If it is not, the mat may interfere with the proper operation of the front passenger’s seat and its sensors.

How Your Side Airbags Work

If you ever have a moderate to severe side impact, sensors will detect rapid acceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate either the driver’s or the passenger’s side airbag.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

29

０８／０２／０６２０：２９：１２３１ＴＬ１６００００３５



Only one airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the passenger’s side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger.

To get the best protection from the side airbags, front seat occupants should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats.

Side Airbag Cutof f System

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff system designed primarily to protect a child riding in the front passenger’s seat.

Although Acura does not encourage children to ride in front, if the position sensors detect a child has leaned into the side airbag’s deployment path, the airbag will shut off.

The side airbag may also shut off if a short adult leans sideways, or a larger adult slouches and leans sideways into the airbag’s deployment path.

Objects placed on the front passenger seat can also cause the side airbag to be shut off.

If the side airbag off indicator comes on (see page 32 ), have the passenger sit upright. Once the passenger is out of the airbag’s deployment path, the system will turn the airbag back on, and the indicator will go out.

There will be some delay between the moment the passenger moves into or out of the airbag deployment path and when the indicator comes on or goes off.

A front seat passenger should not use a cushion or other object as a backrest. It may prevent the cutoff system from working properly.

30 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２９：２２３１ＴＬ１６００００３６


How Your Side Curtain Airbags

Work

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG


If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the passenger’s side curtain airbag will inflate even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate to severe frontal collision which causes the front airbags to deploy.

To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats.

How the SRS Indicator

Works

The SRS indicator alerts you to a potential problem with your airbags or seat belt tensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, this indicator comes on briefly then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.

In a moderate to severe side impact, sensors will detect rapid acceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate the side curtain airbag and activate the seat belt tensioner on the driver’s or the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

31

０８／０２／０６２０：２９：３３３１ＴＬ１６００００３７



If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, you should have the system checked by your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not come on after you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator stays on after the engine starts.

If the indicator comes on or flashes on and off while you drive.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK

AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display.

If you see any of these indications, the airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when you need them.

Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.

U.S.

Canada How the Side

Airbag Of f

Indicator Works

This indicator alerts you that the passenger’s side airbag has been automatically shut off. It does not mean there is a problem with your side airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the indicator should come on briefly and then go out (see page 62 ). If it doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes on while driving without a passenger in the front seat, have the system checked.

You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER

SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the multi-information display.

32 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２９：４４３１ＴＬ１６００００３８



How the Passenger Airbag Of f

Indicator Works

U.S.

Canada

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

This indicator alerts you that the passenger’s front airbag has been shut off because weight sensors detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less

(the weight of an infant or small child) on the front passenger’s seat.

It does not mean there is a problem with the airbag.

Be aware that objects placed on the front seat can cause the indicator to come on.

If the weight sensors detect there is no passenger in the front seat, the airbag will be off. However, the passenger airbag off indicator will not come on.

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger is riding in front, move the seat as far to the rear as possible, and have the passenger sit upright and wear the seat belt properly.

If the indicator comes on with no front seat passenger and no objects on the seat, or with an adult riding there, something may be interfering with the weight sensors. Look for and remove:

Any items under the front passenger’s seat.

Any object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear of the seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

2009 TSX 33

０８／０２／０６２０：２９：５３３１ＴＬ１６００００３９



Airbag Service

Your airbag systems are virtually maintenance free, and there are no parts you can safely service.

However, you must have your vehicle serviced if:

An airbag ever inf lates.

Any airbag that has deployed must be replaced along with the control unit and other related parts. Any seat belt tensioner that activates must also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replace any airbag by yourself. This must be done by an authorized dealer or a knowledgeable body shop.

The SRS indicator alerts you to a problem.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If you ignore this indication, your airbags may not operate properly.

If your vehicle has a moderate to severe impact.

Even if your airbags do not inflate, your dealer should inspect the driver’s seat position sensor, the front passenger’s weight sensors, the front seat belt tensioners, and all seat belts and their anchors worn during a crash to make sure they are operating properly.


Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags.

Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

Do not tamper with airbag components or wiring f or any reason.

Tampering could cause the airbags to deploy, possibly causing very serious injury.

Do not expose the f ront passenger’s seat-back to liquid.

If water or another liquid soaks into a seatback, it can prevent the side airbag cutoff system from working properly.

34 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２９：５７３１ＴＬ１６００００４０



Do not cover or replace f ront seatback covers without consulting your dealer.

Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from inflating during a side impact.

Do not remove or modif y a f ront seat without consulting your dealer.

This could make the driver’s seat position sensor or the front passenger’s weight sensors ineffective. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, first contact Acura

Client Services at 800-382-2238.

2009 TSX 35

０８／０２／０６２０：３０：０５３１ＴＬ１６００００４１


Protecting Children − General Guidelines

Children depend on adults to protect them. However, despite their best intentions, many adults do not know how to properly protect child passengers.

If you have children, or ever need to drive with a child in your vehicle, be sure to read this section. It begins with important general guidelines, then presents special information for infants, small children, and larger children.

All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the number one cause of death of children age 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state and

Canadian province requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.

Inf ants and small children must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle (see pages 41 − 50 ).

Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt and use a booster seat if necessary.

Larger children must be restrained with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on a booster seat until the seat belt f its them properly (see pages 51 − 54 ).

36 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３０：２０３１ＴＬ１６００００４２



All Children Should Sit in a Back

Seat

According to accident statistics, children of all ages and sizes are safer when they are restrained in a back seat.



Canada recommend that all children aged 12 and under be properly restrained in a back seat. Some states have laws restricting where children may ride.

Children who ride in back are less likely to be injured by striking interior vehicle parts during a collision or hard braking. Also, children cannot be injured by an inflating front airbag when they ride in the back.

The Passenger’s Front Airbag

Can Pose Serious Risks

Front airbags have been designed to help protect adults in a moderate to severe frontal collision. To do this, the passenger’s front airbag is quite large, and it can inflate with enough force to cause very serious injuries.

Even though your vehicle has an advanced front airbag system that automatically turns the passenger’s front airbag off (see page 33 ), please follow these guidelines:

Inf ants

Never put a rear-f acing child seat in the f ront seat of a vehicle equipped with a passenger’s f ront airbag.

If the airbag inflates, it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or very seriously injure an infant.

Small Children

Placing a f orward-f acing child seat in the f ront seat of a vehicle equipped with a passenger’s f ront airbag can be hazardous.

If the vehicle seat is too far forward, or the child’s head is thrown forward during a collision, an inflating front airbag can strike the child with enough force to kill or very seriously injure a small child.

Larger Children

Children who have outgrown child seats are also at risk of being injured or killed by an inf lating passenger’s f ront airbag.

Whenever possible, larger children should sit in the back seat, on a booster seat if needed, and be properly restrained with a seat belt (see page 51 for important information about protecting larger children).

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

37

０８／０２／０６２０：３０：３７３１ＴＬ１６００００４３



To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag hazards, and that children must be properly restrained in a back seat, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard

(U.S. models) and on the front visors.

Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

SUN VISORS

Canadian Models

SUN VISORS

DASHBOARD

38 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３０：５１３１ＴＬ１６００００４４



If You Must Drive with Several

Children

Your vehicle has a back seat where children can be properly restrained.

If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:

Place the largest child in the front seat, provided the child is large enough to wear the lap/shoulder belt properly (see page 51 ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible (see page 134 ).

Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat (see page 17 ).

Make sure the seat belt is properly positioned and secured (see page

15 ).

If a Child Requires Close

Attention

Many parents say they prefer to put an infant or a small child in the front passenger seat so they can watch the child, or because the child requires attention.

Placing a child in the front seat exposes the child to hazards in a frontal collision, and paying close attention to a child distracts the driver from the important tasks of driving, placing both of you at risk.

If a child requires close physical attention or frequent visual contact, we strongly recommend that another adult ride with the child in a back seat. The back seat is far safer for a child than the front.


Never hold an inf ant or child on your lap.

If you are not wearing a seat belt in a crash, you could be thrown forward and crush the child against the dashboard or a seat-back. If you are wearing a seat belt, the child can be torn from your arms and be seriously hurt or killed.

Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child.

During a crash, the belt could press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.

Never let two children use the same seat belt.


2009 TSX

CONTINUED

39

０８／０２／０６２０：３０：５９３１ＴＬ１６００００４５



Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is f ully retracted and locked.

If a child wraps a loose seat belt around their neck, they can be seriously or fatally injured.

(See pages 48 and 49 for how to activate and deactivate the lockable retractor.)

Use the childproof door locks to prevent children f rom opening the rear doors.

This can prevent children from accidentally falling out (see page 125 ).

Do not leave children alone in a vehicle.

Leaving children without adult supervision is illegal in most states and Canadian provinces, and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and small children left in a vehicle on a hot day can die from heatstroke. A child left alone with the key in the ignition switch can accidentally set the vehicle in motion, possibly injuring themselves or others.

Lock all doors and the trunk when your vehicle is not in use.

Children who play in vehicles can accidentally get trapped inside.

Teach your children not to play in or around vehicles. Know how to operate the emergency trunk opener and decide if your children should be shown how to use this feature (see page 132 ).

Keep vehicle keys/remote transmitters out of the reach of children.

Even very young children learn how to unlock vehicle doors, turn on the ignition switch, and open the trunk, which can lead to accidental injury or death.

40 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３１：１２３１ＴＬ１６００００４６


Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Inf ants

Child Seat Type

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the child reaches the seat maker’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the child is at least one year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat provides proper support for a baby’s head, neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: a seat designed exclusively for infants, or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.

Do not put a rear-f acing child seat in a f orward-f acing position.

If placed facing forward, an infant could be very seriously injured during a frontal collision.

Rear-f acing Child Seat Placement

A rear-facing child seat can be placed in any seating position in the back seat, but not in the front.

Never put a rear-f acing child seat in the f ront seat.

If the passenger’s front airbag inflates, it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or seriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rearfacing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat as far back as recommended, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag system.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

41

０８／０２／０６２０：３１：２２３１ＴＬ１６００００４７


Protecting Infants and Small Children

In any of these situations, we strongly recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a collision.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the back seat, not the front.

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

A child who is at least one year old, and who fits within the child seat maker’s weight and height limits, should be restrained in a forwardfacing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, we recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a small child use the child seat until the child reaches the weight or height limit for the seat.

Child Seat Placement

We strongly recommend placing a forward-facing child seat in a back seat, not the front.

Placing a f orward-f acing child seat in the f ront seat of a vehicle equipped with a passenger’s airbag can be hazardous.

If the vehicle seat is too far forward, or the child’s head is thrown forward during a collision, an inflating airbag can strike the child with enough force to cause very serious or fatal injuries.

42 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３１：３０３１ＴＬ１６００００４８


Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

Even with advanced front airbags, which can automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off (see page 33 ), a back seat is the safest place for a small child.

If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, and be sure the child seat is firmly secured to the vehicle and the child is properly strapped in the seat.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.

Selecting a Child Seat

When buying a child seat, you need to choose either a conventional child seat, or one designed for use with the lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must be secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, whereas LATCH-compatible seats are secured by attaching the seat to hardware built into the two outer seating positions in the back seat.

Since LATCH-compatible child seats are easier to install and reduce the possibility of improper installation, we recommend selecting this style.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

43

０８／０２／０６２０：３１：４０３１ＴＬ１６００００４９


Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed using a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, to provide proper protection, a child seat should meet three requirements:

1.

The child seat should meet U.S. or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Saf ety

Standard 213.

Look for FMVSS

213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

2.

The child seat should be of the proper type and size to f it the child.

Rear-facing for infants, forwardfacing for small children.

3.

The child seat should f it the vehicle seating position (or positions) where it will be used.

Before purchasing a conventional child seat, or using a previously purchased one, we recommend that you test the seat in the specific vehicle seating position or positions where the seat will be used.

Installing a Child Seat

After selecting a proper child seat and a good place to install the seat, there are three main steps in installing the seat:

1.

Properly secure the child seat to the vehicle.

All child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the LATCH (lower anchors and tethers for children) system. A child whose seat is not properly secured to the vehicle can be endangered in a crash.

2.

Make sure the child seat is f irmly secured.

After installing a child seat, push and pull the seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.

44 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３１：４６３１ＴＬ１６００００５０


A child seat secured with a seat belt should be installed as firmly as possible. However, it does not need to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side movement can be expected and should not reduce the child seat’s effectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, try installing it in a different seating position, or use a different style of child seat that can be firmly secured.

3.

Secure the child in the child seat.

Make sure the child is properly strapped in the child seat according to the child seat maker’s instructions. A child who is not properly secured in a child seat can be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provide guidelines on how to properly install a child seat. A forward-facing child seat is used in all examples, but the instructions are the same for rearfacing child seats.


2009 TSX 45

０８／０２／０６２０：３１：５７３１ＴＬ１６００００５１



Installing a Child Seat with

LATCH

Your vehicle is equipped with

LATCH (lower anchors and tethers for children) at the outer rear seats.

The lower anchors are located between the seat-back and seat bottom, and are to be used only with a child seat designed for use with

LATCH.

The location of each lower anchor is indicated by a small button above the anchor point.

You can find lower anchors in the slits in the seat-backs.

BUTTON

LOWER ANCHORS

To install a LATCH-compatible child seat:

1.

Move the seat belt buckle or tongue away from the lower anchors.

2.

Make sure there are no objects near the anchors that could prevent a secure connection between the child seat and the anchors.

Rigid type

3.

Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the lower anchors according to the child seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seats have a rigid-type connector as shown above.

46 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３２：０５３１ＴＬ１６００００５２


TETHER STRAP HOOK

Flexible type

Other LATCH-compatible seats have a flexible-type connector as shown above.

4.

Whatever type you have, follow the child seat maker’s instructions for adjusting or tightening the fit.

5.

Set the head restraint to its highest position.

ANCHOR

6.

Route the tether strap through the legs of the head restraint and over the seat-back, making sure the strap is not twisted.

2009 TSX


7.

Attach the tether strap hook to the tether anchor, then tighten the strap as instructed by the child seat maker.

8.

Push and pull the child seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.

47

０８／０２／０６２０：３２：１５３１ＴＬ１６００００５３



Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt

When not using the LATCH system, all child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/ shoulder belt.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions except the driver’s have a lockable retractor that must be activated to secure a child seat.

1.

With the child seat in the desired seating position, route the belt through the child seat according to the seat maker’s instructions, then insert the latch plate into the buckle.

2.

To activate the lockable retractor, slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops, then let the belt feed back into the retractor.

3.

After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is locked, you will not be able to pull it out. If you can pull the belt out, it is not locked, and you will need to repeat these steps.

48 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３２：２２３１ＴＬ１６００００５４


4.

After confirming that the belt is locked, grab the shoulder part of the belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. Remember, if the lap part of the belt is not tight, the child seat will not be secure.

To remove slack, it may help to put weight on the child seat, or push on the back of the seat while pulling up on the belt.

5.

Push and pull the child seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure enough to stay upright during normal driving maneuvers. If the child seat is not secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to retract fully, then repeat these steps.

2009 TSX


To deactivate the lockable retractor and remove a child seat, unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let the belt fully retract.

49

０８／０２／０６２０：３２：３３３１ＴＬ１６００００５５



Installing a Child Seat with a

Tether

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

Using an Anchor

TETHER STRAP HOOK TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR COVER

A child seat with a tether can be installed in any seating position in the back seat, using one of the anchorage points shown above.

Since a tether can provide additional security to the lap/shoulder belt installation, we recommend using a tether whenever one is required or available.

Outer Position ANCHOR

1.

Set the head restraint to its highest position.

2.

After properly securing the child seat (see page 48 ), route the tether strap over the seat-back and through the head restraint legs.

Center Position ANCHOR

3.

Lift the anchor cover, then attach the tether strap hook to the anchor, making sure the strap is not twisted.

4.

Tighten the strap according to the seat maker’s instructions.

50 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３２：４１３１ＴＬ１６００００５６


Protecting Larger Children

When a child reaches the recommended weight or height limit for a forward-facing child seat, the child should sit in a back seat on a booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder belt.

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.

Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, use a booster seat if needed, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

2009 TSX

To determine if a lap/shoulder belt properly fits a child, have the child put on the seat belt, then ask yourself:

1.

Does the child sit all the way back against the seat?

2.

Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the edge of the seat?

CONTINUED

51

０８／０２／０６２０：３２：５１３１ＴＬ１６００００５７



3.

Does the shoulder belt cross between the child’s neck and arm?

4.

Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs?

5.

Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip?

Using a Booster Seat

If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat.

A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in a back seat and use a booster seat until the lap/shoulder belt fits them properly without the booster.

Some states and Canadian provinces also require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the states or provinces where you intend to drive.

Booster seats can be high-back or low-back. Whichever style you select, make sure the booster seat meets federal safety standards (see page

44 ) and that you follow the booster seat maker’s instructions.

52 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３３：０１３１ＴＬ１６００００５８



If a child who uses a booster seat must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible and be sure the child is wearing the seat belt properly.

A child may continue using a booster seat until the tops of their ears are even with the top of the vehicle’s or booster’s seat-back. A child of this height should be tall enough to use the lap/shoulder belt without a booster seat.

When Can a Larger Child Sit in

Front



Canada recommend that all children age 12 and under be properly restrained in a back seat.

If the passenger’s front airbag inflates in a moderate to severe frontal collision, the airbag can cause serious injuries to a child who is unrestrained, improperly restrained, sitting too close to the airbag, or out of position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If any part of a larger child’s body is in the path of a deploying side airbag, the child could receive possibly serious injuries.

Of course, children vary widely. And while age may be one indicator of when a child can safely ride in front, there are other important factors you should consider.

Physical Size

Physically, a child must be large enough for the lap/shoulder belt to properly fit (see pages 15 and 51 ). If the seat belt does not fit properly, with or without the child sitting on a booster seat, the child should not sit in front.

Maturity

To safely ride in front, a child must be able to follow the rules, including sitting properly, and wearing the seat belt properly throughout a ride.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

53

０８／０２／０６２０：３３：１１３１ＴＬ１６００００５９



If you decide that a child can safely ride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual, and make sure you understand all seat belt instructions and all safety information.

Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.

Have the child sit up straight, back against the seat, and feet on or near the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt is properly positioned and secured.

Supervise the child. Even mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten the seat belts or sit properly.


Do not let a child wear a seat belt across the neck.

This could result in serious neck injuries during a crash.

Do not let a child put the shoulder part of a seat belt behind the back or under the arm.

This could cause very serious injuries during a crash. It also increases the chance that the child will slide under the belt in a crash and be injured.

Two children should never use the same seat belt.


Do not put any accessories on a seat belt.

Devices intended to improve a child’s comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can make the belt less effective and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

54 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３３：２０３１ＴＬ１６００００６０


Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Your vehicle’s exhaust contains carbon monoxide gas. Carbon monoxide should not enter the vehicle in normal driving if you maintain your vehicle properly and follow the information on this page.

Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oil change.

You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accident that may have damaged the underside.

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.

High levels of carbon monoxide can collect rapidly in enclosed areas, such as a garage. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.

Even with the door open, run the engine only long enough to move the vehicle out of the garage.

With the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running, even in an unconfined area, adjust the climate control system as follows:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Select the fresh air mode.

Select the mode.

Set the fan speed to high.

Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

2009 TSX 55

０８／０２／０６２０：３４：０２３１ＴＬ１６００００６１

Table Of Contents Main Menu

Safety Labels

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that could cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S.

dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact your dealer for a replacement.

HOOD

U.S. models

SUN VISOR

U.S. models

RADIATOR CAP

Canadian models

DOOR JAMBS

U.S. models Canadian models

Canadian models DASHBOARD

U.S. models only

56 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３４：０７３１ＴＬ１６００００６２

Main Menu

Instruments and Controls

This section gives information about the controls and displays that contribute to the daily operation of your vehicle. All the essential controls are within easy reach.

Control Locations ...........................

.

58

Instrument Panel ............................

Instrument Panel Indicators ..........

.

.

59

60

Gauges .............................................

Multi-Information Display .............

.

.

68

70

Controls Near the Steering

Wheel .........................................

.

109

Windshield Wipers and

Washers .....................................

.

110

Turn Signals and Headlights .......

.

111

Automatic Lighting Off

Feature ...................................

.

113

Daytime Running Lights

Fog Lights

.........

.....................................

.

114

.

115

Instrument Panel Brightness ......

.

115

Hazard Warning Button

Rear Window Defogger

...............

.

117

...............

.

117

Steering Wheel Adjustments ......

.

118

Keys and Locks .............................

.

119

Immobilizer System

Ignition Switch

......................

..............................

.

121

.

122

Door Locks ....................................

Childproof Door Locks ............

.

.

124

125

Remote Transmitter .....................

.

126

Trunk ..............................................

.

130

Trunk Main Switch ...................

.

131

Emergency Trunk Opener ......

.

132

Seats ...............................................

Power Seat Adjustments ..........

.

.

134

134

Driver’s Lumbar Support .........

.

135

Head Restraints ........................

Folding the Rear Seats .............

.

.

135

138

Seat Heaters ..................................

Driving Position Memory

.

141

System

Mirrors

........................................

...........................................

.

142

.

145

..

145

Power Mirror Heaters

Power Windows

..............

............................

.

146

.

147

Moonroof .......................................

Parking Brake ...............................

.

.

151

153

Interior Convenience Items

Beverage Holders

.........

.....................

.

154

.

155

Accessory Power Sockets

Console Compartment

........

.............

.

156

.

156

Glove Box ..................................

.

157

Sunglasses Holder

Sun Visors

....................

..................................

.

158

.

159

Vanity Mirror ............................

Driver’s Pocket .........................

.

.

159

159

Center Pockets ..........................

.

160

Coat Hook ..................................

Interior Lights ...............................

.

.

160

161

2009 TSX 57

０８／０２／０７１７：３１：０６３１ＴＬ１６００００６３

Main Menu

Control Locations

Table Of Contents

MIRROR CONTROLS

(P.

145 )

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

(P.

70 )

2009 TSX

MOONROOF SWITCH

(P.

151 )

HOMELINK BUTTONS

(P.

303 )

AUDIO SYSTEM

(P.

174 )

(P.

290 ) (P.

295 )

＊ DRIVING POSITION

MEMORY SYSTEM

BUTTONS ＊

(P.

142 )

POWER DOOR LOCK

MASTER SWITCH

(Unlocking Fuel Fill

Door)

(P.

124 )

POWER WINDOW

SWITCHES

(P.

147 )

TRUNK RELEASE

BUTTON

(P.

130 )

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

(P.

359 )

ACCESSORY POWER

SOCKET (P.

156 )


＊ : If equipped

58

HAZARD WARNING

BUTTON

(P.

117 )

CLIMATE CONTROL

SYSTEM

(P.

166 )

ACCESSORY POWER

SOCKET

(P.

156 )

USB ADAPTER

CABLE ＊

(P.

199 , 208 , 259 , 269 )

AUXILIARY

INPUT JACK (P.

288 )

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

(P.

376 )

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

(P.

379 )

０８／０２／０６２０：３４：２３３１ＴＬ１６００００６４


Instrument Panel

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)

SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.

63 )

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P.

66 )

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

INDICATOR (P.

62 )

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.

66 )

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR

LAMP (P.

60 , 471 )

CHARGING SYSTEM

INDICATOR

(P.

61 , 470 )

ELECTRIC POWER

STEERING (EPS)

INDICATOR

(P.

65 )

LOW OIL PRESSURE

INDICATOR (P.

60 , 470 )

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.

66 )

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.

66 )

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.

66 )

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM

INDICATOR (P.

67 )

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)

ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P.

63 )

DOOR/TRUNK OPEN

INDICATOR (P.

65 )

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM

INDICATOR (P.

61 , 472 )

SEAT BELT REMINDER

INDICATOR (P.

19 , 60 )

LOW TIRE PRESSURE/TPMS

INDICATOR (P.

64 , 392 )

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.

62 )

SIDE AIRBAG OFF

INDICATOR (P.

62 )

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

INDICATOR (P.

61 )

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

(P.

67 )

(P.

67 )

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

2009 TSX 59

０８／０２／０６２０：３４：３４３１ＴＬ１６００００６５


Instrument Panel Indicators

The instrument panel has many indicators to give you important information about your vehicle.

Seat Belt Reminder

Indicator

This indicator comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position. It reminds you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.

A beeper also sounds if you have not fastened your seat belt.

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT

BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display.

If you turn the ignition switch to the

ON (II) position before fastening your seat belt, the beeper sounds and the indicator flashes. If you do not fasten your seat belt before the beeper stops, the indicator stops flashing but remains on.

If your front passenger does not fasten their seat belt, the indicator comes on about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON

(II) position.

If either of you do not fasten your seat belt while driving, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash again at regular intervals, and you will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT

BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER

SEAT BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more information, see page 19 .

Malf unction Indicator

Lamp


EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page 471 .

Low Oil Pressure

Indicator

The engine can be severely damaged if this indicator flashes or stays on when the engine is running, and you will also see a ‘‘CHECK ENGINE

OIL LEVEL’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more information, see page 470 .

60 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３４：４５３１ＴＬ１６００００６６



Charging System

Indicator

If this indicator comes on when the engine is running, the battery is not being charged, and you will also see a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page 470 .

Immobilizer System

Indicator

This indicator comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to the

ON (II) position. It will then go off if you have inserted a properly-coded ignition key. If it is not a properlycoded key, the indicator will blink, and the engine’s fuel system will be disabled (see page 121 ).

U.S.

Canada

Parking Brake and

Brake System

Indicator

This indicator has two functions:

1.

It comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It is a reminder to check the parking brake. Driving with the parking brake not fully released can damage the rear brakes, axles, and tires.

If you drive without releasing the parking brake, a beeper will sound, and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE

PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the multi-information display (see page 153 ).

2.

If it stays on after you have fully released the parking brake while the engine is running, or if it comes on while driving, it can indicate a problem in the brake system. You will also see a

‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ or

‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page 472 .

2009 TSX 61

０８／０２／０６２０：３４：５５３１ＴＬ１６００００６７



Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) Indicator

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and when the ignition switch is turned to the START (III) position. If this indicator comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the ABS. If this happens, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS

SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more information, see page 390 .

Supplemental Restraint

System Indicator


ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates a potential problem with your front airbags. This indicator will also alert you to a potential problem with your side airbags, passenger’s side airbag cutoff system, side curtain airbags, automatic seat belt tensioners, driver’s seat position sensor, or the front passenger’s weight sensors.


AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page 31 .

U.S.

Canada

Side Airbag Of f

Indicator


ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates that the passenger’s side airbag has automatically shut off. You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG

OFF’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more information, see page 32 .

62 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３５：０６３１ＴＬ１６００００６８



Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA) System Indicator

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and when the ignition switch is turned to the START (III) position.

If it comes on and stays on at any other time, or it does not come on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, there is a problem with the VSA system. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA

SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display. Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.

Without VSA, your vehicle still has normal driving ability, but will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement. For more information, see page 398 .

VSA Activation Indicator

This indicator has three functions:

1.

It comes on as a reminder that you have turned off the vehicle stability assist (VSA) system.

2.

It flashes when VSA is active (see page 398 ).

3.

It comes on along with the VSA system indicator if there is a problem with the VSA system.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA

SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display.

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and when the ignition switch is turned to the START (III) position. For more information, see page 398 .

2009 TSX 63

０８／０２／０６２０：３５：１８３１ＴＬ１６００００６９



Low Tire Pressure/

TPMS Indicator

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

This indicator has two functions:

1.

If it comes on while driving, it indicates that one or more of your vehicle’s tires are significantly low on pressure.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE

PRESSURE’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 394 ).

Check the tire pressure monitor on the multi-information display and determine the cause (see page 394 ).

If this happens, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, check which tire has lost pressure on the multiinformation display, and determine the cause. If it is because of a flat tire, have the flat tire repaired as soon as possible. If two or more tires are underinflated, call a professional towing service. For more information, see page 481 .

2.

If this indicator begins to flash, there is a problem with the tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS). You will also see a

‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. The indicator continues to flash for a while (approximately 1 minute), then stays on. If this happens, have your dealer check the system as soon as possible.

For more information, see page

395 .

Turn Signal and

Hazard Warning

Indicators

The left or right turn signal indicator blinks when you signal a lane change or turn. If an indicator does not blink or blinks rapidly, it usually means one of the turn signal bulbs is burned out (see pages 434 and ).

Replace the bulb as soon as possible, since other drivers cannot see that you are signaling.

436

When you press the hazard warning button, both turn signal indicators and all turn signals on the outside of the vehicle flash.

64 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３５：２８３１ＴＬ１６００００７０



Electric Power Steering

(EPS) Indicator

This indicator normally comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position and goes off after the engine starts. If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the electric power steering system.

If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine.

Reset the system by restarting the engine. The indicator will stay on, but should go off after driving a short distance. If it does not go off, or comes back on again while driving, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With the indicator on, the EPS may be turned off, making the vehicle harder to steer.

If you turn the steering wheel to the full left or right position repeatedly while stopping or driving at very low speed, you may feel slightly harder steering in order to prevent damage to the steering box caused by overheating.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK POWER

STEERING SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display.

Door/Trunk Open

Indicator

This indicator comes on red if any door or the trunk lid is not closed tightly.

You will also see a corresponding indicator(s) on the multi-information display to indicate which door and/ or the trunk is not closed tightly (see page 11 ).

2009 TSX 65

０８／０２／０６２０：３５：４１３１ＴＬ１６００００７１



Lights On Indicator

This indicator reminds you that the exterior lights are on. It comes on when the light switch is in either the or position. If you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY

(I) or the LOCK (0) position without turning off the light switch, this indicator will remain on. A reminder chime will also sound when you open the driver’s door.

U.S. TSX and Canadian TSX Premium

This indicator will also come on when the light switch is in AUTO and the lights turn on automatically.

High Beam Indicator

This indicator comes on with the high beam headlights. For more information, see page 111 .

This indicator also comes on with reduced brightness when the daytime running lights (DRL) are on

(see page 114 ).

Fog Light Indicator

If equipped

This indicator comes on when you turn on the fog lights. For more information, see page 115 .

Cruise Main Indicator

This indicator comes on when you turn on the cruise control system by pressing the CRUISE button on the steering wheel (see page 299 ).

Cruise Control Indicator

This indicator comes on when you set the cruise control. See page

299 for information on operating the cruise control.

66 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３５：５３３１ＴＬ１６００００７２



Low Fuel Indicator

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It comes on as a reminder that you must refuel soon. You will also see a

‘‘FUEL LOW’’ message on the multiinformation display.

When the indicator comes on, there are about 2.8 U.S. gal (10.5 ) of fuel remaining in the tank.

When the needle reaches E, there is a very small amount of fuel in the tank.

System Message

Indicator

This indicator comes on when there is a system message on the multiinformation display. Press the INFO button on the steering wheel (see page 71 ) to see the message (see page 79 ).

Most of the time, this indicator comes on along with other indicators in the instrument panel such as the seat belt reminder indicator, SRS indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

Security System Indicator

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

This indicator comes on when the security system is set. For more information, see page 293 .

2009 TSX 67

０８／０２／０６２０：３６：０１３１ＴＬ１６００００７３


Gauges

TACHOMETER

TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

SPEEDOMETER

FUEL GAUGE

Fuel Gauge

This shows how much fuel you have. It may show slightly more or less than the actual amount.

The needle returns to the bottom after you turn off the ignition.

Avoid driving with an extremely low f uel level. Running out of f uel could cause the engine to misf ire, damaging the catalytic converter.

U.S. model is shown.

68


DISPLAY

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３６：０７３１ＴＬ１６００００７４


Temperature Gauge

This shows the temperature of the engine’s coolant. During normal operation, the pointer should rise from the bottom mark to about the middle of the gauge. In severe driving conditions, such as very hot weather or a long period of uphill driving, the pointer may rise to the upper zone. If it reaches the red

(hot) mark, pull safely to the side of the road. Turn to page 468 for instructions and precautions on checking the engine cooling system.

If the pointer of the temperature gauge reaches to or above the red mark, you will also see the ‘‘WATER

TEMP HOT’’ message on the multiinformation display. This will alert you that the engine should be cooled down.

2009 TSX

Gauges

69

０８／０２／０６２０：３６：１６３１ＴＬ１６００００７５


Multi-Information Display

The multi-information display in the instrument panel displays various information and messages when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. Some of the messages help you operate your vehicle more comfortably.

Others help to keep you aware of the periodic maintenance your vehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving.

There are three types of messages; normal display messages, engine oil life and maintenance messages, and system messages.

You can select the displayed language and also customize some vehicle control settings to your liking with the multi-information display and the three buttons on the steering wheel (see page 71 ).

Normal Display Messages

Remote transmitter 1 is used.

Remote transmitter 2 is used.

When you unlock and open the driver’s door, the display shows

‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2’’ depending on which remote transmitter you use, and the driver’s seat moves to the position stored in that remote transmitter (see page

142 ).

If you do not fasten your seat belt, you will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT

BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

These messages go off in about several seconds after you insert the ignition key.

70 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３６：２６３１ＴＬ１６００００７６


SEL/RESET BUTTON


In the multi-information display, the system message is also displayed

(see page 78 ) and you can customize your vehicle control settings (see page 81 ).

MIDDLE

SEGMENT

UPPER

SEGMENT

In the normal display mode, the upper and middle segments display trip computer information, such as fuel economy or average speed. The lower segment displays the odometer/trip meter (A/B), outside temperature, and engine oil life and maintenance item code(s).

INFO BUTTONS ( ▲ ▼ )

With the ignition switch in the ON

(II) position, the multi-information display changes as shown in the next page each time you press the INFO

( ▲ ▼ ) button or SEL/RESET button.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, what you last selected is displayed.

LOWER

SEGMENT


The multi-information display consists of an upper segment, a middle segment and a lower segment.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

71

０８／０２／０６２０：３６：３２３１ＴＬ１６００００７７



Trip Computer (See page 74 .)

HFL ＊

(See page 77 .)

Outside Temperature

(See page 74 .)


72

Engine Oil Life

(See page 76 .)

＊ : This display will be shown when the

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink is activated.

2009 TSX

Tire Pressure for each tire

(See page 76 .)

: Press the INFO button ( ▲ ▼ ).

: Press the SEL/RESET button.

０８／０２／０６２０：３６：４３３１ＴＬ１６００００７８


Odometer

U.S.

Canada

Trip Meter

TRIP METER A


TRIP METER B

When you reset Trip A, average fuel economy A is reset at the same time.

When you reset Trip B, average fuel economy B is reset.

In the customizing mode, you can set

Trip A and average fuel economy A to reset at the same time when you refuel your vehicle (see page 89 ).

ODOMETER

The odometer shows the total distance your vehicle has been driven. It measures miles in U.S.

models and kilometers in Canadian models. It is illegal under U.S.

federal law and Canadian provincial regulations to disconnect, reset, or alter the odometer with the intent to change the number of miles or kilometers indicated.


This meter shows the number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since you last reset it. There are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip

B. Each trip meter works independently, so you can keep track of two different distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, and then press and hold the SEL/RESET button until the number resets to

‘‘0.0.’’

2009 TSX 73

０８／０２／０６２０：３６：５４３１ＴＬ１６００００７９



Outside Temperature

U.S.

CANADA

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

This shows the outside Fahrenheit temperature in U.S. models, and

Centigrade temperature in Canadian models.

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. The temperature reading can be affected by heat reflection from the road surface, engine heat, and the exhaust from surrounding traffic. This can cause an incorrect temperature reading when your vehicle speed is under

19 mph (30 km/h). When you start your trip, the sensor is not fully acclimatized, therefore it may take several minutes until the proper temperature is displayed.

In certain weather conditions, temperature readings near freezing

(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is forming on the road surface.

You can adjust the outside temperature display (see page 88 ).

Trip Computer

U.S.

CANADA

INST. MPG (U.S. models)/INST. L/

100 km (Canadian models)

This shows your current fuel mileage.

When you turn off the engine, INST.

MPG or INST. L/100 km is also reset.

74 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３７：０４３１ＴＬ１６００００８０



AVERAGE FUEL A/B

This shows your vehicle’s average fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models) or liter/100 km (Canadian models) since you last reset the Trip A or

Trip B.

You can customize the Trip A and

AVERAGE FUEL A reset condition on the multi-information display (see page 89 ).

RANGE

This shows the estimated distance you can travel on the fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy you received over the last several miles(U.S.) or kilometers (Canada), so it will vary with changes in speed, traffic, etc.

ELAPSED TIME

This shows the time passed traveled since you last reset it. When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, ELAPSED TIME is reset.

If you want to reset the ELAPSED

TIME manually, go to the trip computer’s ELAPSED TIME display, and press and hold the SEL/RESET button until the number resets.

You can customize the ELAPSED

TIME reset condition on the multiinformation display (see page 90 ).

AVERAGE SPEED

This shows the average speed you are traveling in miles per hour (mph) for U.S. models or kilometers per hour (km/h) for Canadian models.

To reset the AVERAGE SPEED you have traveled, press and hold the

SEL/RESET button until the number resets.

2009 TSX 75

０８／０２／０６２０：３７：１３３１ＴＬ１６００００８１



Engine Oil Lif e

ENGINE OIL LIFE

Tire Pressure Monitor

U.S.

Canada

This shows the remaining life of the engine oil. It shows 100% after the engine oil is replaced and the display is reset. The engine oil life is calculated based on engine operating conditions. For more information, see page 409 .

When the tire pressure monitor is shown on the multi-information display, press the SEL/RESET button. The display changes as shown.

You can see the pressure of each tire in this monitor. If one or more tires are low, inflate them to the correct pressure. For more information, see page 394 .

76 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３７：１９３１ＴＬ１６００００８２


Bluetooth HandsFreeLink To use the system, your cell phone and the HFL system must be linked.

Not all cell phones are compatible with this system. Refer to page

307 for instructions on how to link your cell phone to the HFL and how to receive or make phone calls, or visit the acura.com/handsfreelink website.


You can receive or make phone calls from your cell phone through your vehicle’s Bluetooth

HandsFreeLink (HFL) system without touching your cell phone.

2009 TSX 77

０８／０２／０６２０：３７：２８３１ＴＬ１６００００８３



System Messages

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

If there is a problem with your vehicle, for example, the engine oil level is low or a door is not fully closed, the multi-information display will show you the problem. It does this by interrupting the current display with one or more messages.

The system message(s) triggers the appropriate indicator(s) on the instrument panel, including the system message indicator, to come on. The system message indicator does not go off until the problem(s) is corrected.

You will also hear a beep when the system message comes on for the first time.

Most of the messages are displayed for about 5 seconds, and then the normal display returns. If there are several system messages to be shown, the display switches these messages every 5 seconds.

To switch the message(s) before 5 seconds have elapsed, press the

INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button on the steering wheel.

Even if you press the INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button, some messages stay on or come on again at regular intervals until the problem is corrected.

If the system message indicator remains lit on the instrument panel, you can see the corresponding message(s) again by pressing the

INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button repeatedly.

Here is a list of all messages:

78 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３７：４６３１ＴＬ１６００００８４


U.S.

Canada

See page

11

See page

19

See page

19

See page

32

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

See page

32 Canada

2009 TSX

See page

153

See page

428

See page

472


See page

470

See page

471

See page

470

See page

390

See page

398

See page

69

CONTINUED

79

０８／０２／０８１４：１７：３７３１ＴＬ１６００００８５



See page

394

See page

395

See page

395

See page

395

See page

379

See page

67

Canada only

80 2009 TSX

See page

65

See page

122

See page

122

See page

123

See page

425

See page

114

See page

410

See page

411

See page

413

See page

358

０８／０２／０６２０：３８：１３３１ＴＬ１６００００８６



Customized Settings

DRIVER’S ID

You can customize some vehicle control settings. To enter the customizing mode, press and hold either INFO button ( ▲ ▼ ) for more than 3 seconds. To change the settings, the ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position, and the vehicle must be stopped with the transmission in Park (automatic) or with the parking brake set (manual).


ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) position, move the shift lever out of

Park (automatic) or release the parking brake (manual), the display will change to the normal screen.

If you try to enter the customizing mode while the vehicle is moving, you will see a ‘‘MUST STOP AND

SHIFT TO PARK TO CHANGE

SETTINGS’’ (automatic) or ‘‘MUST

STOP AND SET PARK BRAKE TO

CHANGE SETTINGS’’ (manual) message and you cannot change the settings.

You can customize some vehicle control settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and

‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately. If ‘‘DRIVER

1’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2’’ is not displayed, customizing is not possible.

To have the driver’s ID detected, make sure your remote transmitter is linked to the system and the driver’s door is unlocked with a

2009 TSX corresponding remote transmitter.

See page 127 to link your remote transmitter to your vehicle.

If the remote transmitter is not linked, ‘‘DRIVER UNKNOWN

CUSTOMIZE IMPOSSIBLE’’ will be displayed, and you cannot customize the settings.

If you use the key to unlock the driver’s door, the system cannot recognize either ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or

‘‘DRIVER 2.’’

If you want to change any vehicle control settings, select CHG

SETTING, then press the SEL/

RESET button.

Refer to the table on the following pages about the settings you want to customize.

CONTINUED

81

０８／０２／０６２０：３８：２１３１ＴＬ１６００００８７



Group Setup

METER SETUP

(P.

86 )

Menu Item

LANGUAGE SELECTION

ADJUST OUTSIDE

TEMP. DISPLAY

Description

Changes the language used in the display.

Changes the outside temperature reading above or below its current reading.

POSITION SETUP

(P.

92 )

LIGHTING SETUP

(P.

94 )

TRIP A RESET with REFUEL

ELAPSED TIME RESET

MEMORY POSITION LINK

INTERIOR LIGHT

DIMMING TIME

HEADLIGHT

AUTO OFF TIMER

AUTO LIGHT

SENSITIVITY ＊ 2

Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy to reset when you refuel.

Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.

Changes the driver’s seat position to a stored setting.

Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights stay on after you close the doors.

Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lights stay on after you close the driver’s door.

Changes the timing of when the headlights come on. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTO position.

＊ 1 : Default setting

＊ 2 : U.S. TSX and Canadian TSX Premium

TRIP A

ON ＊ 1

OFF

60 sec

30 sec ＊ 1

60 sec

30 sec

15 sec ＊ 1

MAX

HIGH

MID ＊ 1

Setting Option

ENGLISH ＊ 1

FRENCH

SPANISH

− 5°F ∼ ± 0°F ＊ 1 ∼ 5°F

(U.S.)

− 3°C ∼ ± 0°C ＊ 1 ∼ 3°C

(Canada)

ON

OFF ＊ 1

IGN OFF ＊ 1 TRIP B

15 sec

0 sec

LOW

MIN

Page

87

88

96

97

89

90

93

95

82 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３８：２８３１ＴＬ１６００００８８


Group Setup

DOOR SETUP

(P.

99 )

Menu Item

AUTO DOOR LOCK

DOOR LOCK MODE

KEYLESS LOCK

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

SECURITY RELOCK

TIMER

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

DEFAULT ALL

(P.

108 )

＊ 1 :

＊ 2 :

＊ 3 :

Default setting

Default setting for automatic transmission

Default setting for manual transmission


Description

Changes when the doors automatically lock.

Changes which doors unlock with the remote transmitter in a first push.

The exterior lights flash each time you press the

LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also sound when you press the LOCK button twice.

Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock but do not open the door.

Changes when the doors automatically unlock.

Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default.

Setting Option

SHIFT FROM P (A/T only)

WITH VEH SPD ＊ 1

OFF

DRIVER DOOR ＊ 1

ALL DOORS

ON ＊ 1

OFF

90 sec

60 sec

30 sec ＊ 1

SHIFT TO P ＊ 2

IGN OFF ＊ 3

OFF

SET

CANCEL

ALL DOORS

Page

100

101

103

104

106

108

2009 TSX 83

０８／０２／０６２０：３８：４０３１ＴＬ１６００００８９



Customize Settings

You can customize some of the vehicle control settings to your preference. Here are the settings you can customize:

METER SETUP

POSITION SETUP

LIGHTING SETUP

DOOR SETUP

When you want to change the vehicle control settings, press the

INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button to select CHG

SETTING, then press the SEL/

RESET button.

Each time you press the INFO ( ▲ /

▼ ) button, the screen changes as shown on the next page. Press the

INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button, until you see the setup you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

If you do not make any changes, select ‘‘EXIT,’’ the display returns to normal display.

You can also use the select/reset knob in the instrument panel. Turn the knob to select a setting and press it to enter your selection.

If you want the settings as they were when the vehicle left the factory, select DEFAULT ALL, as described on page 108 .

84 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３８：４６３１ＴＬ１６００００９０


Any of the normal displays

Press and hold.

: Press the SEL/

RESET button.


2009 TSX


METER SETUP

See page 86 .

POSITION SETUP

See page 92 .

LIGHTING SETUP

See page 94 .

DOOR SETUP

See page 99 .

85

０８／０２／０６２０：３８：５６３１ＴＬ１６００００９１



Meter Setup

Here are the four custom settings for the meter setup:

LANGUAGE SELECTION

ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.

DISPLAY

TRIP A RESET with REFUEL

ELAPSED TIME RESET

While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.


▼ ) button, the screen changes as shown in the illustration. Press the

INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

86



2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３９：０７３１ＴＬ１６００００９２


Language Selection


There are three language selections you can make: English, French, and

Spanish. To choose the language you want, follow these instructions:

You can choose this item to customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select the desired language by pressing the INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’ message appears, go back to

‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ and repeat the procedure again.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

87

０８／０２／０６２０：３９：１６３１ＴＬ１６００００９３



Adjust Outside Temp. Display

U.S. models Canadian models U.S. models Canadian models

If you sometimes find that the temperature reading is a few degrees above or below the actual temperature, you can adjust it by following these instructions:


Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the setting.

Adjust the outside temperature value by pressing the INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET button to set the desired value.

88 2009 TSX



‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.

DISPLAY’’ and repeat the procedure again.

０８／０２／０６２０：３９：２６３１ＴＬ１６００００９４


Trip A Reset With Refuel


To cause Trip A and average fuel for trip A to reset every time you refuel your vehicle, follow these instructions:



Select ON or OFF by pressing the

INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/

RESET button.


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’ message appears, go back to ‘‘TRIP

A RESET with REFUEL’’ and repeat the procedure again.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

89

０８／０２／０６２０：３９：３６３１ＴＬ１６００００９５



Elapsed Time Reset

There are three elapsed time reset choices you can make:

IGN OFF − The elapsed time is reset when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

TRIP A − The elapsed time is reset when the Trip A is reset.

TRIP B − The elapsed time is reset when the Trip B is reset.



Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

90 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３９：４２３１ＴＬ１６００００９６



‘‘ELAPSED TIME RESET’’ and repeat the procedure again.



2009 TSX 91

０８／０２／０６２０：３９：４８３１ＴＬ１６００００９７



Position Setup

You can customize the MEMORY

POSITION LINK setting in position setup.

While ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.



INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button until you see the custom setting then press the

SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

92



2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：３９：５８３１ＴＬ１６００００９８


Memory Position Link


If ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ is set to ‘‘ON,’’ the driver’s seat moves to the position stored in the memory

(see page 142 ) when you open the driver’s door, using the remote transmitter.

You can choose this item to customize from ‘‘POSITION

SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO ( ▲ /

▼ ) button repeatedly.




RESET button.



‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ and repeat the procedure again.

2009 TSX 93

０８／０２／０６２０：４０：０７３１ＴＬ１６００００９９



Lighting Setup

Here are the three custom settings for the lighting setup:

INTERIOR LIGHT

DIMMING TIME

HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER

AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY ＊

While ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.




94


RESET button.


＊ : U.S. TSX, Canadian TSX Premium

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４０：１７３１ＴＬ１６０００１００


Interior Light Dimming Time


The interior lights fade out when you close all doors. To change how long the lights stay on before they fade out, follow these instructions:

You can choose this item to customize from ‘‘LIGHTING




Select the desired setting (15 SEC,

30 SEC, or 60 SEC) by pressing the


RESET button.

2009 TSX



‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING

TIME’’ and repeat the procedure again.

CONTINUED

95

０８／０２／０６２０：４０：２４３１ＴＬ１６０００１０１



Headlight Auto Off Timer

The headlights, parking lights, side marker lights, taillights, and license plate lights go off after the selected time when you remove the key from the ignition switch and close the driver’s door. To change how long the lights stay on before they go off, follow these instructions:





Select the desired setting (60 SEC,

30 SEC, 15 SEC or 0 SEC) by pressing the INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

96 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４０：３６３１ＴＬ１６０００１０２





‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’ and repeat the procedure again.

Auto Light Sensitivity


The headlights automatically come on when the headlight switch is in the AUTO position and the ambient light reaches a changeable level. You can select the auto light sensitivity from the following five levels:

MAX −

The headlights come on when it is bright.

HIGH −

The headlights come on when it is somewhat bright.

MID −

The headlights come on when it is as bright as sunset or sunrise.

LOW −

The headlights come on when it is somewhat dark.

MIN −

The headlights come on when it is dark.




CONTINUED

2009 TSX 97

０８／０２／０６２０：４０：４３３１ＴＬ１６０００１０３




Select the desired setting (MAX,

HIGH, MID, LOW or MIN) by pressing the INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’ message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO

LIGHT SENSITIVITY’’ and repeat the procedure again.

98 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４０：５４３１ＴＬ１６０００１０４


Door Setup

Here are the five custom settings for the door setup:

AUTO DOOR LOCK

DOOR LOCK MODE

KEYLESS LOCK

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

SECURITY RELOCK TIMER

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

While ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.





RESET button.


2009 TSX


CONTINUED

99

０８／０２／０６２０：４１：０４３１ＴＬ１６０００１０５



Auto Door Lock

There are three settings you can choose from:

SHIFT FROM P −

The doors lock whenever you move the shift lever out of Park.

(Automatic transmission model only)

WITH VEH SPD −

The doors lock when the vehicle speed reaches about 10 mph (about

15 km/h).

OFF −

The auto door lock is deactivated all the time.

You can choose this item to customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button repeatedly.

A/T model is shown.

Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the selecting mode.


100 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４１：１２３１ＴＬ１６０００１０６




DOOR LOCK’’ and repeat the procedure again.

Door Lock Mode


2009 TSX

To select whether the driver’s door unlocks or all the doors unlock when you unlock the doors with the remote transmitter or the key, follow these instructions.


CONTINUED

101

０８／０２／０６２０：４１：１８３１ＴＬ１６０００１０７






102 2009 TSX

If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’ message appears, go back to ‘‘KEY

AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE’’ and repeat the procedure again.

０８／０２／０６２０：４１：２７３１ＴＬ１６０００１０８



Keyless Lock Acknowledgment

When you push the LOCK button on the remote transmitter, some exterior lights flash, and a beeper sounds when you push the LOCK button again within 5 seconds to verify that the doors and the trunk are locked and the security system has set (see page 293 ). You can customize the exterior lights not to flash and the beeper not to sound.





RESET button.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

103

０８／０２／０６２０：４１：３４３１ＴＬ１６０００１０９



Security Relock Timer

If you unlock the doors with the remote transmitter, but do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the doors automatically relock and the security system sets.

You can change this relock time from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.



‘‘KEYLESS LOCK

ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ and repeat the procedure again.


104 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４１：４２３１ＴＬ１６０００１１０





2009 TSX



‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ and repeat the procedure again.

CONTINUED

105

０８／０２／０６２０：４１：５１３１ＴＬ１６０００１１１



Auto Door Unlock

There are five possible settings for automatic transmission models and three possible settings for manual transmission models.

Automatic transmission model only

DRIVER DOOR WITH SHIFT TO P

− The driver’s door unlocks when you move the shift lever to Park.

Automatic transmission model only

ALL DOORS WITH SHIFT TO P −

All the doors unlock when you move the shift lever to Park.

DRIVER DOOR WITH IGN OFF −

The driver’s door unlocks when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK

(0) position.

ALL DOORS WITH IGN OFF − All the doors unlock when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

OFF − The auto door unlock is deactivated all the time. This is the factory default setting.


106 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４２：０２３１ＴＬ１６０００１１２






If you choose ‘‘DRIVER DOOR with

SHIFT to P,’’ you will see the above display.

If you choose ‘‘ALL DOORS WITH

IGN OFF,’’ you will see the above display.

Press the INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button to switch the door lock mode setting.

Then, press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.




DOOR UNLOCK’’ and repeat the procedure again.

2009 TSX 107

０８／０２／０６２０：４２：１１３１ＴＬ１６０００１１３



DEFAULT ALL

If you want to set the default settings, press the INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button to select DEFAULT ALL, then press the SEL/RESET button.

To set the default settings, press the

INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button to select SET then press the SEL/RESET button.

If you want to cancel DEFAULT

ALL, select CANCEL, then press the

SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to the previous display.

When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen returns to the default all setting display.

If the setting is not successfully completed, ‘‘FAILED’’ is shown for several seconds, and then the screen goes back to the normal message mode. Repeat the same procedure to select DEFAULT ALL.

108 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４２：２２３１ＴＬ１６０００１１４


Controls Near the Steering Wheel

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

FRONT FOG LIGHTS ＊ 3 (P.

115 )

(P.

111 )/ INSTRUMENT PANEL

BRIGHTNESS(P.

115 )

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/

WASHERS (P.

110 )

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF

INDICATOR

(P.

33 )

CENTER DISPLAY ＊ 2

REMOTE AUDIO

CONTROL BUTTONS

(P.

287 )

VEHICLE STABILITY

ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM

OFF SWITCH (P.

399 )

BLUETOOTH

HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM

VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

(P.

308 )

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE

CONTROL BUTTONS ＊ 2

HORN ＊ 1

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS (P.

118 )

Vehicle without navigation system is shown.

INTERFACE DIAL ＊ 2

(P.

222 )

SELECTOR KNOB ＊ 3

(P.

175 )

HAZARD WARNING

BUTTON

(P.

117 )

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

(P.

117 , 146 )

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS

(P.

299 )


BUTTONS (P.

71 )

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

(P.

141 )

＊ 1 :

＊ 2 :

＊ 3 :

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.

Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

If equipped

2009 TSX 109

０８／０２／０６２０：４２：３２３１ＴＬ１６０００１１５


Windshield Wipers and Washers

ADJUSTMENT RING

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

MIST

OFF

INT − Intermittent

LO − Low speed

HI − High speed

Windshield washers

Push the right lever up or down to select a position.

MIST − The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.

OFF − The wipers are not activated.

INT − The length of the wipe interval is varied automatically according to vehicle’s speed.

Vary the delay by turning the adjustment ring. If you turn it to the shortest delay ( position), the wipers change to low speed operation when the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

LO − The wipers run at low speed.

HI − The wipers run at high speed.

Windshield Washer − Pull the wiper control lever toward you, and hold it. The washers spray until you release the lever. The wipers run at low speed, then complete one more sweep after you release the lever.

110 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４２：４３３１ＴＬ１６０００１１６


1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Turn signal

Off

Parking and instrument panel lights

AUTO ＊

Headlights on

High beams

Flash high beams

＊ Fog lights off

Fog lights on ＊

＊ : If equipped

Turn Signals and Headlights

Turn Signal − Push down on the left lever to signal a left turn and up to signal a right turn. To signal a lane change, push lightly on the lever and hold it. The lever will return to the center when you release it or complete a turn.

Headlights the ‘‘

− Turning the switch to

’’ position turns on the parking lights, taillights, instrument panel lights, side-marker lights, and rear license plate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ position turns on the headlights.

’’

When the light switch is in the

‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the lights on indicator comes on as a reminder.

This indicator stays on if you leave the lights on and turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or

LOCK (0) position.

2009 TSX

If you leave the lights on with the key removed from the ignition switch, you will hear a reminder chime when you open the driver’s door.

High Beams − Push the left lever forward until you hear a click. The blue high beam indicator will come on (see page 66 ). Pull the lever back to return to the low beams.

To flash the high beams, pull the lever back lightly, then release it.

The high beams will stay on as long as you hold the lever back.

111

０８／０２／０８１４：１７：４６３１ＴＬ１６０００１１７


Headlights


AUTO − The automatic lighting feature turns on the headlights and all other exterior lights, when it senses low ambient light.

To turn on automatic lighting, turn the light switch to AUTO at any time.

The lights will come on automatically when the outside light level becomes low (at dusk, for example). The lights on indicator comes on as a reminder. The lights and indicator will turn off automatically when the system senses high ambient light.

The lights will remain on when you turn off the ignition switch. They will turn off automatically when you remove the key and open the driver’s door. To turn them on again, either turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position or turn the light switch to the position.

Even with the automatic lighting feature turned on, we recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night or in a dense fog, or when you enter dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHT

SENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page

97 .

Do not leave the light switch in

AUTO if you will not be driving the vehicle for an extended period (a week or more). You should also turn off the lights if you plan to leave the engine idling or off for a long time.

LIGHT SENSOR

The automatic lighting feature is controlled by a sensor located on top of the dashboard. Do not cover this sensor or spill liquids on it.

112 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４３：００３１ＴＬ１６０００１１８


Headlights

Automatic Lighting Of f Feature

This feature turns off the headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights within 15 seconds after you remove the key and close the driver’s door.

You can change this 15 second timer to 0, 30, or 60 seconds (see page

96 ).

The automatic lighting off feature activates if you leave the headlight switch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position or if the lights are turned on by setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’ position (if equipped), and you remove the key, then open and close the driver’s door.


LOCK (0) position with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door and get out, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the ‘‘AUTO’’ position).

The lights will turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door.

If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights will go off. With the driver’s door open, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.

2009 TSX 113

０８／０２／０６２０：４３：０６３１ＴＬ１６０００１１９


Headlights

Daytime Running Lights

With the headlight switch off or in the position, the high beam headlights and the high beam indicator come on with reduced brightness when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position and release the parking brake. They remain on until you turn the ignition switch off, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normal operation when you turn them on with the switch.

If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL

SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display, there is a problem with the daytime running light system. Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.

114 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４３：１５３１ＴＬ１６０００１２０


Fog Lights

Fog Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness

You can use the fog lights only when the headlights are on low beam.

With the light switch in the AUTO position, you can also use the fog lights when the headlights turn on automatically. They will go off when the headlights turn off, or the daytime running lights are on.

Instrument Panel Brightness


Turn the fog lights on and off by turning the switch next to the headlight switch.

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL KNOB

The knob on the instrument panel controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights. Turn the knob to adjust the brightness with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position and the parking lights on.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

115

０８／０２／０６２０：４３：２２３１ＴＬ１６０００１２１


Instrument Panel Brightness

BRIGHTNESS LEVEL

When you turn the knob, the multiinformation display changes to vertical bars that show you the current level.

You will hear a tone when you reach the maximum or minimum brightness. The brightness level goes out about 5 seconds after you stop adjusting.

To reduce glare at night, the instrument panel illumination dims when you turn the light switch to or position. Turning the knob to the right until you hear a tone will cancel the reduced brightness.

The instrument panel will illuminate with reduced brightness when you unlock and open the driver’s door.

The brightness will increase slightly when you insert the key in the ignition switch, then go to normal brightness when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

If you do not insert the key in the ignition switch after opening the driver’s door, the illumination turns off about 30 seconds after you close the door.

If you insert the key but do not turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the illumination turns off in about 10 seconds.

116 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４３：３２３１ＴＬ１６０００１２２


Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger

Hazard Warning Button

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

Push the button under the audio controls to turn on the hazard warning lights (four-way flashers).

This causes all four outside turn signal lights and both turn signal indicators in the instrument panel to flash. Use the hazard warning lights if you need to park in a dangerous area near heavy traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

Rear Window Def ogger

The rear window defogger will clear fog, frost, and thin ice from the window. Push the defogger button to turn it on and off. The indicator in the button comes on to show the defogger is on. It also shuts off when you turn off the ignition switch. You have to turn the defogger on again when you restart the vehicle.

The defogger will shut itself off within about 10 to 30 minutes according to the outside temperature

(over 32°F, 0°C).

Make sure the rear window is clear and you have good visibility before starting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires on the inside of the rear window can be accidentally damaged. When cleaning the glass, always wipe sideto-side.

Pushing this button also turns the mirror heaters on or off. For more information, see page 146 .

2009 TSX 117

０８／０２／０６２０：４３：４１３１ＴＬ１６０００１２３


Steering Wheel Adjustments

Make any steering wheel adjustments before you start driving.

To adjust

LEVER

Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.

To lock

1.

Pull the lever under the steering column toward you until it stops.

2.

Move the steering wheel so it points toward your chest, not toward your face. Make sure you can see the instrument panel gauges and indicators.

3.

Push the lever forward fully to lock the steering wheel in position.

Make sure the lever is positioned securely at the bottom of the steering column as shown.

4.

Make sure you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up, down, in, and out.

118 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４３：５１３１ＴＬ１６０００１２４


Keys and Locks

KEY

NUMBER

TAG

MASTER KEY

WITH REMOTE

TRANSMITTER

VALET KEY

(Light Gray)

You should have received a key number tag with your keys. You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Use only Acura-approved key blanks.

The master key fits all the locks on your vehicle. The valet key works only in the ignition and the driver’s door lock. You can keep the glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and the valet key at a parking facility.

These keys contain electronic circuits that are activated by the immobilizer system. They will not work to start the engine if the circuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from direct sunlight, high temperature, and high humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.

If they get wet, dry them immediately with a soft cloth.

The valet key does not contain a battery. Do not try to take it apart.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

119

０８／０２／０６２０：４３：５７３１ＴＬ１６０００１２５

Main Menu

Keys and Locks

Table Of Contents

Retractable Master Key

RELEASE BUTTON

Push

Always use the fully-extended key when you insert it to the ignition switch. If the key does not fully extend, the immobilizer system may not operate properly and may prevent the engine from starting.

The key may come in contact with your finger while being retracted or extended. Make sure your fingers do not touch the pivot of the key when retracting or extending the key.

The master key can be retracted into the remote transmitter. To use the key, push the release button to release the key from the transmitter.

The key should be fully extended.

To retract the key, push the release button and at the same time push the key into the remote transmitter until it is securely latched.

120 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４４：０６３１ＴＬ１６０００１２６


Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the immobilizer system indicator should come on briefly, then go off. If the indicator starts to blink, it means the system does not recognize the coding of the key. Turn the ignition switch to the

LOCK (0) position, remove the key, reinsert it, and turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position again.

The system may not recognize your key’s coding if another immobilizer key or other metal object (i.e. key chain) is near the ignition switch when you insert the key.

If the system repeatedly does not recognize the coding of your key, contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle undrivable.

If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact your dealer.

Always take the ignition key with you whenever you leave the vehicle alone.

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry

Canada Standard RSS-210.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

2009 TSX 121

０８／０２／０６２０：４４：１４３１ＴＬ１６０００１２７

Main Menu

Ignition Switch

Table Of Contents

The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY

(I), ON (II), and START (III).

LOCK (0) − You can insert or remove the key only in this position.

To turn the key, push it in slightly. If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the shift lever must also be in Park.

If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft lock may make it difficult to turn the key. Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or right as you turn the key.

ACCESSORY (I) − You can operate the audio system and the accessory power sockets in this position.

If you leave the key in the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) position and open the driver’s door, you will see a ‘‘RETURN IGNITION

SWITCH TO LOCK (0) POSITION’’ message on the multi-information display and hear a reminder beeper.

If you turn the ignition key to the

ACCESSORY (I) position with the driver’s door closed, you will see a

‘‘ACCESSORY (I) POSITION’’ message on the multi-information display to inform you of the key position.

ON (II) − This is the normal key position when driving. Several of the indicators on the instrument panel come on as a test when you turn the ignition switch from the

ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II) position.

122 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４４：２０３１ＴＬ１６０００１２８


START (III) − Use this position only to start the engine. The switch returns to the ON (II) position when you let go of the key.

You will hear a reminder beeper if you leave the key in the ignition switch in the LOCK (0) or the

ACCESSORY (I) position and open the driver’s door. Remove the key to turn off the beeper.

You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’ message on the multi-information display.

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the shift lever must be in Park before you can remove the key from the ignition switch.

Removing the key from the ignition switch while driving locks the steering. This can cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Remove the key from the ignition switch only when parked.

2009 TSX

Ignition Switch

123

０８／０２／０６２０：４４：３０３１ＴＬ１６０００１２９


Door Locks

Unlock

Lock

To Lock

To Unlock

LOCK TAB

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

To lock all doors, push the front of the master door lock switch on either front door, pull the lock tab rearward on the driver’s door, or use the key on the outside lock on the driver’s door.

Pushing the rear of either master door lock switch will unlock all doors.

Pushing forward the lock tab on the driver’s door unlocks only that door.

RED INDICATOR

The lock tab on any passenger’s door locks and unlocks that door.

When the door is unlocked, you can see the red indicator on the lock tab above the inner door handle.

All doors can be locked from the outside by using the key in the driver’s door. To unlock only the driver’s door, insert the key, turn it clockwise, and release it. The remaining doors unlock when you turn the key a second time within a few seconds.

You can customize the door lock/ unlock settings (see page 99 ).

You can open or close the windows and the moonroof by using the key in the driver’s door (see page 149 ).

Locking and unlocking the driver’s door will also lock and unlock the fuel fill door (see page 357 ).

124 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４４：３９３１ＴＬ１６０００１３０


Door Locks

To lock any passenger’s door when getting out of the vehicle, pull the lock tab rearward and close the door.

To lock the driver’s door, remove the key from the ignition switch, pull the lock tab rearward or push the front of the master switch, then close the door.

Default setting

When the vehicle speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h) or more, all the doors lock automatically.

When you shift to P after driving, the driver’s door unlocks.

Lockout Prevention

If you forget and leave the key in the ignition switch, lockout prevention will not allow you to lock the driver’s door. With any door open and the key in the ignition switch, locking with master door lock switch is disabled. If the driver’s door is closed, the lock tab on the driver’s door is not disabled. Pulling the driver’s lock tab rearward will lock all doors. If you try to lock an open driver’s door by pulling the lock tab rearward, the driver’s door lock tab pops out and unlocks the driver’s door.

Childproof Door Locks

LEVER

Lock

Unlock

The childproof door locks are designed to prevent children seated in the rear from accidentally opening the rear doors. Each rear door has a lock lever near the edge. With the lever in the LOCK position (lever is down), the door cannot be opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab. To open the door, push the lock tab forward and use the outside door handle.

2009 TSX 125

０８／０２／０６２０：４４：４９３１ＴＬ１６０００１３１


Remote Transmitter

LED LOCK BUTTON

UNLOCK

BUTTON

PANIC

BUTTON

LOCK − Press this button once to lock all doors. Some exterior lights will flash. When you push LOCK twice within 5 seconds, you will hear a beep to verify that the doors are locked and the security system has set. You cannot lock the doors if any door is not fully closed or if the key is in the ignition switch.

UNLOCK − Press this button once to unlock the driver’s door (or all the doors depending on the door lock setting). Push it twice to unlock the remaining doors. Some exterior lights will flash twice the first time when you push the button.

If you do not open any door within 30 seconds, the doors automatically relock and the security system sets.

The ceiling light and the door activated spotlights come on when you press the UNLOCK button if the lights are in the door activated position. If you do not open any door within 30 seconds (or whatever setting of the interior light dimming time is set to), the light(s) will fade out. If you relock the doors with the remote transmitter before 30 seconds have elapsed, the light(s) will go off immediately.

On the keyless lock acknowledgment, you can deactivate the beep on locking and flashing of the lights (see page 127 ).

To change the lock/unlock setting and the relock timer setting, refer to the customized settings on page 99 .

Locking and unlocking the driver’s door will also lock and unlock the fuel fill door (see page 357 ).

You can also open all power windows and the moonroof from outside the vehicle with the remote transmitter

(see page 149 ).

126 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０７１７：３１：１９３１ＴＬ１６０００１３２



PANIC − Press and hold this button for about 1 second to attract attention; the horn will sound, and the exterior lights will flash for about

30 seconds. To cancel panic mode, press any other button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. Panic mode does not work when the key is in the ignition switch.

TRUNK − Press and hold this button for about 1 second to open the trunk. You cannot open the trunk if the key is in the ignition switch.

The driving position memory activated (Driver 1, Driver 2) is shown on the back of each transmitter. Make sure you store your desired driving position in the memory that is activated by the transmitter you normally carry.

Recalling a Memorized Driving

Position

With Driver 1 With Driver 2

When you unlock the driver’s door with your remote transmitter, each remote transmitter activates the customized settings related to that remote.

2009 TSX

Here are the settings activated with the remote;

Customized settings

(see page 81 ).


Driving position memory

(see page 142 ).

When you open the driver’s door after unlocking it with the remote transmitter, the driver’s seat moves to the position stored in memory.

You will hear two beeps when the movement is completed. The indicator in the related memory button on the driver’s door remains on.

You will also see the ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or

‘‘DRIVER 2’’ message on the multiinformation display, depending on which linked remote transmitter is used.

CONTINUED

127

０８／０２／０６２０：４５：１４３１ＴＬ１６０００１３３



You can turn off this driving position memory activation. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time. The LED in the remote transmitter will blink twice.

Then release the buttons. Doing this also cancels the memory position link setting for that remote and restores the default settings.

To turn the memory position link settings back on, repeat this procedure. The LED will blink once to indicate the feature has been turned on.

Remote Transmitter Care

Avoid dropping or throwing the transmitter.

Protect the transmitter from extreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter in any liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, the replacement needs to be reprogrammed by your dealer.

Replacing the Transmitter

Battery

If it takes several pushes on the button to lock or unlock the doors, replace the battery as soon as possible.

Battery type: CR1616

To replace the battery:

SCREW KEYPAD

1.

Remove the screw at the base of the transmitter with a small

Phillips-head screwdriver.

NOTE: Be careful when removing this screw as the head of the screw can strip out.

2.

Separate the keypad from the transmitter by pushing any button from outside.

128 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４５：２３３１ＴＬ１６０００１３４



BATTERY

3.

Place a cloth on the edge of the keypad, and remove the upper half by carefully prying on the edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver.

4.

Remove the old battery and note the polarity. Make sure the polarity of the new battery is the same ( ＋ side facing down), then insert it in the keypad.

An improperly disposed of battery can be harmf ul to the environment and human health.

Always conf irm local regulations f or battery disposal.

5.

Snap the two halves of the keypad, then install the parts in reverse order.









2009 TSX 129

０８／０２／０６２０：４５：３１３１ＴＬ１６０００１３５


Trunk

The trunk will lock when you lock the driver’s door with the key, the remote transmitter, either master door lock switch, or the lock tab on the driver’s door.

To unlock the trunk, turn the key twice to unlock the doors, push the rear of either master door lock switch, or push UNLOCK twice on the remote transmitter.

TRUNK RELEASE

SWITCH

To open the trunk from the outside, push the release switch, then lift up.

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

You can also open the trunk in either of two ways:

Push the trunk release button on the driver’s door.

Press and hold the trunk release button on the remote transmitter.

130 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４５：４０３１ＴＬ１６０００１３６


Trunk Main Switch

MAIN SWITCH

Trunk

Even if the trunk release is locked with the main switch, you can open the trunk with the remote transmitter.

To close the trunk, use the inner handle to lower the lid, then press down on the back edge.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all times while driving to avoid damaging it, and to prevent exhaust gas from getting into the interior. See

Monoxide Hazard , page 55 .

Carbon

ON

OFF

To protect items in the trunk, you can disable the trunk release button on the driver’s door and the trunk release switch on the trunk lid by turning off the trunk main switch in the glove box and locking the glove box. Make sure either rear seat is not folded down.

If you need to give the key to someone else, give them the valet key.

2009 TSX 131

０８／０２／０６２０：４５：５０３１ＴＬ１６０００１３７


Trunk

Emergency Trunk Opener

TRUNK RELEASE LEVER

Parents should decide if their children should be shown how to use this feature.

For more information about child safety, see page 39 .

Unlocking and Opening the

Trunk Manually

As a safety feature, your vehicle has a release lever on the trunk latch so the trunk can be opened from the inside.

To open the trunk, push the release lever in the direction indicated by the arrow.

132 2009 TSX

RELEASE

BUTTON

If the power door lock system cannot unlock the trunk, unlock and open it manually from inside the vehicle.

To unlock and open the trunk:

1.

Remove the rear left side head restraint by pressing the release button.

０８／０２／０６２０：４５：５８３１ＴＬ１６０００１３８


COVER

2.

Pull up the cover of the tether anchor point on the left side.

3.

Insert the master key in the lock on the rear shelf.

4.

Turn the key clockwise, then release the key. The trunk lid will be opened.

5.

Reinstall the head restraint.

2009 TSX

Trunk

If you need to unlock and open the trunk manually, it means there may be a problem with the power door lock system or the trunk lock. Have the vehicle checked by your dealer.

133

０８／０２／０７１７：３１：３５３１ＴＬ１６０００１３９


Seats

Power Seat Adjustments

See pages 13 − 14 for important safety information and warnings about how to properly position the seats and seatbacks.

The controls for the power adjustable front seats are on the outside edge of each seat bottom.

You can adjust the seats with the ignition switch in any position. Make all seat adjustments before you start driving.

The passenger seat has the same adjustments as the driver’s seat but without any height adjustment.

Driver’s seat only:

Moves the whole seat up and forward, or down and backward.

The front of the seat also tilts up or down at the same time.

Driver’s seat is shown.

Moves the seat forward and backward.


Moves the front of the seat up or down.

Adjusts the seat-back angle forward or backward.


The driver’s seat includes a memory feature. Two seat positions can be stored in separate memories. You can then select a memorized position by pushing the appropriate memory button. Refer to page 142 for how to memorize and select the seat positions.


Raises or lowers the seat.

134 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４６：２２３１ＴＬ１６０００１４０


Driver’s Lumbar Support Head Restraints

See page 14 for important safety information and a warning about improperly positioning head restraints.

Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions to help protect you and your passengers from whiplash and other injuries.

Vary the lumbar support by moving the lever on the side of the seat-back.

Move the lever forward or backward to adjust the lumbar support through its full range.

Seats

They are most effective when you adjust them so the center of the back of the occupant’s head rests against the center of the restraint.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

135

０８／０２／０６２０：４６：３２３１ＴＬ１６０００１４１


Seats

Front CUSHION Rear Center CUSHION

Failure to reinstall the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.

Always replace the head restraints before driving.

RELEASE

BUTTON

LEGS SEAT-BACK

Adjusting the Head Restraint

The head restraints adjust for height.

You need both hands to adjust a restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it while driving. To raise it, pull upward.

To lower the restraint, push the release button sideways, and push the restraint down.

RELEASE

BUTTON

LEGS SEAT-BACK

Removing the Head Restraint

To remove a head restraint for cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as it will go. Push the release button, then pull the restraint out of the seatback.

When reinstalling a head restraint, put the legs back in place. Then adjust it to the appropriate height while pressing the release button.

Make sure the head restraint locks in position when you reinstall it.

136 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４６：４４３１ＴＬ１６０００１４２


Seats

Active Head Restraints

The driver’s and front passenger’s seats have active head restraints. If the vehicle is struck severely from the rear, the occupant properly secured with the seat belt will be pushed against the seat-back and the head restraint will automatically move forward.

This reduces the distance between the restraint and the occupant’s head.

It also helps protect the occupants against whiplash and injuries to the neck and upper spine.

After a collision, the activated restraint should return to its normal position.

If the restraints do not return to their normal position, or in the event of a severe collision, have the vehicle inspected by an Acura dealer.

For a head restraint system to work properly:

Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or from the restraint legs.

Do not place any object between an occupant and the seat-back.

Install each restraint in its proper location.

Only use genuine Acura replacement head restraints.

2009 TSX 137

０８／０２／０６２０：４６：５０３１ＴＬ１６０００１４３


Seats

Folding the Rear Seats

The back of the rear seat folds down to give you direct access to the trunk.

Each side folds down separately.

With only half the seat folded, you can still carry a passenger in the back seat. The seat-back can be released from inside the trunk.

GUIDE

CENTER SHOULDER BELT

When storing cargo, you can move the rear center shoulder belt out of the way by removing the belt from the guide.

RELEASE

To release the seat-back from inside the trunk, pull the release under the trunk panel. Push the seat-back down from inside the trunk, or pull the seat-back down from inside the vehicle.

138 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４７：０２３１ＴＬ１６０００１４４


Seats

Remove any items from the seat before you fold down the seat-back.

Make sure the rear seat armrest is stored.

Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger’s seat, as this could cause the weight sensors to work improperly.

If the rear head restraints get caught on the front seat backs and you cannot fold down the rear seat-back fully, you can remove the head restraints (see page 136 ).

Make sure the removed head restraints are securely stored.

To lock the seat-back upright, push it firmly against the trunk panel. Make sure it is latched in place by pulling on the top of the seat.

Make sure all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the rear seatback, and the center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide whenever the seat-back is in its upright position.

Be sure there are no twists in any shoulder belt.

Do not put any heavy items on the seat-back when it is folded down.

Make sure all items in the trunk, or items extending through the opening into the back seat, are secured.

Loose items can fly forward and cause injury if you have to brake hard. See

367 .

Carrying Cargo on page

Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the trunk lid open.

See Carbon Monoxide Hazard page 55 .

on

2009 TSX 139

０８／０２／０６２０：４７：０９３１ＴＬ１６０００１４５


Seats

Armrest

Front

LEVER

Rear

To use the console lid as an armrest, slide it to the desired position while pulling up the release lever. Release the lever to lock it in position where you want it to stop.

The rear seat armrest is in the center of the rear seat. Pivot it down to use it.

A beverage holder is located in the armrest.

140 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４７：１８３１ＴＬ１６０００１４６


Seat Heaters

Passenger’s

Seat

HEATERS

Driver’s

Seat

Both front seats are equipped with seat heaters. Because of the sensors for the side airbag cutoff system, there is no heater in the passenger’s seat-back. The ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position to use the heaters.

SEAT HEATER SWITCH

Push the front of the switch, HI, to rapidly heat up the seat. After the seat reaches a comfortable temperature, select LO by pushing the back of the switch. This will keep the seat warm.

In the HI setting, the heater turns off when the seat gets warm, and turns back on after the seat’s temperature drops.

In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously. It does not cycle with temperature changes.

Follow these precautions whenever you use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat the seats quickly, because it draws large amounts of current from the battery.

If the engine is left idling for an extended period, do not use the seat heaters even on the LO setting. It can weaken the battery, causing hard starting.

2009 TSX 141

０８／０２／０７１７：３１：４５３１ＴＬ１６０００１４７


Driving Position Memory System


Your vehicle has a memory feature for the driver’s seat position.

Two seat positions can be stored in separate memories. You select a memorized position by pushing the appropriate button or using the appropriate remote transmitter

(Driver 1 or Driver 2).

This setting can be linked or unlinked with the remote transmitter.

To switch the link setting, see page

93 .

Storing a Driving Position in

Memory

Store a driving position only when the vehicle is parked.

1.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position. You cannot add a new driving position to the memory unless the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. You can recall a memorized position with the ignition switch in any position.

2.

Adjust the seat to a comfortable position (see page 134 ).

SET BUTTON MEMORY BUTTONS

3.

Press and release the SET button on the control panel. You will hear a beep. Immediately press and hold one of the memory buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two beeps.

The indicator in the memory button will come on. The current position of the driver’s seat is now stored.

142 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４７：４０３１ＴＬ１６０００１４８



Doing any of the following after pressing the SET button will cancel the storing procedure.

Not press a memory button within

5 seconds.

Readjust the seat position.

Turn the ignition switch out from the ON (II) position.

Each memory button stores only one driving position. Storing a new position erases the previous setting stored in that button’s memory. If you want to add a new position while retaining the current one, use the other memory button.

Selecting a Memorized Position

MEMORY BUTTONS

To select a memorized position, do this:

1.

Make sure the parking brake is set and the shift lever is in Park

(automatic).

2.

Press the desired memory button

(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then release the button.

The system will move the driver’s seat to the memorized position. The indicator in the selected memory button will flash during movement.

When the adjustment is complete, you will hear two beeps, and the indicator will stay on.

On vehicles with manual transmission

If the parking brake is not set, you must press and hold the memory button until the adjustment is complete.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 143

０８／０２／０６２０：４７：４８３１ＴＬ１６０００１４９



To stop the system’s automatic adjustment, do any of these actions:

Press any button on the control panel: SET, 1, or 2.

Push any of the adjustment switches for the seat.

Shift out of Park (automatic).

Release the parking brake

(manual).

If desired, you can use the adjustment switches to change the seat position after it is in its memorized position. If you change the memorized position, the indicator in the memory button will go out. To keep this seat position for later use, you must store it in the driver’s seat position memory.

144 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４７：５７３１ＴＬ１６０００１５０


Mirrors

INDICATOR

SENSOR

AUTO BUTTON

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility.

Be sure to adjust the mirrors before you start driving.

The inside mirror can automatically darken to reduce glare. To turn on this feature, press the button on the bottom of the mirror. The AUTO indicator comes on as a reminder.

When it is on, the mirror darkens when it senses the headlights of a vehicle behind you, then returns to normal visibility when the lights are gone. Press the button again to turn off this feature.

There is also a sensor on the back of the mirror. Items hung on the mirror may block this sensor and af f ect its perf ormance.

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

ADJUSTMENT

SWITCH

SELECTOR

SWITCH

1.


(II) position.

2.

Move the selector switch to L

(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s side).

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

145

０８／０２／０６２０：４８：０６３１ＴＬ１６０００１５１


Mirrors

3.

Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to move the mirror right, left, up, or down.

4.

When you finish, move the selector switch to the center (off) position. This turns the adjustment switch off to keep your settings.

146

Reverse Tilt Door Mirror

The passenger’s outside mirror has a reverse tilt feature. When in reverse, the mirror will tilt down slightly to improve your view as you parallel park. Shifting out of reverse will return the mirror to its original position.

Power Mirror Heaters


To tilt the passenger mirror, place the selector switch in the right position.

To turn the feature off, place the switch in the center or left position.

The outside mirrors are heated to remove fog and frost. With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, turn on the heaters by pressing the rear window defogger button. The indicator in the button comes on as a reminder. Press the button again to turn the heaters and the defogger off.

This heated mirror function has a timer (see page 117 ).

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４８：１３３１ＴＬ１６０００１５２


MAIN SWITCH

INDICATOR

DRIVER’S

WINDOW

SWITCH

FRONT

PASSENGER’S

WINDOW SWITCH


(II) position to raise or lower any window. To open a window, push the switch down and hold it. Release the switch when you want the window to stop. Pull back on the switch and hold it to close the window.

Power Windows

Closing a power window on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.

AUTO − To open either front window fully, push the window switch firmly down to the second detent, then release it. The window automatically goes down all the way.

To stop the window from going all the way down, pull back on the window switch briefly.

To close either front window fully, pull back the window switch firmly to the second detent, then release it.

The window automatically goes all the way up. To stop the window from going all the way up, push down on the window switch briefly.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

147

０８／０２／０６２０：４８：２１３１ＴＬ１６０００１５３

Main Menu

Power Windows

Table Of Contents

When you push the main switch in, the indicator comes on and the passengers’ windows cannot be raised or lowered. Use the main switch when you have children in the vehicle so they do not injure themselves by operating the windows unintentionally. To cancel this feature, push on the switch again. The switch will pop out and the indicator will go off.

The windows and the main switch feature will operate for up to 10 minutes after you turn off the ignition switch. Opening either front door cancels this function.

The indicators inside the window switches come on when the light control switch is in either or position.

AUTO REVERSE − If either front window senses any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction and then stop. To close the window, remove the obstacle, then use the window switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when the window is almost closed. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the window before closing it.

NOTE: Only on the driver’s window, the auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.

148 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４８：３２３１ＴＬ１６０００１５４


Power Windows

Opening the Windows and

Moonroof with the Remote

Transmitter

UNLOCK

BUTTON

You can open all of the windows and the moonroof from outside with the remote transmitter.

1.

Press the UNLOCK button once to unlock the driver’s door.

2.

Press the UNLOCK button a second time, and hold it. The remaining doors unlock, and all four windows and the moonroof start to open. To stop the windows and moonroof, release the button.

3.

To open the windows and moonroof further, press the button again (within 10 seconds of step 1) and hold it. If the windows and the moonroof stop before the desired position, repeat steps 1 and 2.

You cannot close the windows or the moonroof with the remote transmitter.

Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key

Close

Open

You can open and close the windows and moonroof with the key in the driver’s door lock.

To open:

1.

Insert the key in the driver’s door lock.

2.

Turn the key clockwise, then release it.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 149

０８／０２／０６２０：４８：４１３１ＴＬ１６０００１５５

Main Menu

Power Windows

Table Of Contents

3.

Turn the key clockwise again, and hold it. All four windows and the moonroof start to open. To stop the windows and the moonroof, release the key.

4.

To open the windows and the moonroof further, turn and hold the key again (within 10 seconds of step 2).

NOTE: If the windows and the moonroof stop before the desired position, repeat steps 2 and 3.

To close:

1.

Insert the key in the driver’s door lock.

2.

Turn the key counterclockwise, then release it.

3.

Turn the key counterclockwise again, and hold it. All four windows and the moonroof start to close. To stop the windows and the moonroof, release the key.

4.

To close the windows and the moonroof further, turn and hold the key again (within 10 seconds of step 2).

NOTE: If the windows and the moonroof stop before the desired position, repeat steps 2 and 3.

150 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４８：５１３１ＴＬ１６０００１５６


Moonroof

MOONROOF SWITCH

Open

Close

Tilt

The moonroof can be tilted up in the back for ventilation, or it can be slid back into the roof. Use the switch on the front ceiling to operate the moonroof. You must turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position to operate the moonroof.

To tilt up the moonroof, push on the center of the moonroof switch. To stop the moonroof from tilting up fully, push the switch briefly.

To open the moonroof, pull back on the switch and hold it. Release the switch when the moonroof reaches the desired position. To close the moonroof, push the switch forward and hold it. Release the switch to stop the operation.

Opening or closing the moonroof on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.

AUTO − To open the moonroof fully, pull back the moonroof switch firmly, then release it. The moonroof automatically opens all the way. To stop the moonroof from opening, push the switch briefly.

To close the moonroof fully, firmly push the moonroof switch forward, then release it. The moonroof automatically closes all the way. To stop the moonroof from closing, push the switch briefly.

To open or close the moonroof partially, lightly pull the switch back or push it forward and hold it. The moonroof will stop when you release the switch.

2009 TSX 151

０８／０２／０６２０：４８：５９３１ＴＬ１６０００１５７


Moonroof

Auto Reverse

If the moonroof runs into any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction, and then stop. To close the moonroof, remove the obstacle, then use the moonroof switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the moonroof before closing it.

You can open and close the moonroof for up to 10 minutes after you turn off the ignition switch.

Opening either front door cancels this function.

If you try to open the moonroof in below-f reezing temperatures, or when it is covered with snow or ice, you can damage the moonroof panel or its motor.

Operating the Moonroof with the

Remote Transmitter or the Key

You can use the remote transmitter or the key to operate the moonroof from the outside. Refer to page

149 for details.

152 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４９：０４３１ＴＬ１６０００１５８


PARKING BRAKE LEVER

If you drive without releasing the parking brake, a beeper will sound, and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE

PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the multi-information display.

To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up fully. To release it, pull up slightly, push the button, and lower the lever. The parking brake indicator on the instrument panel should go out when the parking brake is fully released (see page 61 ).

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake applied can damage the rear brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if the vehicle is put into gear with the parking brake on.

2009 TSX

Parking Brake

153

０８／０２／０６２０：４９：１１３１ＴＬ１６０００１５９


Interior Convenience Items

BEVERAGE HOLDER in REAR DOOR

COAT HOOK

DRIVER’S

POCKET

FRONT DOOR

POCKET

SUN VISOR

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

VANITY MIRROR

CENTER POCKET

GLOVE BOX

CARGO HOOKS

BEVERAGE HOLDER in

REAR SEAT ARMREST

＊ : If equipped

154

CENTER POCKET ＊

ACCESSORY POWER

SOCKET

SIDE POCKET

CONSOLE

COMPARTMENT

USB ADAPTER

CABLE ＊

ACCESSORY POWER

SOCKET

BEVERAGE HOLDER

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４９：１８３１ＴＬ１６０００１６０



Beverage Holders

FRONT

Push

To use the front beverage holder, push on the lid. It will swing open. To close the lid, push it down until it latches.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. A spilled liquid that is very hot can scald you or your passengers. Liquid can also spill from the rear door pocket beverage holders when you open or close the doors. Use only resealable containers in the door pockets.

Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.

REAR

BEVERAGE HOLDER

The rear seat also has a beverage holder in the center armrest. To use it, pivot the armrest down.

2009 TSX 155

０８／０２／０６２０：４９：３１３１ＴＬ１６０００１６１



Accessory Power Sockets

FRONT

Each socket is intended to supply power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120 watts or less (10 amps).

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

Console Compartment

Your vehicle has two accessory power sockets; one is at the front of the center console and the other is in the console compartment.

To use an accessory power socket, the ignition switch must be in the

ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

None of the sockets will power an automotive type cigarette lighter element.

Make sure to put the socket cover back in place to prevent any small foreign objects getting into the socket.

156 2009 TSX

LEVER

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

To open the console compartment, pull up on the lever and lift the armrest.

To close, lower the armrest, and push it down until it latches.

０８／０２／０６２０：４９：３９３１ＴＬ１６０００１６２



Glove Box

To lock

An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while driving.

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle to the left. Close it with a firm push. Lock or unlock the glove box with the master key.

The glove box light comes on when the parking lights are on.

DETACHABLE SHELF

Inside the glove box, there is a detachable shelf.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

157

０８／０２／０６２０：４９：４８３１ＴＬ１６０００１６３



Sunglasses Holder

Push

SHELF

You can remove the shelf to get more space in the glove box. To remove it, open the glove box and pull out the shelf while disengaging its tabs from the glove box frame.

To open the sunglasses holder, push then release the indent. It will unlatch and swing down. To close it, push it until it latches. Make sure the holder is closed while you are driving.

Some larger styles of sunglasses may not fit in the holder.

You may also store small items in this holder. Make sure they are small enough to let the holder close and latch, and that they are not heavy enough to cause the holder to pop open while driving.

158 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：４９：５８３１ＴＬ１６０００１６４


Sun Visors Vanity Mirror


Driver’s Pocket

SUN VISOR

To use the sun visor, pull it down.

You can also use the sun visor at the side window. Remove the support rod from the clip and swing the sun visor toward the side window.

Make sure you put the sun visor back in place when you are getting into or out of the vehicle.

To use the vanity mirror on the back of the sun visor, pull up the cover.

The vanity mirror lights come on when you pull up the cover.

BUTTON

To open the driver’s pocket, push the button on the lid. To close it, push the lid up until it latches.

2009 TSX 159

０８／０２／０６２０：５０：０７３１ＴＬ１６０００１６５



Center Pockets

Push

Coat Hook

COAT HOOK

To open the pocket, push on the lid.

To close it, push the lid down until it latches.

On vehicles without navigation system

To open the center pocket, push on the lid. It will unlatch and swing up.

To close it, push the lid down until it latches.

To use a coat hook, slide it out slightly, then pull it down.

Make sure the coat hook is pulled up when you are not using it. This hook is not designed for large or heavy items.

160 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５０：１８３１ＴＬ１６０００１６６


Interior Lights

Ceiling Light

DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION

The ceiling light has a three-position switch; ON, Door Activated, and

OFF. In the Door Activated (center) position, the light comes on when you:

Open any door.

Unlock the driver’s door with the key or remote transmitter.

After all doors are closed tightly, the light dims slightly, then fades out in about 30 seconds.

The ceiling light (with the switch in the center position) comes on when you remove the key from the ignition switch. If you do not open a door, the light stays on, then fades out in about 30 seconds.

To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT

DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page

95 .

If you leave any door open without the key in the ignition switch, the ceiling light will go off after about 15 minutes.

Spotlights

SPOTLIGHT

Turn on a spotlight by pushing the lens. Push the lens again to turn it off. You can use the spotlights at all times.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

161

０８／０２／０６２０：５０：２６３１ＴＬ１６０００１６７

Main Menu

Interior Lights

Table Of Contents

OFF POSITION

The spotlights (with the switch in the DOOR position) also come on when you unlock the door with the key or the remote transmitter, and when you remove the key from the ignition switch.

Courtesy Lights

DOOR ACTIVATED

The spotlights have a two-position switch. In the DOOR position, the lights come on when you open any door. The lights fade out in about 30 seconds after the doors are closed tightly. In the OFF position, the lights do not come on.

The courtesy light in each door comes on when the door is opened, and goes out when the door is closed.

Your vehicle also has a courtesy light in the ignition switch. This light comes on when you open the driver’s door. It fades out in about 30 seconds after the door is closed.

162 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５０：３１３１ＴＬ１６０００１６８


COURTESY LIGHT

The courtesy light between the spotlights comes on when you turn the parking lights on. To adjust its brightness, turn the instrument panel brightness control knob on the dashboard, with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position (see page

115 ).

In addition to the courtesy light on the ceiling, the driver’s foot ambient light comes on.

2009 TSX

Interior Lights

163

０８／０２／０６２０：５０：３３３１ＴＬ１６０００１６９


164 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５０：４０３１ＴＬ１６０００１７０

Main Menu

Features

The climate control system in your vehicle provides a comfortable driving environment in all weather conditions.

The standard audio system has many features. This section describes those features and how to use them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio system that requires a code number to enable it.

The security system helps to discourage vandalism and theft of your vehicle.

Climate Control System ...............

Using Automatic Climate

.

166

Control ...................................

.

167

Dual Temperature Control ......

.

171

Climate Control Sensors

Audio System

..........

................................

.

173

.

174

Models without navigation system

Audio System ................................

Playing the FM/AM Radio ..........

.

.

175

176

Playing a Disc

.

183

................................

.

189

Disc Player Error Messages .......

.

198

Playing an iPod ............................

iPod Error Messages .................

.

.

199

207

Playing a USB Flash Memory

Device ........................................

.

208

USB Flash Memory Device

Error Messages ........................

.

216

Bluetooth Audio System ............

.

217

Models with navigation system

Audio System ................................

Playing the FM/AM Radio ..........

.

.

222

223

Playing Discs

.

236

.................................

.

244

...

255

Protecting Your Discs ..................

.

256

Playing an iPod ............................

iPod Error Messages ....................

.

.

259

268

Playing a USB Flash Memory

Device ........................................

.

269

USB Flash Memory Device

Error Messages ........................

.

278

Bluetooth Audio System

FM/AM Radio Reception

............

............

.

.

279

285

Remote Audio Controls ................

.

287

Auxiliary Input Jack ......................

.

288

Radio Theft Protection .................

.

289

Setting the Clock

Security System

..........................

.

290

............................

.

293

Compass .........................................

.

295

Cruise Control ...............................

.

299

HomeLink Universal

Transceiver ................................

.

302

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink .......

.

307

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) ....

.

337

...

353

2009 TSX 165

０８／０２／０６２０：５０：４８３１ＴＬ１６０００１７１


Climate Control System

Without navigation system

DRIVER’S SIDE

TEMPERATURE

PASSENGER’S SIDE

TEMPERATURE

AUTO INDICATOR

With navigation system

DRIVER’S SIDE

TEMPERATURE

CENTER DISPLAY


TEMPERATURE

AUTO

INDICATOR

DUAL

BUTTON

AUTO

BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDE

TEMPERATURE

CONTROL

SWITCH

OFF BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

WINDSHIELD

DEFOGGER

BUTTON

AIR

CONDITIONING

BUTTON

PASSENGER’S

SIDE

TEMPERATURE

CONTROL

SWITCH

MODE CONTROL BUTTON



DUAL BUTTON

AUTO

BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDE

TEMPERATURE

CONTROL

SWITCH

OFF BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

FAN CONTROL BAR

WINDSHIELD

DEFOGGER

BUTTON

AIR

CONDITIONING

BUTTON

PASSENGER’S

SIDE

TEMPERATURE

CONTROL

SWITCH

MODE CONTROL BUTTON



FAN CONTROL BAR

166 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５０：５７３１ＴＬ１６０００１７２



Voice Control System

On models with navigation system

The climate control system can also be operated by voice control. See the

Navi section in your quick start guide for an overview of this system, and the navigation system manual for complete details.

Using Automatic Climate Control

The automatic climate control system in your vehicle picks the proper combination of air conditioning, heating, and ventilation to maintain the interior temperature you select. The system also adjusts the fan speed and airflow levels.

1.

Press the Auto button. The indicator in the button also comes on as a reminder. You will see

AUTO on the display (in the center display on models with navigation system).

2.

Set the desired temperature with the temperature control switch.

You can set the driver’s side temperature and the passenger’s side temperature separately.

The system automatically selects the proper mix of conditioned and/or heated air that will, as quickly as possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference.

Temperature Control

The driver’s side temperature and the passenger’s side temperature can be set separately. Push up the switch of the appropriate temperature control to increase the temperature of airflow. Push down the switch to decrease it. Each set temperature is shown in the display (in the center display on models with navigation system).

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

167

０８／０２／０６２０：５１：１０３１ＴＬ１６０００１７３



When you set the temperature to its lower limit ( ) or its upper limit

( ), the system runs at full cooling or heating only. It does not regulate the interior temperature.

When you adjust a fan control, the fan is taken out of AUTO mode.

When the indicator in the dual button is on, the driver’s side and passenger’s side temperature can be controlled independently (see page

171 ).


In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s interior temperature is independently regulated for the driver and front passenger according to each adjusted temperature. The system also regulates each temperature based on the information of the sun light sensor and the sun position which is updated automatically by the navigation’s global positioning system (GPS). For example, if the driver’s side of the vehicle is getting too much sun, the system will adjust to a lower temperature.

Dual Button

You can set the temperatures for the driver’s side and the passenger’s side separately when this button is pressed (indicator is on). When the indicator in the DUAL button is off, the temperatures for both sides are synchronized to the driver’s side set temperature. When defrost mode is selected, dual mode operation is canceled.

To Turn Everything Of f

If you press the OFF button, the climate control system shuts off completely.

Keep the system completely off for short periods only.

To keep stale air and mustiness from collecting, you should have the fan running at all times.

168 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５１：２３３１ＴＬ１６０００１７４



Semi-automatic Operation

You can manually select various functions of the climate control system when it is in fully automatic mode. All other features remain automatically controlled. Making any manual selection causes the word

AUTO in the display to go out.

Fan Control

Press the ▲ side of the bar to increase the fan speed and airflow.

Press the ▼ side of the bar to decrease them.

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

This button turns the air conditioning on and off. You will see

A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, the system cannot regulate the inside temperature if you set the temperature control below the outside temperature.

Recirculation Button

When the indicator in the button is on, air from the vehicle’s interior is sent through the system again.

When the indicator is off, air is brought in from the outside of the vehicle (fresh air mode).

The outside air intakes for the climate control system are at the base of the windshield. Keep this area clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in fresh air mode under almost all conditions.

Keeping the system in recirculation mode, particularly with the A/C off, can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode when driving through dusty or smoky conditions, then return to fresh air mode.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

169

０８／０２／０６２０：５１：４４３１ＴＬ１６０００１７５



Rear Window Def ogger Button

This button turns the rear window defogger off and on (see page 117 ).

Pushing this button also turns the power mirror heaters on and off.

Mode Control

Use the mode control button to select the vents the air flows from.

Some air will flow from the dashboard vents in all modes.

Airflow is divided between the floor and corner vents and the defroster vents at the base of the windshield.

vents.

Air flows from the floor

Airflow is divided between the vents in the dashboard and the floor vents.

Air flows from the center and corner vents in the dashboard.

Windshield Def roster Button

This button directs the main airflow to the windshield for faster defrosting. It also overrides any mode selection you may have made.

When you select , the system automatically switches to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C. For faster defrosting, manually set the fan speed to high. You can also increase airflow to the windshield by closing the center and corner vents on the dashboard. To close the vents, rotate the wheel on the side of each center and corner vent.

When you turn off by pressing the button again, the system returns to its former settings.

To remove fog from the inside of the windows, set as follows:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Select . The system automatically switches to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.

Adjust the temperature with the driver’s side temperature control so the airflow feels warm.

Select to help clear the rear window.

To increase airflow to the windshield, close the center and corner vents.

For faster defogging, manually set the fan speed to high.

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.

When the indicator in the button is on, the front passenger’s temperature cannot be set separately from the driver’s.

170 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５１：５１３１ＴＬ１６０００１７６


Dual Temperature Control

Your vehicle has two temperature control switches, one for the driver, and one for the front passenger.

The driver’s side and the passenger’s side temperature can be controlled independently by adjusting these switches when the green indicator in the DUAL button is on.

Temperature Control

Push AUTO or . The selected temperatures appear in the display

(in the center display on models with navigation system). When the indicator in the DUAL button is off, you can adjust both sides to the same temperature by pushing the driver’s side temperature control switch up or down.

DUAL BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDE

TEMPERATURE

CONTROL SWITCH



TEMPERATURE

CONTROL SWITCH

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

171

０８／０２／０６２０：５１：５８３１ＴＬ１６０００１７７



To set the driver’s side temperature to a different value than the passenger’s, press the DUAL button, then push the switch up or down on the driver’s side. To set the passenger’s side to a different value than the driver’s, push the switch up or down on the passenger’s side. You can adjust the passenger’s side without pressing the DUAL button first.

When you set the temperature to its lower or upper limit, it is displayed as or .

Driver’s Side

172 2009 TSX

Passenger’s Side

０８／０２／０６２０：５２：０３３１ＴＬ１６０００１７８


Climate Control Sensors

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

The climate control system has two sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the top of the dashboard, and a temperature sensor is next to the steering column. Do not cover the sensors or spill any liquid on them.

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

2009 TSX


173

０８／０２／０６２０：５２：１３３１ＴＬ１６０００１７９


Audio System

An audio system is standard on all models. Read the appropriate pages

(as shown below) to use your vehicle’s audio system.

For vehicles without navigation system, see pages 175 through 221 .

For vehicles with navigation system, see pages 222 through 284 .

Canadian TSX U.S. TSX and Canadian TSX Premium

Without navigation system

U.S. TSX and Canadian TSX Premium

With navigation system

174 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５２：２２３１ＴＬ１６０００１８０


Audio System (Models without navigation system)

Selector Knob

MENU

BUTTON

RETURN

BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB

Most audio system functions can be controlled by standard buttons, bars, and knobs. In addition, you can access some functions by using the selector knob on the audio system.

The knob turns left and right. Use it to scroll through lists, to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu item on the display. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector (ENTER) to go to that selection.

When the audio system is in XM satellite radio mode or playing discs, pushing the selector (ENTER) knob switches the display between the normal display and the extended display. The extended display has three segments to display the detailed information.

Menu Display

To select any setting such as the clock, sound adjusting, or the compass, press the MENU button.

To use any audio system function, the ignition switch must be in the


You can select the item by turning the selector knob. To go back to the previous display, press the RETURN button.

Pressing the MENU button again will also cancel the menu display mode.

2009 TSX 175

０８／０２／０６２０：５２：３２３１ＴＬ１６０００１８１


Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Without XM satellite radio

AM BUTTON

VOL/

(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

With XM satellite radio

VOL/


AM BUTTON

TITLE

BUTTON

TITLE

BUTTON

FM

BUTTONS

FOLDER BAR

PRESET

BUTTONS

FM

BUTTON

SKIP BAR

PRESET

BUTTONS

SKIP BAR

CATEGORY

BAR

176

SCAN BUTTON

SELECTOR

KNOB

RETURN BUTTON

A.SEL (AUTO SELECT)

BUTTON

MENU BUTTON

2009 TSX

SCAN BUTTON SELECTOR

KNOB

RETURN BUTTON

A.SEL (AUTO SELECT)

BUTTON

MENU BUTTON

０８／０２／０６２０：５２：４５３１ＴＬ１６０００１８２



To Play the Radio

The ignition switch must be in the


Turn the system on by pushing the power/volume knob or the AM or

FM button. Adjust the volume by turning the VOL/ knob.

The band and frequency that the radio was last tuned to are displayed.

To change bands, press the AM or

FM button. On the FM band, ST will be displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

On the AM band, AM noise reduction turns on automatically.

To Select a Station

You can use any of five methods to find radio stations on the selected band: tune, skip, scan, the preset buttons, and auto select.

On the FM band, you can also use the features provided by the radio data system (RDS). For more information on the RDS, see page

179 .

TUNE − Use the selector knob to tune the radio to a desired frequency.

Turn the knob right to tune to a higher frequency, or left to tune to a lower frequency.

SKIP − The skip function searches up and down from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal. To activate it, press and hold the or side of the

SKIP bar until you hear a beep, then release it.

Each time you press and release either side of the SKIP bar, the radio frequency changes in small increments.

SCAN − The scan function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected band. To activate it, press the SCAN button, then release it.

You will see SCAN in the display.

The system will scan for a station with a strong signal. When it finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system will scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN button again.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 177

０８／０２／０６２０：５２：５６３１ＴＬ１６０００１８３



Preset − Each preset button can store one frequency on AM and two frequencies on FM.

1.

Select the desired band, AM or

FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store two frequencies with each preset button.

2.

Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDS function to tune the radio to a desired station.

3.

Pick a preset button, and hold it until you hear a beep.

4.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve stations on FM.

AUTO SELECT − If you are traveling far from home and can no longer receive your preset stations, you can use the auto select feature to find stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A-SEL’’ flashes in the display, and the system goes into scan mode for several seconds. It stores the frequencies of six AM and twelve FM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after pressing a preset button if auto select cannot find a strong station for that preset button.

If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can store other frequencies on the preset buttons as previously described.

To turn off auto select , press the

A. SEL (auto select) button. This restores the presets you originally set.

For information on FM/AM radio frequencies and reception, see page

285 .

178 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５３：０６３１ＴＬ１６０００１８４



Radio Data System (RDS)

On the FM band, you can select a favorite station and display the program service name according to the information provided by the radio data system (RDS).

Program Service (PS) Name Display

The program service name display function shows the name of the station you are listening to. With the audio system on and the FM band selected, you can turn this function on or off.

PROGRAM SERVICE

NAME DISPLAY ON

To switch the function between on and off, press and release the TITLE button. With the system on, you will see the ‘‘PS ON’’ message on the display. If the station you are listening to is an RDS station, the displayed frequency switches to the station name.

If the station you are listening to is not an RDS station, the display continues to show the frequency with the PS name display function on.

When you turn off this function by pressing the TITLE button, the display shows ‘‘PS OFF.’’

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

179

０８／０２／０６２０：５３：２２３１ＴＬ１６０００１８５



Radio Data System (RDS) Category

RDS CATEGORY

On the FM band selected, you can select the program category provided by the RDS. Press either side ( ▲ or ▼ ) of the CATEGORY bar (FOLDER bar on models without

XM radio) to display and select an

RDS category. The principal RDS categories are shown as follows;

ALL: All RDS category stations

ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft rock music

COUNTRY: Country music

SOFT: Adult hits and soft music

TOP 40: Top 40 hits

OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies

R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft rhythm and blues

RELIGION: Religious music and religious talk

CLASSIC: Classical music

JAZZ: Jazz

INFO: News, information, sports, talk, foreign language, personality, public, college, and weather

TRAFFIC: Traffic information

Press either side of the CATEGORY bar (FOLDER bar on models without

XM radio) to select an RDS category.

The display shows the selected RDS category name for about 10 seconds.

You can use the search or scan function to find radio stations in the selected RDS category. If you do nothing while the RDS category name is displayed, the selected category is canceled.

RDS Program Search

This function searches up and down a frequency for the strongest signal from the frequencies that carry the selected RDS category information.

This can help you to find a station in your favorite category. To activate it, press and release either side

( or ) of the SKIP bar. You will see the selected RDS category name blinking while searching it.

When the system finds a station, the selected RDS category name will be displayed again for about 5 seconds.

If the system does not find a station,

‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for about 5 seconds, then the system goes back to the last selected station.

180 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５３：３３３１ＴＬ１６０００１８６



RDS Program SCAN

The scan function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected RDS category. To activate it, press and release the SCAN button.

You will see SCAN in the display.

The system will scan for a station with a strong signal in the selected

RDS category. You will also see the selected RDS category name blinking while searching it. When it finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system will scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN button again.



You can use the RDS program search or scan function even if the

PS name display function is off. In this case, the display shows a frequency in place of a PS name.

2009 TSX

Adjusting the Sound

Selector knob adjustable direction is shown.

FADER is selectable.

Press the MENU button to display the sound settings. Turn the selector knob to select an appropriate setting: bass, treble, fader, balance, SUBW

(subwoofer), SVC (speed-sensitive volume compensation), and CLOCK

ADJUST (clock adjustment). Press the selector (ENTER) knob to enter the setting, then turn the selector knob to adjust the setting.

CONTINUED

181

０８／０２／０６２０：５３：４８３１ＴＬ１６０００１８７



CENTER is selectable.

BASS − Adjusts the bass.

TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.

FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back strength of the sound.

BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.

182

SUBW − Adjusts the strength of sound from the subwoofer speaker.

SVC − Adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed.

CLOCK ADJUST − Adjusts the clock setting (see page 291 ).

Each mode is shown in the display as it changes. Turn the selector knob to adjust the setting to your liking.

When the level reaches the center, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.

To return to the normal playing, push the RETURN or MENU button after you stop adjusting a mode.

Speed-sensitive Volume

Compensation (SVC)

The SVC mode controls the volume based on vehicle speed. The faster you go, the louder the audio volume becomes. As you slow down, the audio volume decreases.

2009 TSX

The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,

SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC

HIGH. Turn the selector knob to adjust the setting to your liking. If you feel the sound is too loud, choose low. If you feel the sound is too quiet, choose high.

This function is set to MID as the default setting when the vehicle leaves the factory.

Audio System Lighting

You can use the instrument panel brightness control knob to adjust the illumination of the audio system (see page 115 ). The audio system illuminates when the parking lights are on, even if the radio is turned off.

０８／０２／０６２０：５３：５４３１ＴＬ１６０００１８８


Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models without navigation system)


XM SATELLITE RADIO

BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

SCAN BUTTON

RETURN BUTTON

SELECTOR

KNOB

MENU BUTTON

2009 TSX

VOL/


SKIP BAR

CONTINUED

183

０８／０２／０６２０：５４：０５３１ＴＬ１６０００１８９



U.S. TSX and Canadian TSX

Premium models only

Your vehicle is capable of receiving

XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the

United States, and Canada, except

Hawaii and Alaska. XM is a registered trademark of XM Satellite

Radio, Inc.

XM Satellite Radio receives signals from two satellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offers many channels in several categories. Along with a large selection of different types of music,

XM Satellite Radio allows you to view channel and category selections in the display.

Operating the XM Satellite Radio

To listen to XM Satellite Radio, turn the ignition switch to the

ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, and press the button. The last channel you listened to will show in the display. Adjust the volume by turning the VOL/ knob.

MODE − To switch between channel mode and category mode, press and hold the TITLE button until the mode changes.

In the channel mode, you can select all of the available channels. In the category mode, such as Jazz, Rock,

Classical, etc., you can select all of the channels within that category.

Each time you press and release the

TITLE button, the display changes in the following sequence: name, title, and category.

You can also change the mode from the menu items. Press the MENU button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select

MODE/CATEGORY or MODE/

CHANNEL and press the selector knob (ENTER). Each time you press and release the selector knob

(ENTER), the display changes between CHANNEL and

CATEGORY. To enter the setting, press the button.

You may experience periods when

XM Satellite Radio does not transmit the artist’s name and song title information. If this happens, there is nothing wrong with your system.

184 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５４：１４３１ＴＬ１６０００１９０



TUNE − Turn the selector knob to change channel selections. Turn the knob right for higher numbered channels and left for lower numbered channels. In the category mode, you can only select channels within that category.

Channel list is shown.

You can also select a channel or category from the list by using the selector knob. Push the selector knob (ENTER) to switch the display to the list displayed with three segments, then turn the knob to select a channel or category. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to set your selection.

CATEGORY ( ▼ or ) Press either side of the CATEGORY bar to select another category.

SCAN − The SCAN function gives you a sampling of all channels while in the channel mode. In the category mode, only the stations within that category are scanned. To activate scan, press the SCAN button. The system plays each channel in numerical order for a few seconds, then selects the next channel. When you hear a channel you want to continue listening to, press the button again.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

185

０８／０２／０６２０：５４：３０３１ＴＬ１６０００１９１



Preset − You can store up to 12 preset channels using the six preset buttons. Each button stores one channel from the XM1 band and one channel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:

1.

Press the button. Either

XM1 or XM2 will show in the display.

2.

Use the selector knob, or the

CATEGORY bar or SCAN button to tune to a desired channel.

In category mode, only channels within that category can be selected.

In channel mode, all channels can be selected.

3.

Pick the preset button you want for that channel. Press and hold the button until you hear a beep.

4.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the first six channels.

5.

Press the button again.

The other XM band will show.

Store the next six channels using steps 2 and 3.

Once a channel is stored, simply press and release the proper preset button to tune to it.

XM Satellite Radio Display

Messages

‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the audio or program information.

‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel currently selected is no longer broadcasting.

‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is fully updated.

Channels 0 and 1 should still work normally.

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is currently too weak. Move the vehicle to an area away from tall buildings, and with an unobstructed view of the southern horizon.

‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel number does not exist, or is not part of your subscription, or this channel has no artist or title information at this time.

‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem with the XM antenna. Please consult your dealer.

186 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５４：４２３１ＴＬ１６０００１９２



The XM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. To help compensate for this, ground-based repeaters are placed in major metropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator. Carrying large items on a roof rack can also block the signal.

Depending on where you drive, you may experience reception problems.

Interference can be caused by any of these conditions:

Driving on the north side of an east/west mountain road.

Driving on the north side of a large commercial truck on an east/west road.

Driving in tunnels.

Signal may be blocked by mountains or large obstacles to the south.

Signal weaker in these areas.

SATELLITE

Driving on a road beside a vertical wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south of you.

Driving on the lower level of a multi-tiered road.

2009 TSX

GROUND REPEATER

Driving on a single lane road alongside dense trees taller than

50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Large items carried on a roof rack.

CONTINUED

187

０８／０２／０６２０：５４：５０３１ＴＬ１６０００１９３



There may be other geographic situations that could affect XM

Satellite Radio reception.



188

Receiving XM Satellite Radio

Service

If your XM Satellite Radio service has expired or you purchased your vehicle from a previous owner, you can listen to a sampling of the broadcasts available on XM Satellite

Radio. With the ignition switch in the

ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position, press the button. A variety of music types and styles will play.

If you decide to purchase XM

Satellite Radio service, contact XM

Radio at www.xmradio.com

, or at

1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact www.xmradio.ca

, or call 1-877-438-

9677. You will need to give them your radio I.D. number and your credit card number. To get your radio I.D. number, press the button, then turn the selector knob until ‘‘CH 000’’ appears in the display. Your I.D. will appear in the display.

2009 TSX

After you’ve registered with XM

Radio, keep your audio system in the

XM Satellite Radio mode while you wait for activation. This should take about 30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, make sure your vehicle remains in an open area with good reception. Once your audio system is activated,

‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CHANNEL’’ will appear in the display, and you’ll be able to listen to XM Satellite Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will continue to send an activation signal to your vehicle for at least 12 hours from the activation request. If the service has not been activated after 36 hours, contact XM Radio.

０８／０２／０６２０：５５：００３１ＴＬ１６０００１９４


Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)

Canadian TSX

Without XM satellite radio

VOL/


MP3/WMA INDICATOR


With XM satellite radio

VOL/



DISC SLOT

TITLE

BUTTON

CD

BUTTON

DISC SLOT

DISC EJECT

BUTTON

TITLE

BUTTON

PRESET

BUTTONS

SKIP BAR

CATEGORY

BAR

SCAN BUTTON

SELECTOR

KNOB

RETURN BUTTON MENU BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON SELECTOR

KNOB

RETURN BUTTON MENU BUTTON

2009 TSX

CD

BUTTON

DISC EJECT

BUTTON

PRESET

BUTTONS

SKIP BAR

189

０８／０２／０６２０：５５：１５３１ＴＬ１６０００１９５



To Play a Disc

To load or play a disc, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY

(I) or ON (II) position.

You operate the disc player with the same controls used for the radio. To select the disc player, press the CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the display. The disc and track numbers, and the elapsed time are shown in the display. You can also select the displayed information with the

TITLE button (see page 191 ). The system will continuously play a disc until you change modes.

This audio system can also play

CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in

MP3 or WMA formats. When playing a disc in MP3, you will see

‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the display. The disc, folder and track numbers are displayed. You can select up to 255 folders or tracks.

A disc compressed in AAC format cannot be played in this audio system.

Video CDs and DVD discs do not work in this unit.

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.

The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit.

The specifications for compatible

MP3 files are:

− Sampling frequency:

32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)

−

16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

Bit rate:

32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/

160/192/224/256/320 kbps

Compatible with variable bit rate

− and multi-session

Maximum layers

(including ROOT): 8 layers


WMA files are:


−

22.05/32/44.1/48 kHz

Bitrate:

48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

Compatible with variable bit rate

− and multi-session

Maximum layers


190 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５５：２６３１ＴＬ１６０００１９６



NOTE:

If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is protected by digital rights management (DRM), the audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to the next file.

To Load a Disc

Insert a disc about halfway into the disc slot. The drive will pull the disc in the rest of the way to play it. You operate the disc player with the same controls used for the radio.

The number of the current track is shown in the display. When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA, the numbers of the current folder and file are shown. The system will continuously play a disc until you change modes.

You cannot load and play 3-inch

(8-cm) discs in this unit.

For information on how to handle and protect compact discs, see page

256 .

Text Data Display Function

Each time you press the TITLE button, the display shows you the text data on a disc, if the disc was recorded with text data.

You can see the album, artist, and track name in the display. If a disc is recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can see the folder and file name, and the artist, album, and track tag.

With the folder name, you will see the FOLDER indicator in the display.

The TRACK indicator is shown with the file or track name.

When you press and release the

TITLE button while a disc without text data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO

INFO’’ on the display.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

191

０８／０２／０６２０：５５：３７３１ＴＬ１６０００１９７



The display shows up to about 16 characters of selected text data (the folder name, file name, etc.).

If the text data has more than 16 characters, you will see the first 15 characters and the indicator on the display. Press and hold the

TITLE button until the next 16 characters are shown. You can see up to about 31 characters of the text data.

If you press and hold the TITLE button again, the display shows the first 15 characters again.

If any letter is not available, it is replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.

When the disc has no text data, you will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.

You will also see some text data under these conditions:

When a new folder, file, or track is selected.

When you change the audio mode to play a disc with text data or in

MP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and the system begins to play.

When playing a CD-DA with text data, the album and track name are shown in the display. With a disc in

MP3 or WMA, the display shows the folder and file name.

When you turn on the audio system next time, the system keeps your selection with the TITLE button.

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

Use the SKIP bar while a disc is playing to select passages and change tracks (files in MP3 or WMA mode).

In MP3 or WMA mode, use the

FOLDER bar (CATEGORY bar on models with XM satellite radio) to select folders in the disc and use either side of the skip bar to change files.

192 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５５：４７３１ＴＬ１６０００１９８



Folder Selection

Track Selection

Press ENTER

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can also select a folder or track/file from the list by using the selector knob. Push the selector knob (ENTER) to switch the display to the list displayed with three segments, then turn the knob to select a folder.

Press the selector knob (ENTER) to change the display to the track/file list, then turn the same knob to select a track/file. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to set your selection.

SKIP − Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the player skips forward to the beginning of the next track (file in

MP3 or WMA mode). Press and release the side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous track.

To move rapidly within a track or file, press and hold either side ( or

) of the SKIP bar.

In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER SELECTION − To select a different folder, press either side ( ▲ or ▼ ) of the FOLDER bar

(CATEGORY bar on models with

XM satellite radio) to move to the beginning of the next folder. Press the ▲ side to skip to the next folder, and press the ▼ side to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 193

０８／０２／０６２０：５５：５５３１ＴＬ１６０００１９９



To Select Repeat, Random or Scan

Mode:

MENU ITEMS

Turn the selector knob to select an appropriate repeat, random or scan mode, then press the selector knob

(ENTER) to set your selection.

You can select any type of repeat, random and scan modes by using the

MENU button and the selector knob.

Push the MENU button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select ‘‘PLAY

MODE.’’ Press the selector knob

(ENTER) to set the selection.

194 2009 TSX

PLAY MODE ITEMS

To cancel the selected repeat, random, or scan mode, press the

MENU button to show ‘‘PLAY

MODE,’’ then press the selector knob (ENTER). When you see

‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press ENTER again.

０８／０２／０６２０：５６：０２３１ＴＬ１６０００２００



REPEAT (Track Repeat) − To continuously replay a track (file in

MP3 or WMA mode), select the track repeat mode from the menu items. You will see REPEAT in the display. Select the normal play mode to turn it off.

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar also turns off the repeat feature.

In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER REPEAT − This feature, when activated, replays all the files on the selected folder in the order they are compressed in MP3 or

WMA. To activate folder repeat mode, select the folder repeat mode from the menu items. You will see

F-REPEAT in the display. The system continuously replays the current folder. Select the normal play mode to turn it off. Selecting a different folder with the FOLDER bar (CATEGORY bar on models with XM Satellite Radio) also turns off the repeat feature.

RANDOM (Random within a disc) − This feature plays the tracks within a disc (the files in MP3 or WMA mode) in random order. To activate random play, select the disc random play from the menu items.

You will see RANDOM in the display.

Select the normal play mode to return to normal play.

In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER RANDOM − This feature, when activated, plays the files within a current folder in random order, rather than in the order they are compressed in MP3 or WMA. To activate folder random play, select the folder random mode from the menu items. You will see

F-RANDOM in the display. The system will then select and play files randomly. This continues until you deactivate folder random play by selecting the normal play mode, or you select a different folder with the

FOLDER bar (CATEGORY bar on models with XM Satellite radio).

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 195

０８／０２／０６２０：５６：１１３１ＴＬ１６０００２０１



SCAN − The SCAN function samples all the tracks on the disc in the order they are recorded on the disc (all files in the selected folder in

MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the scan feature, press and release the

SCAN button. You will see SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of each track/file in the disc/folder. Press and hold the

SCAN button to get out of scan mode and play the last track sampled.

You can also select the scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page 194 ).

In MP3 or WMA mode

F-SCAN − This feature, when activated, samples the first file in each folder on the disc in the order they are recorded. To activate the folder scan feature, press and release the SCAN button repeatedly.

You will see F-SCAN in the display.

The system will then play the first file in the main folders for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then play the following first files for 10 seconds each. When it plays a file that you want to continue listening to, press and hold the SCAN button.

You can also select the folder scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page 194 ).

Pressing either side of the skip bar, or selecting a different disc (using the preset buttons) or folder (using the FOLDER or CATEGORY bar) turns off the SCAN or F-SCAN feature.


SCAN button, the mode changes between scan and normal playing.

In MP3 or WMA mode


SCAN button, the mode changes from file scan to folder scan, then to normal playing.

196 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５６：１９３１ＴＬ１６０００２０２



To Stop Playing a Disc

Press the eject button ( ) to remove the disc. If you eject the disc, but do not remove it from the slot, the system will automatically reload the disc after 10 seconds and begin playing.

You can also eject the disc when the ignition switch is off.

To play the radio when a disc is playing, press the AM, FM or XM (if equipped) button. Press the AUX button to switch to an appropriate audio unit (if it is connected to the auxiliary input jack or the USB adapter cable). Press the CD button again to switch back to the disc player.

If you turn the system off while a disc is playing, either with the VOL/ knob or by turning off the ignition switch, the disc will stay in the drive. When you turn the system back on, the disc will begin playing where it left off.

Protecting Discs

For information on how to handle and protect compact discs, see page

256 .

2009 TSX 197

０８／０２／０６２０：５６：２８３１ＴＬ１６０００２０３


Disc Player Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

The chart on the right explains the error messages you may see in the display while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in the display while playing a disc, press the eject button. After ejecting the disc, check it for damage or deformation. If there is no damage, insert the disc again.

For additional information on damaged discs, see page 257 .

The audio system will try to play the disc. If there is still a problem, the error message will reappear. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. If the error message cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, take your vehicle to a dealer.

Error Message

HEAT ERROR

Cause

High temperature

UNSUPPORTED Track/File format not supported

BAD DISC

PLEASE CHECK

OWNER’S

MANUAL PUSH

EJECT

MECHA ERROR

CHK DISC LOAD

BAD DISC

PLEASE CHECK

OWNER’S

MANUAL

Mechanical error

Servo error

CHCK DISC Disc error

Solution

Will disappear when the temperature returns to normal.

Current track will be skipped. The next supported track or file plays automatically.

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.

Check the disc for serious damage, signs of deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt

(see page 257 ). Insert the disc again. If the code does not disappear, or the disc cannot be removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player.


(see page 257 ).

198 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５６：３５３１ＴＬ１６０００２０４


Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)

U.S. TSX and Canadian TSX Premium iPod INDICATOR

TITLE BUTTON

VOL/


USB INDICATOR

CD BUTTON

AUX BUTTON

SKIP BAR

RETURN BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB

2009 TSX

MENU BUTTON

199

０８／０２／０６２０：５６：４４３１ＴＬ１６０００２０５



To Play an iPod

This audio system can operate the audio files on the iPod with the same controls used for the disc player. To play an iPod, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment by using your dock connector, then press the AUX button. The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. The iPod will also be recharged with the ignition switch in these positions.

The audio system reads and plays sound files to be playable on the iPod.

The system cannot operate an iPod as a mass storage device. The system will only play songs stored on the iPod with iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.

iPods that are compatible with your audio system are listed below.

Model iPod 5G iPod classic iPod nano iPod nano

2nd generation iPod nano

3rd generation iPod touch iPhone

Firmware ＊

Ver. 1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.2 or more

Ver. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.1.1 or more

＊ : Use the latest firmware.

Use only compatible iPods with the latest firmware. iPods that are not compatible will not work in this audio unit.

200 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５６：５６３１ＴＬ１６０００２０６



NOTE:

Do not connect your iPod using a

HUB.

Do not keep the iPod in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cable between the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle and your dock connector.

We recommend backing up your data before playing it.

In AAC format, DRM (digital rights management) files cannot be played.

If the system finds a DRM file, the audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE, and then skips to the next file.

Connecting an iPod

USB ADAPTER CABLE

DOCK CONNECTOR


2.

Connect your dock connector to the iPod correctly and securely.

3.

Install the dock connector to the

USB adapter cable securely.

USB CONNECTOR

1.

Unclip the USB connector by pivoting it, and pull out the USB adapter cable in the console compartment.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

201

０８／０２／０６２０：５７：０４３１ＴＬ１６０００２０７



Sample Display

OK to disconnect.

When the iPod is connected and the iPod mode is selected on the audio display, the USB and iPod indicators are shown in the display. After the iPod. That means you can only operate your iPod using the vehicle’s audio unit.

＊ : It may take a few minutes for the Acura mark to display on the iPod. If the display does not change, this function is not supported on your iPod model or firmware.

If the iPod indicator does not appear in the audio display, check the connections, and try to reconnect the iPod a few times.

If the audio system still does not recognize the iPod, the iPod may need to be reset. Follow the instructions that came with your iPod, or you can find reset instructions online at www.apple.com/ ipod.


Each time you press the TITLE button the display mode switches between the album name, the song name, the artist name, or name off

(which turns off the text display).

The display shows up to about 16 characters of the selected data. If the text data has more than 16 characters, you will see the first 15 characters and the indicator in the display. Press and hold the

TITLE button until the next 16 characters are shown.

202 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５７：１７３１ＴＬ１６０００２０８



To Change or Select Files

Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is playing to select passages and change files.

SKIP − Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file. Press and release the side of the bar, to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly within a file, press and hold either side ( of the SKIP bar.

or )

Turning the selector knob to the right or the left also changes the file.

To Select a File f rom iPod Menu

Push ENTER.

You can also select a file from any list on the iPod menu: playlists, artists, albums and songs, by using the selector knob. Push the selector knob (ENTER) to switch the display to an iPod menu, then turn the selector knob to select a desired list.

Press ENTER to set your selection.

The display shows items on the selected list. Turn the selector knob to select an item, then press ENTER to set your selection.

If you select ‘‘ALL,’’ all available files on the selected list are played.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

203

０８／０２／０７１８：４０：２７３１ＴＬ１６０００２０９



Pressing the RETURN button goes back to the previous display and pressing the MENU button cancels this setting mode.

To Select Repeat or Shuf f le Mode:

MENU ITEMS PLAY MODE ITEMS

204

You can select any type of repeat and shuffle mode by using the MENU button and the selector knob. Press the MENU button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select ‘‘PLAY MODE.’’ Press

ENTER to set the selection.

Turn the selector knob to select a play mode: normal play, shuffle off, shuffle all, shuffle album, repeat off, or repeat one track, then press

ENTER to set your selection.

To cancel the selected mode, press the MENU button and turn the selector knob to show ‘‘PLAY

MODE,’’ then press ENTER. When you see ‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press

ENTER again.

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５７：３７３１ＴＬ１６０００２１０



REPEAT ONE TRK − This feature continuously plays a file. You will see REPEAT in the display.

Select normal play or REPEAT OFF to turn it off.

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar or turning the selector knob changes the file while keeping the repeat feature.

REPEAT OFF − This feature turns off the repeat mode.

SHUFFLE ALL − This feature plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums or songs) in random order.

You will see SHUFFLE in the display.

Select the normal play mode or

SHUFFLE OFF to turn off this feature.

SHUFFLE ALBUM − This feature plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums or songs) in random order. The files in each album are played in the recorded order. You will see ALB

SHUF in the display.

Select the normal play mode or

SHUFFLE OFF to turn off this feature.

SHUFFLE OFF − This feature turns off either of the shuffle modes

(SHUFFLE ALL and SHUFFLE

ALBUM).

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar or turning the selector knob changes a file while keeping the shuffle function.

NOTE:

Available operating function varies on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system.

2009 TSX 205

０８／０２／０６２０：５７：４５３１ＴＬ１６０００２１１



To Stop Playing Your iPod

To play the radio, press the AM, FM, or XM (if equipped) button. Press the CD button to switch to the disc mode (if a disc is loaded). Press the

AUX button to switch the audio mode between the Bluetooth audio

(if equipped) and iPod.

Disconnecting an iPod

You can disconnect the iPod at any time when you see ‘‘OK to display. Always make sure you see

‘‘OK to Disconnect’’ message in the iPod display before you disconnect it.

Make sure to follow the iPod’s instructions on how to disconnect the dock connector from the USB adapter cable.

＊ : The displayed message may vary on models or versions.

On some models, there is no message to disconnect.

If you reconnect the same iPod, the system may begin playing where it left off, depending on what mode the iPod is in when it is reconnected.

iPod Error Messages

If you see an error message in the display, see page 207 .

206 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５７：５０３１ＴＬ１６０００２１２

Main Menu Table Of Contents iPod Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

If you see an error message on the audio display while playing an iPod, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.

Error Message

FILE ERROR

MEDIA ERROR

Solution

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the iPod. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged.

Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.

2009 TSX 207

０８／０２／０６２０：５７：５８３１ＴＬ１６０００２１３


Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)


FILE TYPE INDICATOR

TITLE BUTTON

VOL/


CATEGORY BAR

USB INDICATOR

CD BUTTON

AUX BUTTON

SKIP BAR

208

RETURN BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB

2009 TSX

MENU BUTTON

０８／０２／０６２０：５８：１１３１ＴＬ１６０００２１４



To Play a USB Flash Memory

Device

This audio system can operate the audio files on a USB flash memory device with the same controls used for the disc player. To play a USB flash memory device, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment, then press the AUX button. The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

The audio system reads and plays the audio files on the USB flash memory device in MP3, WMA or

AAC formats. Depending on the format, the display shows MP3,

WMA or AAC when a USB flash memory device is playing. The USB flash memory device limit is up to

700 folders or up to 65535 files.

＊ : Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this audio unit.

The recommended USB flash memory devices are 256 Mbyte or higher USB flash memory devices.

Some digital audio players may be compatible as well.

Some USB flash memory device

(such as devices with security lockout features, etc.) will not work in this audio unit.

NOTE:

Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard drive as the device or your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flash memory device using a HUB.

Do not use an extension cable to the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle.

Do not keep the USB flash memory device in the vehicle.

Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.

We recommend backing up your data before playing a USB flash memory device.

Depending on the type and number of files, it may take some time before they begin to play.

Depending on the software the files were made with, it may not be possible to play some files, or display some text data.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

209

０８／０２／０６２０：５８：２９３１ＴＬ１６０００２１５




MP3 files are:


32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)

16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

− Bit rate:

32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/

160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps

(MPEG1)

− Supported standards:

MPEG1 Audio Layer3

MPEG2 Audio Layer3

−

−

Partition: Top partition only

Maximum layers: 8


WMA files are:


32/44.1/48 kHz

− Bit rate:

48 − 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)


WMA version 7/8/9

− Partition: Top partition only

−

Maximum layers: 8


AAC files are:


8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/

44.1/48 kHz

− Bit rate:

−

48 − 320 kbps

Supported standards:

MPEG4/AAC LC

MPEG2/AAC LC

− Partition: Top partition only

− Maximum layers: 8

210 2009 TSX

Even if recorded in MP3, WMA or

AAC format, a file with unsupported version cannot be played. If the system finds it, the audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to the next file.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM

(digital rights management) files cannot be played. If the system finds a DRM file, the audio unit displays

UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips to the next file.

０８／０２／０６２０：５８：３８３１ＴＬ１６０００２１６



Connecting a USB Flash Memory

Device


USB CONNECTOR

1.



2.

Connect the USB flash memory device to the USB adapter cable correctly and securely.

When the USB flash memory device is connected, the USB indicator is shown in the display.


Each time you press the TITLE button, the display mode shows you in sequence, the folder name, the file name, the artist name, the album name, the song name, or name off

(which turns off the text display).

The display shows up to about 16 characters of the selected data. If the text data has more than 16 characters, you will see the first 15 characters and the indicator in the display. Press and hold the

TITLE button until the next 16 characters are shown.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

211

０８／０２／０６２０：５８：４９３１ＴＬ１６０００２１７




Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash memory device is playing to select passages and change files.



or )

Turning the selector knob to the right or the left also changes the file.

Folder Selection − To select a different folder, press and release either side of the CATEGORY bar.

Press the ▲ side to skip to the next folder, and press the ▼ side to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.

To Select a File f rom Folder and File

Lists

Folder Selection

Track Selection

Press ENTER.

You can also select a folder or file from the list by using the selector knob. Push the selector knob

(ENTER) to switch the display to the folder list, then turn the selector knob to select a folder. Press

ENTER to change the display to the file list, then turn the same knob to select a file. Press ENTER to set your selection.

212 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５８：５８３１ＴＬ１６０００２１８



Pressing the RETURN button goes back to the previous display and pressing the MENU button cancels this setting mode.


Mode:

MENU ITEMS

Turn the selector knob to select an appropriate repeat, random or scan mode, then press the selector knob

(ENTER) to set your selection.

You can select any type of repeat, random and scan modes by using the

MENU button and the selector knob.

Push the MENU button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select ‘‘PLAY

MODE.’’ Press the selector knob

(ENTER) to set the selection.

To cancel the selected mode, press the MENU button and turn the selector knob to show ‘‘PLAY

MODE,’’ then press ENTER. When you see ‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press

ENTER again.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

213

０８／０２／０７１８：４０：３５３１ＴＬ１６０００２１９



PLAY MODE ITEMS

REPEAT ONE TRK − This feature continuously plays a file.

Select normal play to turn it off.

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar also turns off this feature.

REPEAT ONE FLD − This feature replays all the files on the selected folder in the order they are stored.


Pressing either side of the

CATEGORY bar also turns off this feature.

RANDOM IN FLD − This feature plays the files in the selected folder in random order. You will see

F-RANDOM in the display. Select normal play to turn it off.

RANDOM ALL − This feature plays all the files in random order.

You will see RANDOM in the display.


SCAN TRK − This function samples all files in the selected folder in the order they are stored.

To activate the scan feature, press and release the SCAN button. You will see SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of each file in the folder. Press and hold the

SCAN button to get out of the scan mode and play the last file sampled.

You can also select the scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page 213 ).

214 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５９：１７３１ＴＬ１６０００２２０



SCAN FLD − This function samples the first file in each folder in the order they are stored. To activate the folder scan feature, press and release the SCAN button repeatedly. You will see F-SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of each first file in the folder(s). Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the folder scan mode and play the last file sampled.

You can also select the folder scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page 213 ).

Select normal play to turn either scan feature off. Pressing either side of the CATEGORY or SKIP bar also turns off the feature.

To Stop Playing a USB Flash

Memory Device

To play the radio, press the FM, AM or XM button. Press the CD button to switch to the disc mode (if a disc is loaded). Press the AUX button to switch the audio mode between the

USB or Bluetooth audio.

If you reconnect the same USB flash memory device, the system will begin playing where it left off.

Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory

Device

You can disconnect the USB flash memory device in any time even if the USB mode is selected on the audio system. Always follow the USB flash memory device’s instructions when you remove it.

USB Flash Memory Device Error

Messages

If you see an error message in the display, see page 216 .

2009 TSX 215

０８／０２／０６２０：５９：２２３１ＴＬ１６０００２２１


USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

If you see an error message on the audio display while playing a USB flash memory device, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.

Error Message

FILE ERROR

MEDIA ERROR

Solution

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash memory device. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged.

Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.

216 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：５９：２７３１ＴＬ１６０００２２２


Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)


TITLE BUTTON

AUX BUTTON

SKIP BAR

SELECTOR KNOB

2009 TSX 217

０８／０２／０７１７：３１：５７３１ＴＬ１６０００２２３



To Play Bluetooth Audio Files

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Bluetooth audio system, which allows you to listen streaming audio from your Bluetooth audio compatible phone. This function is only available on Bluetooth Audio

Compatible phones that are paired and linked to the vehicle’s

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system (see page 315 ).

Not all Bluetooth enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. You can find an approved phone by visiting www.acura.com/handsfreelink , or by calling the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876.

In Canada, visit www.acura.ca

, or call

1-888-9-ACURA-9.

NOTE: In some states it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

218

Make sure that your phone is paired and linked to the HFL.

Press the AUX button with the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY

(I) or ON (II) position. The audio display shows the Bluetooth Audio message and mark. Until the phone is recognized, you will see ‘‘NO

CONNECT’’ on the display. This message will go off when the phone is recognized, then the system begins to play.

2009 TSX

After a device is linked, press the

TITLE button to confirm the device name. The name of the device will appear on the audio display.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be delay before the system begins to play.

To begin to play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions.

＊ : If an iPod, USB flash memory device or audio unit connected to the auxiliary input jack was selected at the last mode, you will see iPod, USB or AUX in the audio display. Push the AUX button again to play audio files from your Bluetooth Audio phone.

０８／０２／０７１７：３２：０９３１ＴＬ１６０００２２４



In the following conditions, the display shows ‘‘NO CONNECT’’ message.

The phone is not linked to the

HFL.

The phone is not turned on.

The phone is not in the vehicle.

Another HFL compatible phone, which is not compatible for

Bluetooth Audio, is already connected.

If your Bluetooth Audio compatible phone does not operate as described, make sure it is an Acura approved phone. To find out if your phone is approved, go to www.acura.com/ handsfreelink (in Canada, www.acura.

ca ), or call the HandsFreeLink client support at (888) 528-7876.

To skip a f ile

Press the side of the SKIP bar to skip forward, and press the side to skip backward to the beginning to the current file. Push the side again to skip to the previous file.

Turning the selector knob to the right or left also changes a file.

To pause or resume a f ile

The resume/pause mode can stop playing a file temporarily. Press the

MENU button to display the audio settings.

Turn the selector to select

RESUME/PAUSE mode, then press

ENTER to set your selection. Repeat to resume play.

NOTE: The pause function may not be available on some phone devices.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

219

０８／０２／０６２１：００：０２３１ＴＬ１６０００２２５



To change sound settings

Press the MENU button to display the audio settings. Turn the selector to select a desired sound mode, then press ENTER to set your selection.

Turn the selector to your liking (see page 181 for more sound setting information).

To switch to HFL mode

If you receive a call when the

Bluetooth Audio is playing, press the Talk button on the steering wheel. The display switches to the

HFL mode (see page 310 ).

After ending the call, press the HFL

Back button to go back to the

Bluetooth Audio mode.

If you receive a call while the system is in the pause mode, the mode will be canceled and Bluetooth Audio will continue to play.

To turn of f the Bluetooth Audio mode

Select any other audio mode by pressing a button; FM, AM, XM or

CD (if a disc is loaded), on the audio control panel or press the mode button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select another audio mode. If iPod or USB flash memory device is connected to the USB adapter cable or audio unit is connected to AUX jack, pressing the

AUX button also changes a mode.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

220 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：００：０７３１ＴＬ１６０００２２６











2009 TSX 221

０８／０２／０６２１：００：１５３１ＴＬ１６０００２２７


Audio System (Models with navigation system)

Interf ace Dial

Most audio system functions can still be controlled by standard buttons, dials, and knobs, but some functions can only be accessed using the interface dial. The interface dial has two parts, a knob and a selector.

ENTER


The audio system can also be operated by voice control. See the

Navi section in your quick start guide for an overview of this system, and the navigation system manual for complete details.

222

KNOB

SELECTOR

The knob turns left and right. Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen.

The selector can be pushed left, right, up, down, and in. Use the selector to scroll through lists, to select menus, and to highlight menu items. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector

(ENTER) to go to that selection.

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：００：２２３１ＴＬ１６０００２２８


Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)

FM/AM BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

CATEGORY BAR

TUNE BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

NAVIGATION SCREEN

VOL/


CENTER DISPLAY

SOUND BUTTON

SKIP BAR

SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/

AUTO SELECT) BAR

INTERFACE DIAL

2009 TSX 223

０８／０２／０６２１：００：３３３１ＴＬ１６０００２２９



To Play the FM/AM Radio

STEREO ICON BAND the FM/AM button. You can also change bands by pushing the interface selector up. Each time you push it up, the band will change to

FM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM bands,

STEREO will be shown on the navigation screen and ST on the center display, if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction on AM is not available.

On the AM band, AM noise reduction turns on automatically.

To Select a Station

You can use any of five methods to find radio stations on the selected band: tune, skip (seek), scan, the preset buttons, and auto select.

On the FM band, you can also use the features provided by the radio data system (RDS). For more information on the RDS, see page

227 .

The ignition switch must be in the

ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position. Press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display. Turn the system on by pressing the

VOL/ knob or the FM/AM button. Adjust the volume by turning the VOL/ knob.

The band and frequency that the radio was last tuned to are shown on the display. To change bands, press

224 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：００：４１３１ＴＬ１６０００２３０



TUNE ICON

TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune the radio to a desired frequency.

Press the right side of the bar to tune to a higher frequency, or the left side to tune to a lower frequency.

To tune with the interface dial, push the selector down, and turn the knob to TUNE icon. Then press ENTER on the selector, and turn the knob to the desired frequency. To exit the

TUNE mode, press ENTER on the selector, then push the selector up.

SKIP (SEEK) − The skip (seek) function searches up and down from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal. To activate it, press either side ( or

) of the SKIP bar, then release it. You can also activate the skip function (SEEK is displayed on the screen) by pushing the interface selector to the right or left.

SCAN ICON

SCAN − The SCAN function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected band. To activate it, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar, then release it.

To scan with the interface dial, push the selector down, and then push it to the right. You will see SCAN on the screen.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

225

０８／０２／０６２１：００：５１３１ＴＬ１６０００２３１



The system will scan for a station with a strong signal. When it finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the scan side of the bar again, or push the interface selector to the right again.

Preset − Each preset button or preset icon can store one frequency on AM and two frequencies on FM.

To store a preset memory location:

1.

Select the desired band, AM or

FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store two sets of FM frequencies with the preset buttons (on-screen icons).

226

2.

Use the tune, skip (seek), scan, or

RDS function to tune the radio to a desired station.

3.

Press the preset button, and hold it until you hear a beep. You can also store frequencies with the interface dial. Select the preset icon you want to store the frequency on, then press ENTER on the interface selector, and hold it for more than 2 seconds.

4.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve stations on FM.

A.SEL INDICATOR

PRESET ICON

A.SEL ICON

AUTO SELECT − If you are traveling far from home and can no longer receive your preset stations, you can use the auto select feature to find stations in the local area.

Push the interface selector down to scroll down the screen, highlight

A.SEL, then press ENTER on the interface selector. You will see

A.SEL flashing on the screen, and the system goes into scan mode for several seconds.

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０１：０５３１ＴＬ１６０００２３２



To turn off auto select, press ENTER on the interface selector.

You can also press the A.SEL side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see

A.SEL on the screen, and the system goes into scan mode for several seconds. The system stores the frequencies of six AM and twelve

FM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto select cannot find a strong station for every preset button.

If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can store other frequencies on the preset buttons (icons) as previously described.

To turn off auto select , press the

A. SEL side of the bar. This restores the presets you originally set.

For information on FM/AM radio frequencies and reception, see page

285 .

Radio Data System (RDS)

On the FM band, you can select a favorite station and display the program service name according to the information provided by the radio data system (RDS).

Program Service (PS) Name Display

The program service name display function shows the name of the station you are listening to. With the audio system on and the FM band selected, you can turn this function on or off.

2009 TSX

PS ON MESSAGE

To switch the PS name display function on and off, press and release the TITLE button. With the system on, you will see the ‘‘PS ON’’ message on the center display. If the station you are listening to is an RDS station, the displayed frequency switches to the station name.

CONTINUED

227

０８／０２／０６２１：０１：１９３１ＴＬ１６０００２３３



If the station you are listening to is not an RDS station, the audio screen and the center display continue to show the frequency with the PS name display function on.

When you turn off this function by pressing the TITLE button, the center display shows ‘‘PS OFF.’’

228

Radio Data System (RDS) Category

RDS SEARCH ICON

On the FM band selected, you can select the program type provided by the RDS. Press the AUDIO button to display the radio information on the screen. Push down the selector on the interface dial, then turn the knob to select RDS SEARCH icon. Press

ENTER to set your selection. The principal RDS categories are shown as follows;

ALL: All RDS category stations

2009 TSX

ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft rock music

COUNTRY: Country music

SOFT: Adult hits and soft music

TOP 40: Top 40 hits

OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies

R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft rhythm and blues

RELIGION: Religious music and religious talk

CLASSIC: Classical music

JAZZ: Jazz

INFO: News, information, sports, talk, foreign language, personality, public, college, and weather

TRAFFIC: Traffic information

０８／０２／０６２１：０１：２８３１ＴＬ１６０００２３４



RDS CATEGORY

RDS CATEGORY

Turn the selector to select an RDS category. You can use search or scan function to find radio stations on the selected RDS category by pressing the selector to the right repeatedly.


If you do nothing while the RDS category is selected, the selected category is cancelled.

You can also select an RDS category with the CATEGORY bar. Press either side ( ▲ or ▼ ) of the

CATEGORY bar to display an RDS category in the center display. Select a category by pressing either side of the bar.

RDS Program Search

This function searches up and down a frequency for the strongest signal from the frequencies that carry the selected RDS category information.

This can help you to find a station in your favorite category. To activate it, press and release either side

( or ) of the SKIP bar. You will also see the selected RDS category name blinking in the center display while searching it. When the system finds a station, the selected

RDS category name will be displayed again for about 5 seconds in the center display.



2009 TSX

CONTINUED

229

０８／０２／０６２１：０１：３５３１ＴＬ１６０００２３５



SEEK/SCAN ICON

RDS CATEGORY LIST

SEEK is selected.

To activate RDS program search with the interface dial, push the

AUDIO button to display the FM radio information on the screen.

Push the selector down, and turn the knob to select RDS SEARCH icon.

Press ENTER on the selector. The screen shows you the RDS category list.

Turn the knob to the desired RDS category.

While the RDS category is selected, move the selector knob to the right to select SEEK in the upper right corner of the screen. Then press

ENTER to activate the seek function.

RDS Program SCAN

The scan function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected RDS category. To activate it, press and release the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see

SCAN in the center display. The system will scan for a station with a strong signal in the selected RDS category. You will also see the selected RDS category name blinking in the center display while searching it. When the system finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds.

230 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０１：４４３１ＴＬ１６０００２３６



If you do nothing, the system will scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/

A.SEL bar again.



SEEK/SCAN ICON

RDS CATEGORY LIST

SCAN is selected.

To activate RDS program scan with the interface dial, push the AUDIO button to display the FM radio information on the screen. Push the selector down, and turn the knob to select RDS SEARCH icon. Press

ENTER on the selector. The screen shows you the RDS category list.

Turn the knob to the desired RDS category.

While the RDS category is selected, move the selector knob to the right to select SCAN in the upper right corner of the screen. Then press

ENTER to activate the scan function.

You can use the RDS program search or scan function even if the

PS name display function is off. In this case, the display shows a frequency in place of a PS name.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

231

０８／０２／０６２１：０１：５２３１ＴＬ１６０００２３７



Radio Text Display

This function displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.

If the selected RDS station has the radio text information, you will see the text indicator on the screen.

TEXT INDICATOR

The text is displayed according to the information from RDS.

RADIO TEXT ICON

To activate radio text display, use the interface dial. Push the selector down, and turn the knob to select

RADIO TEXT icon. Press ENTER on the selector to enter the setting.

The display shows up to about 64 characters of text data on the selected RDS station.

232 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０２：０３３１ＴＬ１６０００２３８



Adjusting the Sound

BASS, TREBLE, FADER, and

BALANCE are each adjustable. You can also adjust the strength of the sound coming from the center and subwoofer speakers. In addition, you can set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) II and Speed-sensitive volume compensation (SVC).

These adjustments can be made by the (Sound) button or the interface dial.

SOUND ICON

To adjust them, press the AUDIO button, push the interface selector down, and turn the interface knob to

SOUND. Then press ENTER on the selector.

Select the mode you want to adjust by turning the interface dial.

You can also adjust the sound by pushing the (Sound) button repeatedly. Each mode is shown in the center display as it changes.

Turn the VOL/ knob to adjust the setting to your liking. When the level reaches the center, you will see

‘‘C’’ in the display.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

233

０８／０２／０６２１：０２：０９３１ＴＬ１６０００２３９



The system will return to the audio playing mode in the center display about 10 seconds after you stop adjusting a mode.

BASS/TREBLE − To adjust bass and treble, select BASS or TREBLE, and press ENTER on the interface selector. The current setting is shown on the display. Turn the interface knob to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing

ENTER on the interface selector.

FADER/BALANCE − These modes adjust the strength of the sound coming from each speaker.

Fader adjusts the front-to-back strength, while balance adjusts the side-to-side strength. To adjust fader and balance, select FADER or

BALANCE, then press ENTER on the interface selector. The current setting is shown on the screen. Turn the interface knob to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector. To equalize the fader or balance, turn the interface knob until the marks on the sound grid come to the center of the adjustment bar.

CENTER − Adjusts the strength of sound from the center speaker.

SUBWOOFER − To adjust the strength of the sound from the subwoofer speaker, select it and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface knob to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

234 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０２：１７３１ＴＬ１６０００２４０



Dolby PL (ProLogic) II − Dolby

PL (ProLogic) II signal processing creates multi-channel surround sound from 2 channel stereo audio sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only activate when listening to DISC (CD-

DA, MP3/WMA), XM radio, and

AUX. When ProLogic II is active,

‘‘PL II’’ is shown in the audio display.

ProLogic ON/OFF settings are independently controlled for DISC,

XM and AUX sources.

To set this feature on or off, select

Dolby PL II, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Rotate the interface dial to ON or OFF, and press ENTER.

Manufactured under license from

Dolby Laboratories. ‘‘Dolby’’,

‘‘ProLogic’’, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories.

Speed-sensitive Volume

Compensation (SVC)

The SVC mode controls the volume based on vehicle speed. The faster you go, the louder the audio volume becomes. As you slow down, the audio volume decreases.

The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,

SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC

HIGH. The default setting is MID.

To change the SVC mode, select

SVC, then press ENTER on the interface selector. The current setting is shown on the screen. Turn the interface knob to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector. If you feel the sound is too loud, choose low. If you feel the sound is too quiet, choose high.

2009 TSX 235

０８／０２／０６２１：０２：２２３１ＴＬ１６０００２４１


Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)

TITLE BUTTON

XM RADIO BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

CATEGORY BAR

TUNE BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

VOL/


CENTER DISPLAY

SKIP BAR



236

INTERFACE DIAL

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０２：３２３１ＴＬ１６０００２４２



Your vehicle is capable of receiving

XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the

United States, and Canada, except

Hawaii and Alaska. XM is a registered trademark of XM Satellite

Radio, Inc.

XM Satellite Radio receives signals from two satellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offers many channels in several categories. Along with a large selection of different types of music,

XM Satellite Radio also allows you to view channel and category selections in the audio display.

Operating the XM Radio

To listen to XM satellite radio, turn the ignition switch to the

ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, and press the button. The last channel you listened to will show in the audio screen and the center display. Adjust the volume by turning the VOL/ knob.

Push the AUDIO button to display

XM information on the screen. You can operate the XM Satellite Radio system with the interface dial.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

237

０８／０２／０６２１：０２：３９３１ＴＬ１６０００２４３



MODE − To switch between the category mode and channel mode, press and hold the TITLE button until the mode changes. The

CATEGORY or CHANNEL mode is displayed on the screen. To switch the mode with the interface dial, push down the interface selector to select AUDIO MENU, then turn the knob to select MODE, and press

ENTER on the selector repeatedly.

In the category mode, such as Jazz,

Rock, Classical, etc., you can navigate through all of the channels within that category. In the channel mode, you can select all of the available channels.


TITLE button, the center display changes in the following sequence:

NAME (artist name), TITLE (music title), and CHANNEL NAME

(channel name).

On the screen, you will see the selected CHANNEL (number),

CATEGORY, NAME (artist name), and TITLE (music title).

TUNE − Press either side of the

TUNE bar to change channel selections. Press the side of the bar for higher numbered channels and the side for lower numbered channels. You can also change channels with the interface selector, push down the interface selector to select AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface knob to choose TUNE and press ENTER on the selector. Turn the interface knob to the appropriate direction. In the category mode, you can only select channels within that category.

CHANNEL LIST − Push down the interface selector to select AUDIO

MENU, then turn the interface knob to select CHANNEL LIST and press

ENTER on the selector. Turn the interface knob to select a channel, then press ENTER to set your selection.

238 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０２：５０３１ＴＬ１６０００２４４



CATEGORY ( ▼ or ) Press either side of the bar to select another category. You can also change a category by pushing the interface selector left or right.

SCAN − The scan function gives you a sampling of all channels while in the channel mode. In the category mode, only the channels within that category are scanned. To activate

SCAN, press the SCAN side of the

SCAN/A.SEL bar. To scan with the interface dial, scroll down, and push interface selector to the right. You will see SCAN on the screen and center display.

The system plays each channel in numerical order for a few seconds, then selects the next channel. When you hear a channel you want to continue listening to, push the interface selector to the right again or press the SCAN side of the bar to cancel.

XM BAND

Preset − You can store up to 12 preset channels using the six preset buttons. Each button stores one channel from the XM1 band and one channel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:

1.

Press the button or scroll up by pushing the interface selector up. Either XM1 or XM2 will be shown on the display.

2009 TSX

2.

Use the tune, skip (seek), or scan function to tune to a desired channel.

In category mode, only channels within that category can be selected. In channel mode, all channels can be selected.

3.

Pick the preset button you want for that channel. Press and hold the preset button until you hear a beep. You can also pick the number with the interface dial.

Select your desired number and press and hold ENTER on the interface selector.

4.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the first six channels.

CONTINUED

239

０８／０２／０６２１：０２：５９３１ＴＬ１６０００２４５



5.

Press the button or scroll up again. The other XM band will be shown. Store the next six channels using steps 2 and 3.

Once a channel is stored, press and release the proper preset button to tune to it.

XM Satellite Radio Display

Messages

‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the audio or program information.

‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel currently selected is no longer broadcasting.

‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is fully updated.

Channels 0 and 1 should still work normally.

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is currently too weak. Move the vehicle to an area away from tall buildings, and with an unobstructed view of the southern horizon.

‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel number does not exist, or is not part of your subscription, or this channel has no artist or title information at this time.

‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem with the XM antenna. Please consult your dealer.

240 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０３：１１３１ＴＬ１６０００２４６



The XM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. To help compensate for this, ground-based repeaters are placed in major metropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.

Depending on where you drive, you may experience reception problems.

Interference can be caused by any of these conditions:

Driving on the north side of an east/west mountain road.

Driving on the north side of a large commercial truck on an east/west road.

Driving in tunnels.

Signal may be blocked by mountains or large obstacles to the south.

SATELLITE

Signal weaker in these areas.

Driving on a road beside a vertical wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south of you.

Driving on the lower level of a multi-tiered road.

Driving on a single lane road alongside dense trees taller than

50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

GROUND REPEATER

There may be other geographic situations that could affect XM

Satellite Radio reception.



CONTINUED

2009 TSX 241

０８／０２／０７２０：４３：１４３１ＴＬ１６０００２４７



XM Satellite Radio Note Function

This function stores the sound content played on the selected XM satellite radio station with the channel, category, name and title information.

To activate this function, press and hold the button for about 2 seconds while a song or passage which you want to store is playing.

The function records for about 10 seconds, enough for you to identify the selection when you play it back.

Once you store the recorded sound file, you can replay it and confirm the information. The system can store up to 30 sound files. If you continue to store more information, the oldest one will be deleted each time you add new information.

NOTE ICON

To replay and see the stored information, press the AUDIO button to select the audio display on the navigation screen.

Push down the selector knob to display the audio menu. Turn the selector knob to select NOTE, then press ENTER.

SOUND FILE RECORDED DATE

Turn the selector knob to select a sound file, then press ENTER. The display shows the category, name and title information of the selected file.

242 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０７２０：４３：２３３１ＴＬ１６０００２４８



To delete a file, select it by turning the selector knob, then push it to the right. Select ‘‘Delete All’’ or ‘‘Delete

Selected Item,’’ then press ENTER.

Receiving XM Satellite Radio

Service

If your XM Satellite Radio service has expired or you purchased your vehicle from a previous owner, you can listen to a sampling of the broadcasts available on XM Satellite

Radio. With the ignition switch in the

ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position, press the button. A variety of music types and styles will play.

If you decide to purchase XM satellite radio service, contact XM

Radio at www.xmradio.com

, or at

1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact www.xmradio.ca

, or call 1-877-438-

9677. You will need to give them your radio I.D. number and your credit card number. To get your radio I.D. number, press and release the side of the TUNE bar until

‘‘0’’ appears in the display. Your I.D.

will appear in the display.

After you’ve registered with XM

Radio, keep your audio system in the

XM Satellite Radio mode while you wait for activation. This should take about 30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, make sure your vehicle remains in an open area with good reception. Once your audio system is activated, CAT

(category) or CH (channel) will appear in the center display, and you’ll be able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will continue to send an activation signal to your vehicle for at least 12 hours from the activation request. If the service has not been activated after 36 hours, contact XM Radio.

2009 TSX 243

０８／０２／０６２１：０３：３８３１ＴＬ１６０００２４９


Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)

TITLE BUTTON

CENTER DISPLAY

PRESET BUTTONS

AUDIO BUTTON

DISC LOAD BUTTON

244 2009 TSX

NAVIGATION SCREEN

VOL/


DISC BUTTON

SKIP BAR



INTERFACE DIAL

DISC SLOT

DISC EJECT BUTTON

０８／０２／０６２１：０３：５３３１ＴＬ１６０００２５０



Your vehicle’s audio system has an in-dash disc changer with the same controls used for the radio. To operate the disc changer, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY

(I) or the ON (II) position.

The disc changer can play these disc formats:

CD (CD-DA)

MP3/WMA

DVD-A

The disc packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

The changer can also play MP3 or

WMA format (see page 251 ).

When playing a disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ in the audio display (if selected). In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the display. In the center display, you will see MP3 or

WMA, depending on what format you are playing.

A disc compressed in AAC format cannot be played in this audio system.

NOTE:

If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is protected by digital rights management (DRM), the audio system displays UNSUPPORTED in the center display, and then skips to the next file.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

245

０８／０２／０７０９：１５：３８３１ＴＬ１６０００２５１



DVD-A discs not meeting DVD verification standards may not be playable.

Video CDs and DVD-V format discs will not work in this unit.

Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed discs are not playable.

Manufactured under license under

U.S. Patent ＃ ’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;

5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS

Digital Surround are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and

Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.

1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights

Reserved.

You cannot load and play 3-inch

(8-cm) discs in this system.



Loading Discs in the Changer

To load multiple discs in one operation:

1.

With the ignition in the

ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position, press and hold the LOAD button until you hear a beep and see ‘‘DISC LOAD’’ in the center display, then release the button.

2.

Insert a disc into the slot. Insert it only about halfway; the drive will pull it in the rest of the way. You will see ‘‘DISC READ’’ in the center display. When you insert the first disc, the changer will start to play the disc.

3.

When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the center display again, insert the next disc into the slot.

Do not try to insert a disc until

‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could damage the audio unit.

246 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０４：１８３１ＴＬ１６０００２５２



4.

Repeat this until all six positions are loaded. If you are not loading all six positions, the system will then begin playing the last disc loaded.

If you stop loading discs before all six positions are filled, the system will wait for 10 seconds, stop the load operation, and begin playing the last disc loaded.

To load a single disc:

1.

Press and release the LOAD button.

2.

‘‘NO DISC’’ is shown on the screen for an empty position in the changer. When the green load indicator comes on and you see

‘‘DISC LOAD’’ in the center display, insert the disc into the slot.

Insert it only about halfway; the drive will pull it in the rest of the way.

Do not try to insert a disc until

‘‘DISC LOAD’’ appears. You could damage the audio unit.

You can select the position to load a disc. Turn the interface knob or press a preset button to select the position, then press ENTER on the selector. This starts the loading sequence. If you do not select the position, the system loads the disc to the first empty position in numerical order.

If you press the LOAD button while a disc is playing, the system will stop playing that disc and start the loading sequence. It will then play the disc just loaded.

2009 TSX

To Play a Disc

CURRENT DISC

Select the changer by pressing the

DISC button. The system will begin playing the last selected disc in the disc changer. You will see the current disc position highlighted.

To select a different disc, press the corresponding number on the preset buttons, or turn the interface knob to highlight the desired disc number, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

CONTINUED

247

０８／０２／０６２１：０４：２７３１ＴＬ１６０００２５３



The player can play CD-TEXT, MP3, and WMA formats.

When you play CD-TEXT, you will see the track name, artist name, and album name on the screen. When you play MP3/WMA discs, you will see the track name and folder name on the screen. If the disc was not recorded with this information, it will not be displayed.

To Change Tracks

Each time you press and release the side of the skip bar or push the interface selector to the right, the player skips forward to the beginning of the next track. Press and release the side of the skip bar or push the interface selector to the left to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press the side or push the interface selector to the left again to skip to the previous track. To move rapidly within a track, press and hold either side of the skip bar.

To Choose a Track

TRACK LIST

You can also choose a track directly from a track list. Press ENTER on the interface selector, and the track list screen will be shown. If there are no track names, track numbers are displayed. You will see the current track is highlighted. Turn the interface knob to select the desired track, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

248 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０４：３９３１ＴＬ１６０００２５４



To exit the track list display, press the AUDIO button, or push the interface selector to the left, or press the cancel button.

Track Scan

When you press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A. SEL bar or scroll down and push the interface selector to the left, the next track of the current track plays for about 10 seconds.

You will see SCAN next to TRACK on the screen and center display. To listen to the rest of the track, press and hold the SCAN side of the bar until you hear a beep or push the interface selector to the left again within 10 seconds.

If you don’t, the system advances to the next track, plays about 10 seconds of it, and continues through the rest of the tracks the same way.

Disc Scan

When you press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A. SEL bar repeatedly until you see D-SCAN in the center display, or push down the interface selector to the right, the first track of the current disc plays for about 10 seconds. You will see SCAN next to

DISC on the screen. The disc number is blinking and SCAN is also shown in the center display. To listen to the rest of the disc, press and hold the SCAN side of the bar until you hear a beep, or push down the interface selector to the right again within 10 seconds.

If you don’t, the system advances to the next disc, plays about 10 seconds of its first track, and continues through the rest of the discs the same way. When the system reaches the last disc, DISC SCAN is canceled, and that disc continues to play.

To Select Repeat or Random

Mode:

Push down the selector.

You can select any type of repeat and random modes by using the interface dial.

Push the AUDIO button to display the audio information on the screen, then scroll down by pushing down the selector to select the audio menu.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 249

０８／０２／０６２１：０４：５１３１ＴＬ１６０００２５５



AUDIO MENU SCREEN

Turn the interface knob to select a desired repeat or random mode, then press ENTER to set your selection.

To cancel the selected repeat or random mode, have the selected mode highlighted, then press


Track Repeat

To replay the current track continuously, select TRACK

REPEAT, and press ENTER on the interface selector. As a reminder, you will see REPEAT next to

TRACK on the screen. To turn this feature off, highlight TRACK

REPEAT (if not already highlighted), and press ENTER on the interface selector again.

Disc Repeat

To replay the current disc continuously, select DISC REPEAT, and press ENTER on the interface selector. As a reminder, you will see

REPEAT next to DISC on the screen.

To turn this feature off, highlight

DISC REPEAT (if not already highlighted), and press ENTER on the interface selector again.

Random Play

To play the tracks of the current disc in random order, select TRACK

RANDOM, and press ENTER on the interface selector. As a reminder, you will see RANDOM next to

TRACK on the screen. To turn this feature off, highlight TRACK

RANDOM (if not already highlighted), and press ENTER on the interface selector again.

To Pause a Disc

To pause a disc, press the preset button which corresponds to the current disc. To play the disc again, press the preset button again.

250 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０５：１０３１ＴＬ１６０００２５６



To Stop Playing a Disc

To take the system out of disc mode, press the FM/AM button, the button, or the AUX button (if an appropriate unit is connected). To return to disc mode, press the DISC button.

If you turn the system off while a disc is playing, either with the VOL/ knob or the ignition switch, play will continue at the same point when you turn it back on.

Playing a DVD-A Disc

Use the disc controls previously described.

Playing an MP3/WMA Disc

The changer plays MP3/WMA files in recorded order. Each disc can hold up to 400 playable files within 8 folder layers. When playing MP3 discs, a disc can support a maximum number of 100 folders, and each folder can hold 255 playable files.


MP3 files are:


32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)

16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

− Bitrate:

32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/

160/192/224/256/320 kbps

(MPEG1)

8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/

112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)

Compatible with variable bit rate and multi-session

− Maximum layers



WMA files are:


22.05/32/44.1/48 kHz

− Bit rate:

32/40/48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

Compatible with variable bit rate and multi-session

− Maximum layers


To play an MP3/WMA disc, use the disc controls previously described, along with the following information.

2009 TSX 251

０８／０２／０６２１：０５：１８３１ＴＬ１６０００２５７



Changing the Folders

While playing an MP3/WMA disc, you can select a folder within the disc by pressing either side of the category bar. Each time you press either side of the bar, the folder title and its first file’s information appear in the center display in recorded order.

Changing and Selecting the Folders/

Files


Using the interface selector, you can see the list of all the files and folders within a disc. While playing a MP3/

WMA disc, press the AUDIO button.

The currently playing folder and file information comes on the screen.

CURRENT FOLDER

Push the selector to show the folder list. Turn the selector knob, highlight the folder you want to see the information within, and press

ENTER.

252 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０５：２８３１ＴＬ１６０００２５８



CURRENT TRACK

You can see the list of all the files in the selected folder. Turn the selector knob, then press ENTER to set your selection.

If the main folder has some additional folders in the lower layer, you can also see each lower folder listed on the screen.

Folder Scan

This feature, when activated, samples the first file of each folder for 10 seconds. To scan a folder, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/

A. SEL bar repeatedly. You will see

SCAN next to FOLDER and the folder number blinking.

To listen to the rest of the folder, press and hold the SCAN side of the bar until you hear a beep. If you do not, the system advances to the next folder, plays 10 seconds of it, and continues throughout the rest of the folder in the same way. When the system samples the first file of all folders, folder scan is canceled, and the last file played continues to play.

Folder Repeat

This feature, when activated, replays all files on the selected folder. To activate folder repeat mode, select

FOLDER REPEAT by interface knob, and press ENTER on the interface selector. You will see

REPEAT next to FOLDER on the screen. To turn this feature off, highlight FOLDER REPEAT (if not already highlighted), and press

ENTER on the interface selector again.

To select any type of the repeat modes, use the interface dial. For more information, see page 249 .

2009 TSX 253

０８／０２／０６２１：０５：３９３１ＴＬ１６０００２５９



Folder Random

This feature, when activated, plays all files in the current folder in random order. To activate folder random play, select FOLDER

RANDOM by interface knob, and press ENTER on the interface selector. You will see RANDOM next to FOLDER on the screen. To turn this feature off, highlight

FOLDER RANDOM (if not already highlighted), and press ENTER on the interface selector again.

To select any type of the random modes, use the interface dial. For more information, see page 249 .

254

Removing Discs f rom the

Changer

To remove the disc that is currently playing, press the eject button. You will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the center display. When you remove the disc from the slot, the system automatically enters the previous mode AM, FM1, FM2, or XM

Satellite Radio. The system also begins the load sequence so you can load another disc. If you do not load another disc, the load sequence is canceled, and the system continues playing in the previous mode.

If you do not remove the disc from the slot, the system will reload the disc after 10 seconds. To begin playing the disc, press the DISC button.

To remove a different disc from the changer, first select it by pressing the corresponding number on the preset button or turning the

2009 TSX interface knob, and pressing ENTER on the interface selector. When that disc begins playing, press the eject button.

When you press the eject button while listening to the radio, or with the audio system turned off, the disc that was last selected is ejected.

After that disc is ejected, pressing the eject button again will eject the next disc in numerical order. By doing this six times, you can remove all the discs from the changer.

You can also eject discs when the ignition switch is off:

To eject one disc, press and release the eject button.

To eject all discs, press and hold the eject button until the first disc begins to eject.

０８／０２／０６２１：０５：４８３１ＴＬ１６０００２６０


Disc Changer Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

The chart on the right explains the error messages you may see in the center display while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in the center display while playing a disc, press the eject button. After ejecting the disc, check it for damage or deformation. If there is no damage, insert the disc again.

For additional information on damaged discs, see page 257 .

The audio system will try to play the disc. If there is still a problem, the error message will reappear. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. If the error message cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, take your vehicle to a dealer.

Error Message

HEAT ERROR

Cause

High Temperature

UNSUPPORTED Track/File format not supported

PLEASE CHECK

OWNER’S

MANUAL

PUSH EJECT

BAD DISC

MECHA ERROR

CHANGER ERROR

CHK DISC LOAD

PLEASE CHECK

OWNER’S

MANUAL

BAD DISC

CHECK DISC

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Disc Error

Solution

Will disappear when the temperature returns to normal.

Current track will be skipped. The next supported track or file plays automatically.

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).


(see page 257 ). Insert the disc again. If the code does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player.


(see page 257 ).

2009 TSX 255

０８／０２／０６２１：０６：００３１ＴＬ１６０００２６１


Protecting Your Discs

General Inf ormation

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, use only high quality discs labeled for audio use.

When recording a CD-R or

CD-RW, the recording must be closed for it to be used by the disc changer.

When using DVD-R/RW discs, they should meet DVD verification standards.

Play only standard, round, 5-inch

(12 cm) discs. Smaller or oddshaped discs may jam in the drive or cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly to prevent damage and skipping.



Protecting Discs

When a disc is not being played, store it in its case to protect it from dust and other contamination. To prevent warpage, keep discs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.

Wipe across the disc from the center to the outside edge.

A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. The small plastic pieces causing this roughness can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the disc, causing skipping or other problems.

Remove these pieces by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects in the disc changer.

Handle a disc by its edges; never touch either surface. Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.

These, along with contamination from finger prints, liquids, and felttip pens, can cause the disc to not play properly, or possibly jam in the drive.

256 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０６：１７３１ＴＬ１６０００２６２



Additional Inf ormation on

Recommended Discs

The in-dash disc player/changer has a sophisticated and delicate mechanism. If you insert a damaged disc as indicated in this section, it may become stuck inside and damage the audio unit.

Examples of these discs are shown to the right:

1.

Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs

Bubbled/

Wrinkled

With Label/

Sticker

Using Printer

Label Kit

Sealed

2.

Damaged discs 3.

Poor quality discs

With Plastic

Ring

Chipped/

Cracked

Warped

2009 TSX

Burrs

CONTINUED

257

０８／０２／０６２１：０６：３０３１ＴＬ１６０００２６３



4.

Small, irregular shaped discs 5.

Discs with scratches, dirty discs Recommended discs are printed with the following logo.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

CD-R or CD-RW may not play due to the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on the discs may cause the sound to skip.

Audio unit may not play the following formats.

This audio unit cannot play a Dualdisc .

Can Shape Arrow Shape

258 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０６：３６３１ＴＬ１６０００２６４


Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

USB ICON iPod ICON

CATEGORY BAR

MAP BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

DISC BUTTON

CENTER DISPLAY

AUX BUTTON

SKIP BAR

INTERFACE DIAL

2009 TSX 259

０８／０２／０６２１：０６：４７３１ＴＬ１６０００２６５



To Play an iPod

This audio system can operate the audio files on the iPod with the same controls used for the in-dash disc changer. To play an iPod, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment by using your dock connector, then press the

AUX button. The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or

ON (II) position. The iPod will also be recharged with the ignition switch in these positions.

The audio system reads and plays sound files to be playable on the iPod.

The system cannot operate an iPod as a mass storage device. The system will only play songs stored on the iPod with iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.


You can select the AUX mode by using the navigation system voice control buttons, but cannot operate the play mode functions.

iPods that are compatible with your audio system are listed below.

Model iPod 5G iPod classic iPod nano iPod nano

2nd generation iPod nano

3rd generation iPod touch iPhone

Firmware ＊

Ver. 1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.2 or more

Ver. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.1.1 or more

＊ : Use the latest firmware.

Use only compatible iPods with the latest firmware. iPods that are not compatible will not work in this audio unit.

260 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０６：５７３１ＴＬ１６０００２６６



NOTE:

Do not connect your iPod using a

HUB.

Do not keep the iPod in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cable between the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle and your dock connector.

We recommend backing up your data before playing it.

In AAC format, DRM (digital rights management) files cannot be played.

If the system finds a DRM file, the audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE, and then skips to the next file.

Connecting an iPod


USB CONNECTOR

1.


2009 TSX

CONTINUED

261

０８／０２／０６２１：０７：０８３１ＴＬ１６０００２６７



USB ADAPTER

CABLE

DOCK CONNECTOR

2.

Connect your dock connector to the iPod correctly and securely.

3.

Install the dock connector to the

USB adapter cable securely.

262

Sample Display

OK to disconnect.

When the iPod is connected and the iPod mode is selected on the audio system, the iPod indicator is shown in the center display. If you selected the audio control display by pressing the AUDIO button, you will see the iPod and USB icons on the screen.

After loading, you will see the Acura mark on the iPod. That means you can only operate your iPod using the vehicle’s audio unit.

＊ : It may take a few minutes for the Acura mark to display on the iPod. If the display does not change, this function is not supported on your iPod model or firmware.

If the iPod indicator does not appear in the audio display, check the connections, and try to reconnect the iPod a few times.

If the audio system still does not recognize the iPod, the iPod may need to be reset. Follow the instructions that came with your iPod, or you can find reset instructions online at www.apple.com/ ipod.

The current file number and total of the selected playable files are displayed in the center display.

Pressing the AUDIO button displays the artist, album and track (file) names on the navigation screen.

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０７：１８３１ＴＬ１６０００２６８




Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is playing to select passages and change files.



or )

You can also change files with the interface dial. Press the AUDIO button to show the audio control display on the navigation screen.

Push the selector to the right side to skip forward and to the left side to skip backward.

2009 TSX

To Select a File f rom iPod Menu

You can also select a file from any on the iPod menu: playlists, artists, albums and songs, by using the interface dial. Press the AUDIO button to display the audio control display on the navigation screen.

Push up the interface selector to display the iPod menu. Turn the knob on the interface dial to select a desired list.

CONTINUED

263

０８／０２／０６２１：０７：２６３１ＴＬ１６０００２６９



Push ENTER on the selector to display the items on that list, then turn the knob on the interface dial to select a desired list. Pushing the selector up or down moves a selection to the top or bottom of the screen items. Press ENTER to set your selection.

If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either the artists or albums list, all available files on the selected list are played.

Press the AUDIO button to go back to the normal audio playing display.

Pressing the CANCEL button goes back to the previous screen, and pressing the MAP button cancels the audio control display on the screen.

To Select Repeat or Random Mode:

Push down the selector.

You can select any type of repeat and random mode on the audio menu.

Press the AUDIO button to display the audio control screen, then push down the selector to display the audio menu. Turn the knob on the interface dial to select an audio mode: repeat, album random, and track random. Press ENTER to set your selection.

264 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０７１７：３３：０３３１ＴＬ１６０００２７０


To cancel the selected mode, press

ENTER again while the highlighted mode is selected on the audio control display.


TRACK RANDOM − This feature plays all available files from the selected items in the iPod menu list

(playlists, artists, albums or songs) in random order. You will see

TRACK RANDOM on the screen.

To turn it off, have this mode highlighted and press ENTER again.

REPEAT − This feature continuously plays a file.

To turn it off, press ENTER again.

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar changes the file while keeping the repeat feature.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

265

０８／０２／０６２１：０７：４２３１ＴＬ１６０００２７１



To turn it off, have this mode highlighted and press ENTER again.

You can also select another list from the iPod menu while keeping the random function.

NOTE:

Available operating function varies on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system.

To Stop Playing Your iPod

To play the radio, press the AM, FM, or XM button. Press the DISC button to switch to the disc mode (if a disc is loaded). Press the AUX button to switch the audio mode between the

Bluetooth audio and iPod.

ALBUM RANDOM − This feature plays all available albums from the selected items in the iPod menu list

(playlists, artists, albums or songs) in random order. The files in each album are played in the recorded order. You will see ALBUM

RANDOM on the screen.

266 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０７：５０３１ＴＬ１６０００２７２



Disconnecting an iPod

You can disconnect the iPod at any time when you see ‘‘OK to display. Always make sure you see

‘‘OK to Disconnect’’ message in the iPod display before you disconnect it.

Make sure to follow the iPod’s instructions on how to disconnect the dock connector from the USB adapter cable.

＊ : The displayed message may vary on models or versions. On some models, there is no message to disconnect.

When you disconnect the iPod while it is playing, the center display and the audio screen (if selected) show

NO DATA.

If you reconnect the same iPod, the system may begin playing where it left off, depending on what mode the iPod is in when it is reconnected.

iPod Error Messages

If you see an error message in the center display, see page 268 .

2009 TSX 267

０８／０２／０６２１：０７：５４３１ＴＬ１６０００２７３

Main Menu Table Of Contents iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

If you see an error message in the center display while playing an iPod, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.

Error Message

FILE ERROR

MEDIA ERROR

Solution

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the iPod. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged.

Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.

268 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０８：０１３１ＴＬ１６０００２７４


Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

VOL/


USB INDICATOR

CATEGORY BAR

MAP BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

AUDIO CONTROL DISPLAY

(SOUND) BUTTON

CENTER DISPLAY

AUX BUTTON

SKIP BAR



INTERFACE DIAL

2009 TSX 269

０８／０２／０６２１：０８：１５３１ＴＬ１６０００２７５



To Play a USB Flash Memory

Device

This audio system can operate the audio files on a USB flash memory device with the same controls used for the in-dash disc changer. To play a USB flash memory device, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment, then press the

AUX button. The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or

ON (II) position.

The audio system reads and plays the audio files on the USB flash memory device in MP3, WMA or

AAC formats. Depending on the format, the display shows MP3,

WMA or AAC when a USB flash memory device is playing. The USB flash memory device limit is up to

700 folders or up to 65535 files.

＊ : Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this audio unit.

The recommended USB flash memory devices are 256 Mbyte or higher USB flash memory devices.

Some digital audio players may be compatible as well.

Some USB flash memory device

(such as devices with security lockout features, etc.) will not work in this audio unit.

NOTE:

Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard drive as the device or your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flash memory device using a HUB.

Do not use an extension cable to the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle.

270 2009 TSX

Do not keep the USB flash memory device in the vehicle.

Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.

We recommend backing up your data before playing a USB flash memory device.

Depending on the type and number of files, it may take some time before they begin to play.

Depending on the software the files were made with, it may not be possible to play some files, or display some text data.



０８／０２／０６２１：０８：３３３１ＴＬ１６０００２７６




MP3 files are:


32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)

16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

− Bit rate:

32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/

160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps

(MPEG1)


MPEG1 Audio Layer3

MPEG2 Audio Layer3

− Partition:

Top partition only



WMA files are:


−

32/44.1/48 kHz

Bit rate:

−

48 − 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)

Supported standards:

WMA version 7/8/9

− Partition:

Top partition only



AAC files are:


8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/

−

44.1/48 kHz

Bit rate:

48 − 320 kbps


MPEG4/AAC LC

−

MPEG2/AAC LC

Partition:

−

Top partition only

Maximum layers: 8

Even if recorded in MP3, WMA or

AAC format, a file with unsupported version cannot be played. If the system finds it, the audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to the next file.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM

(digital rights management) files cannot be played. If the system finds a DRM file, the audio unit displays

UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips to the next file.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

271

０８／０２／０６２１：０８：４０３１ＴＬ１６０００２７７



Connecting a USB Flash Memory

Device


When the USB device is connected and the USB mode is selected on the audio system, the USB indicator is shown in the center display. It also shows the folder and file numbers.

Pressing the AUDIO button displays the folder and file names, and the elapsed time in the navigation screen.

USB CONNECTOR

1.



2.

Connect the USB flash memory device to the USB adapter cable correctly and securely.

272 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０８：４８３１ＴＬ１６０００２７８




Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash memory device is playing to select passages and change files.



or )

SKIP

DIRECTION

SKIP

DIRECTION

You can also change files with the interface dial. Press the AUDIO button to show the audio control display on the navigation screen.

Push the selector knob to the right side to skip to the beginning of the next file, and to the left side to skip to the beginning of the current file.

Pushing it to the left again skips to the beginning of the previous file.

Folder Selection − To select a different folder, press and release either side of the CATEGORY bar.

Press the ▲ side to skip to the next folder, and press the ▼ side to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

273

０８／０２／０６２１：０８：５７３１ＴＬ１６０００２７９



To Select a File f rom Folder and File

Lists

You can also select a folder or file from the list by using the interface dial. Press the AUDIO button to show the audio control display on the navigation screen.

Push up the selector on the interface dial to switch the display to the folder list, then turn the knob on the interface dial to select a folder.

Press ENTER to change the display to the file list, then turn the knob on the interface dial to select a file.


To go back to the normal playing display, press the AUDIO button.

Pressing the CANCEL button goes back to the previous screen and pressing the MAP button cancels the audio mode display.

274 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０９：０８３１ＴＬ１６０００２８０




Mode:

You can select any type of repeat, random and scan modes on the audio menu screen. Press the AUDIO button to show the audio control display on the navigation screen.

Push down the selector on the interface dial to display the audio menu items.

Turn the knob on the interface dial to select a play mode: folder random, track random, folder repeat, track repeat. Press ENTER to set your selection.

To cancel the selected mode, push down the selector to display the audio menu on the audio control display. Turn the knob on the interface dial to select the

2009 TSX highlighted play mode, then press

ENTER to turn off that selected mode.

FOLDER REPEAT − This feature replays all the files in the selected folder in the order they are stored.


CATEGORY bar also turns off this feature.

TRACK REPEAT − This feature continuously plays a file. Pressing either side of the SKIP bar also turns off this feature.

FOLDER RANDOM − This feature plays the files in the selected folder in random order.

TRACK RANDOM − This feature plays all the files in random order.

CONTINUED

275

０８／０２／０６２１：０９：１４３１ＴＬ１６０００２８１



TRACK SCAN − This function samples all files in the selected folder in the order they are stored.

To activate the scan feature, push the selector to the right. You will see

TRACK SCAN on the screen. You will also see SCAN on the center display and the file number blinking.

You will get a 10 second sampling of each file in the folder. Push the selector repeatedly to get out of the scan mode. The system plays the last file sampled.

You can also select the scan feature with the SCAN button on the control panel.

Press and release the SCAN button.

Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the scan mode and play the last file sampled.

FOLDER SCAN − This function samples the first file in each folder in the order they are stored. To activate the folder scan feature, push the selector to the right repeatedly.

You will see FOLDER SCAN on the screen. You will also see SCAN on the center display and the folder number blinking. You will get a 10 second sampling of each first file in the folder(s). Push the selector repeatedly to get out of the scan mode. The system plays the last file sampled.

You can also select the folder scan feature with the SCAN button on the control panel. Press and release the

SCAN button repeatedly.

Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the folder scan mode and play the last file sampled.


CATEGORY or SKIP bar also turns off the feature.

276 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０９：２２３１ＴＬ１６０００２８２



To Stop Playing a USB Flash

Memory Device

To play the radio, press the AM, FM, or XM button. Press the DISC button to switch to the disc mode (if a disc is loaded). Press the AUX button to switch the audio mode between the

Bluetooth audio and iPod.

If you reconnect the same USB flash memory device, the system will begin playing where it left off.

Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory

Device

You can disconnect the USB flash memory device in any time even if the USB mode is selected on the audio system. Always follow the USB flash memory device’s instructions when you remove it.

When you disconnect the USB flash memory device while it is playing, the center display and the audio screen (if selected) show NO DATA.

USB Flash Memory Device Error

Messages

If you see an error message in the center display, see page 278 .

2009 TSX 277

０８／０２／０６２１：０９：２７３１ＴＬ１６０００２８３


USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

If you see an error message in the center display while playing a USB flash memory device, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.

Error Message

FILE ERROR

MEDIA ERROR

Solution

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash memory device. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged.

Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.

278 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：０９：３３３１ＴＬ１６０００２８４


Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)

TITLE BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

2009 TSX

AUX BUTTON

SKIP BAR

CONTINUED

279

０８／０２／０７１７：３３：１３３１ＴＬ１６０００２８５



Your vehicle is equipped with a

Bluetooth audio system, which allows you to listen streaming audio from your Bluetooth audio compatible phone. This function is only available on Bluetooth Audio

Compatible phones that are paired and linked to the vehicle’s

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system (see page 315 ).

Not all Bluetooth enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. You can find an approved phone by visiting www.acura.com/handsfreelink , or by calling the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876.


1-888-9-ACURA-9.

, or call

NOTE: In some states it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

280

To Play Bluetooth Audio Files

Make sure that your phone is paired and linked to the HFL.

ignition switch in the ACCESSORY

(I) or ON (II) position. When the phone is recognized, you will see the

Bluetooth Audio message and icon on the center display and the audio control display on the navigation screen (if selected), and the system begins to play.

2009 TSX

Once a device is linked, the name of the device will appear on the screen.

Pressing the TITLE button switches the center display between the

Bluetooth Audio and the device name.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be delay before the system begins to play.

To begin to play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions.

＊ : If an iPod, USB flash memory device or audio unit connected to the auxiliary input jack was selected at the last mode, you will see iPod, USB or AUX in the center display and the audio control display on the navigation screen (if selected). Push the

AUX button again to play audio files from your Bluetooth

Audio phone.

０８／０２／０６２１：０９：５４３１ＴＬ１６０００２８６



In the following conditions, the display shows ‘‘NO CONNECT’’ message after pressing the TITLE button.

The phone is not linked to the

HFL.

The phone is not turned on.

The phone is not in the vehicle.

Another HFL compatible phone, which is not compatible for

Bluetooth Audio, is already connected.

If your Bluetooth Audio compatible phone does not operate as described, make sure it is an Acura approved phone. To find out if your phone is approved, go to www.acura.com/ handsfreelink (in Canada, www.acura.

ca ), or call the HandsFreeLink client support at (888) 528-7876.



To skip a f ile

Press the side of the SKIP bar to skip forward, and press the side to skip backward to the beginning to the current file. Push the side again to skip to the previous file.

You can also operate the skip function with the interface dial on the audio control display of the navigation screen. Push the AUDIO button. Each time you push the selector on the interface dial to the right, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file. Push it to the left to skip backward to the beginning to the current file. Push the selector to the left again to skip to the previous file.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

281

０８／０２／０７１７：３３：２１３１ＴＬ１６０００２８７



To pause or resume a f ile

The resume/pause mode can stop playing a file temporarily. Push down the selector on the interface dial to display the audio menu.

Turn the knob on the interface dial to switch the setting between the resume/pause mode and the sound mode. Select RESUME/PAUSE, then press ENTER to set your selection. Each time you press

ENTER, the system switches between the resume mode and pause mode.

NOTE: The pause function may not be available on some phone devices.

To change sound settings

Press the AUDIO button, then push down the selector to display the audio menu. Turn the knob to switch the setting between the resume/ pause mode and the sound mode.

Select SOUND, then press ENTER to set your selection.

282 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１０：１２３１ＴＬ１６０００２８８



Turn the knob to select a sound mode, then press ENTER to set your selection. Turn the knob to your liking (see page 233 setting information).

for more sound

To switch to HFL mode

If you receive a call when the

Bluetooth Audio is playing, press the HFL Talk button on the steering wheel. The screen and the center display switch to the HFL mode (see page 308 ).

After ending the call, press the HFL

Back button to go back to the

Bluetooth Audio mode.

If you receive a call while the system is in the pause mode, the mode will be canceled and Bluetooth Audio will continue to play.

To turn of f the Bluetooth Audio mode

Select any other audio mode by pressing a button; FM, AM, XM or

DISC (if a disc is loaded), on the audio control panel or press the mode button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select another audio mode. If iPod or USB flash memory device is connected to the USB adapter cable or audio unit is connected to AUX jack, pressing the

AUX button also changes a mode.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

283

０８／０２／０６２１：１０：１８３１ＴＬ１６０００２８９











284 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１０：２９３１ＴＬ１６０００２９０


FM/AM Radio Reception

FM/AM Radio Frequencies

The radio can receive the complete

AM and FM bands.

Those bands cover these frequencies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz

FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

Radio stations on the AM band are assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the

FM band are assigned frequencies at least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exact frequencies. It is fairly common for stations to round-off the frequency in their advertising, so your radio could display a frequency of 100.9 even though the announcer may identify the station as ‘‘FM101.’’


How well the radio receives stations is dependent on many factors, such as the distance from the station’s transmitter, nearby large objects, and atmospheric conditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weaker as you get farther away from its transmitter. If you are listening to an

AM station, you will notice the sound volume becoming weaker, and the station drifting in and out. If you are listening to an FM station, you will see the stereo indicator flickering off and on as the signal weakens.

Eventually, the stereo indicator will go off and the sound will fade completely as you get out of range of the station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter of a station that is broadcasting on a frequency close to the frequency of the station you are listening to can also affect your radio’s reception.

You may temporarily hear both stations, or hear only the station you are close to.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

285

０８／０２／０６２１：１０：３６３１ＴＬ１６０００２９１



Radio signals, especially on the FM band, are deflected by large objects such as buildings and hills. Your radio then receives both the direct signal from the station’s transmitter, and the deflected signal. This causes the sound to distort or flutter. This is a main cause of poor radio reception in city driving.

Radio reception can be affected by atmospheric conditions such as thunderstorms, high humidity, and even sunspots. You may be able to receive a distant radio station one day and not receive it the next day because of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passing vehicles and stationary sources can cause temporary reception problems.

286 2009 TSX



０８／０２／０６２１：１０：４５３１ＴＬ１６０００２９２


Remote Audio Controls

MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON

Three controls for the audio system are mounted in the steering wheel hub. These let you control basic functions without removing your hand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volume up ( ▲ ) or down ( ▼ ). Press the top or bottom of the button, hold it until the desired volume is reached, then release it.

The MODE button changes the mode. Pressing the button repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, or disc (if a disc(s) is loaded). On models with satellite radio system, you can also select XM1 and XM2. If an iPod or a USB flash memory device is plugged into the system, you can also select AUX.

If you are listening to the radio, use the CH button to change stations.

Each time you press the top ( ＋ ) of the button, the system goes to the next preset station on the band you are listening to. Press the bottom

( − ) to go back to the previous station. If you press and hold the CH button ( ＋ ) or ( − ), the system goes into the skip (seek) mode. It stops

2009 TSX when it finds a station with a strong signal.

If you are playing a disc, the system skips to the beginning of the next track (file in MP3 or WMA format) each time you press the top ( ＋ ) of the CH button. Press the bottom

( − ) to return to the beginning of the current track/file. Press it twice to return to the previous track/file.

You will see the track/file number and the elapsed time. If the disc has text data or is compressed in MP3 or

WMA, you can also see any other information (track title, file name, folder name, etc.).

CONTINUED

287

０８／０２／０６２１：１０：５４３１ＴＬ１６０００２９３


Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use the skip function to select folders.

Press and hold the top ( ＋ ) of the

CH button until you hear a beep, to skip forward to the first file of the next folder. Press the bottom ( − ) to skip backward to the previous folder.


If you are playing a conventional CD

(without the text data and not compressed in MP3 or WMA), you can use the skip function to select discs. Press and hold the top ( ＋ ) of the CH button until you hear a beep, to skip forward to the next disc.

Press and hold the bottom ( − ) to skip backward to the previous disc.

Auxiliary Input Jack

The auxiliary input jack is inside the console compartment. The system will accept auxiliary input from standard audio accessories.

When a compatible audio unit is connected to the jack, press the AUX button to select it.

288 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１１：０１３１ＴＬ１６０００２９４


Radio Theft Protection

Your vehicle’s audio system may disable itself if it is disconnected from electrical power for any reason.

To make it work again, you must enter a specific five-digit code with the preset buttons. Because there are hundreds of number combinations possible from the five digits, making the system work without knowing the exact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a radio code card that lists your audio system’s code and serial numbers. It is best to store this card in a safe place at home. In addition, you should write the audio system’s serial number in this owner’s manual.

If you lose the card, you must obtain the code number from your dealer.

To do this, you will need the audio system’s serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead, or the radio fuse is removed, the audio system will disable itself. If this happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the frequency display (on the center display on models with navigation system) the next time you turn on the system. Use the preset buttons to enter the five-digit code. The code is on the radio code card included in your owner’s manual kit. When it is entered correctly, the radio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering the code, do not start over; complete the five-digit sequence, then enter the correct code. You have ten tries to enter the correct code. If you are unsuccessful in ten attempts, you must then leave the system on for 1 hour before trying again.

The system will retain your AM and

FM presets even if power is disconnected.

2009 TSX 289

０８／０２／０６２１：１１：１４３１ＴＬ１６０００２９５

Main Menu

Setting the Clock

Table Of Contents

On models without navigation system

To set the time, press the CLOCK button until you hear a beep. The displayed time begins to blink.

Change the hours by pressing the H

(hour) button until the numbers advance to the desired time. Change the minutes by pressing the M

(minute) button until the numbers advance to the desired time.

Press the CLOCK button again to enter the set time.

You can quickly set the time to the nearest hour. If the displayed time is before the half hour, press and hold the CLOCK button, then press the R

(reset) button to set the time back to the previous hour. If the displayed time is after the half hour, the same procedure sets the time forward to the beginning of the next hour.

On models without navigation system

CLOCK BUTTON

RESET BUTTON

(PRESET 6)

U.S. TSX and Canadian

TSX Premium are shown.

For example:

1:06 would RESET to 1:00.

1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

HOUR BUTTON

(PRESET 4)

MINUTE BUTTON

(PRESET 5)


The navigation system receives signals from the global positioning system (GPS), and the displayed time is updated automatically by the

GPS. Refer to the navigation system manual for how to adjust the time.

290 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１１：２５３１ＴＬ１６０００２９６




Adjusting the Clock with MENU

Button

You can also adjust the clock and switch the clock display between 24hours and 12-hours in the menu mode.

To adjust the clock setting:

1.

Press and release the MENU button. The display shows you the menu items.

You can adjust the clock setting with the ignition switch in the


2.

Turn the selector knob to select

‘‘CLOCK ADJUST.’’

3.

Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display changes to the clock adjusting display.

4.

Turn the selector knob to select the item which you want to adjust.

Turning the selector knob will change the selected item between the clock display setting, hours, minutes, and SET. The selected item is indicated with △ in the display.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

291

０８／０２／０６２１：１１：４１３１ＴＬ１６０００２９７

Main Menu


Table Of Contents

While setting the clock, pressing the RETURN button will go back to the previous display.

Pressing the MENU button again will cancel this setting mode.

MINUTE SETTING

5.

Turn the selector knob to change the setting between 12H and 24H.

6.

Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display will return to the clock adjusting display.

292

7.

To set the time, turn the selector knob and select the hours or the minutes, then press the knob to enter your selection. The display changes to the setting display.

8.

Turn the selector knob up or down to count the numbers up or down.

10.

To enter the clock setting, turn the selector knob to select ‘‘SET,’’ then press the knob. The display will return to the menu item display.

9.

Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display will return to the clock adjusting display.

11.

Press either the RETURN or

MENU button to go back to the normal display.

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１１：４９３１ＴＬ１６０００２９８


Security System

The security system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft.

The horn sounds and a combination of headlights, parking lights, side marker lights and taillights flashes if someone attempts to break into your vehicle or remove the audio unit.

This alarm continues for two minutes, then the system resets. To reset an alarming system before the two minutes have elapsed, unlock the driver’s door with the key or the remote transmitter.

The security system automatically sets 15 seconds after you lock the doors, hood, and trunk. For the system to activate, you must lock the doors from the outside with the key, driver’s lock tab, door lock master switch, or remote transmitter. The security system indicator on the instrument panel starts blinking immediately to show you the system is setting itself.

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Once the security system is set, opening any door (without using the key or the remote transmitter), the hood, or the trunk will cause the system to alarm. It also alarms if the audio unit is removed from the dashboard or the wiring is cut.

With the system set, you can still open the trunk with the remote transmitter without triggering the alarm. The alarm will sound if the trunk lock is forced, or the trunk is opened with the trunk release button on the driver’s door or the emergency trunk opener.

The security system will not set if the hood, trunk, or any door is not fully closed. If the system will not set, turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position, and check the indicators on the multi-information display. Close any door or the trunk indicated on the display. Check the hood visually since it is not part of the display, and shut it if necessary.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 293

０８／０２／０６２１：１１：５３３１ＴＬ１６０００２９９

Main Menu

Security System

Table Of Contents

NOTE: Use the remote transmitter to quickly check that the hood, the trunk, and all doors are closed. Push the lock button twice within 5 seconds. There should be an audible confirmation beep.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it.

294 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１２：０５３１ＴＬ１６０００３００


Compass


Compass Operation

Compass operation can be affected by driving near power lines or stations, across bridges, through tunnels, over railroad crossings, past large vehicles, or driving near large objects that can cause a magnetic disturbance. It can also be affected by accessories such as antennas and roof racks that are mounted by magnets.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the compass is self-calibrating, then the compass display is shown in the display.

Compass Calibration

COMPASS COMPASS SETTING MENU ITEMS

The compass may need to be manually calibrated after exposure to a strong magnetic field. If the compass seems to be continually showing the wrong direction and is not self-calibrating, or the compass display is blinking with the CAL indicator on, do the following.

NOTE: Do this procedure in an open area, away from buildings, power lines, and other vehicles.

1.


(II) position.

2.

Press and hold the MENU button for about 5 seconds. The display shows you the compass setting menu items.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 295

０８／０２／０６２１：１２：１７３１ＴＬ１６０００３０１


Compass

3.


‘‘CALIBRATION.’’

4.

Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display shows you ‘‘PUSH CAL

START.’’

While setting the compass, pressing the RETURN button will go back to the previous display.

Pressing the MENU button will cancel the compass setting mode.

5.

Press the selector knob (ENTER).

The compass display is blinking and the CAL indicator is shown.

6.

Drive the vehicle slowly in two complete circles.

When the calibration is successfully completed, the CAL indicator goes off and the compass display will stop blinking and show an actual heading.

The audio system is not related to the compass system. Even if the compass system is calibrating, the display returns to the normal display which you last selected.

296 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１２：３０３１ＴＬ１６０００３０２


Compass

Compass Zone Selection

In most areas, there is a variation between magnetic north and true north. Zone selection is required so the compass can compensate for this variation. To check and select the zone, do this:

1.


(II) position.

2.

Press and hold the MENU button for about 5 seconds. The display shows you the compass setting menu items.

3.


‘‘ZONE.’’ Press the selector knob

(ENTER) to enter your selection.

The display shows you the currently selected zone number.

4.

Find the zone for your area on the map (see page 298 ). If the correct zone is not shown, turn the selector knob to cycle the zone lists up or down.

If necessary, press the RETURN button to return to the previous display. Pressing the MENU button will cancel the compass setting mode.

ZONE NUMBER

5.

Once the correct zone is displayed, press the selector knob. The display then returns to normal.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 297

０８／０２／０６２１：１２：３４３１ＴＬ１６０００３０３


Compass

The audio system is not related to the compass system. Even if the compass system is in the zone setting mode, the display returns to the normal display which you last selected.

Zone Map

298 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１２：４５３１ＴＬ１６０００３０４


Cruise Control

Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for cruising on straight, open highways. It is not recommended for city driving, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Using Cruise Control

CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCEL

BUTTON

CANCEL

BUTTON

Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

SET/DECEL BUTTON

1.

Push the CRUISE button on the steering wheel. The CRUISE

MAIN indicator on the instrument panel comes on.

The cruise control system can be left on, even when it is not in use.

2.

Accelerate to the desired cruising speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

3.

Press and release the SET/

DECEL button on the steering wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel comes on to show the system is now activated.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

299

０８／０２／０６２１：１２：５６３１ＴＬ１６０００３０５

Main Menu

Cruise Control

Table Of Contents

Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up and down hills. If your speed increases going down a hill, use the brakes to slow down to the desired speed. This will cancel cruise control. To resume the set speed, press the RES/

ACCEL button. The CRUISE

CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel comes on.

When climbing a steep hill, the automatic transmission may downshift to hold the set speed.

Changing the Set Speed

You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. When you reach the desired cruising speed, release the button.

Push on the accelerator pedal.

Accelerate to the desired cruising speed, then press the SET/

DECEL button.

To increase the speed in very small amounts, tap the RES/

ACCEL button. Each time you do this, your vehicle will speed up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set cruising speed in any of these ways:

NOTE: If you need to decrease your speed quickly, use the brakes as you normally would.

Press and hold the SET/DECEL button. Release the button when you reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very small amounts, tap the SET/DECEL button repeatedly. Each time you do this, your vehicle will slow down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedal lightly with your foot. The

CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel will go out.

When the vehicle slows to the desired speed, press the SET/

DECEL button.

300 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１３：０６３１ＴＬ１６０００３０６


Cruise Control

Even with the cruise control turned on, you can still use the accelerator pedal to speed up for passing. After completing the pass, take your foot off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake or clutch pedal causes the cruise control to cancel.

Canceling Cruise Control

You can cancel cruise control in any of these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on the steering wheel.

Push the CRUISE button on the steering wheel.

Resuming the Set Speed

When you push the CANCEL button, or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the system will remember the previously set cruising speed. To return to that speed, accelerate to above 25 mph

(40 km/h), and then press and release the RES/ACCEL button. The

CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on. The vehicle will accelerate to the same cruising speed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turns the system completely off and erases the previous cruising speed.

2009 TSX 301

０８／０２／０６２１：１３：１７３１ＴＬ１６０００３０７


HomeLink Universal Transceiver

The HomeLink universal transceiver built into your vehicle can be programmed to operate up to three remotely controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.

General Inf ormation

Before programming your

HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’ or other safety and reverse stop features.

If your garage door was manufactured before April 1, 1982, you may not be able to program

HomeLink to operate it. These units do not have safety features that cause the motor to stop and reverse it if an obstacle is detected during closing, increasing the risk of injury.

Do not use HomeLink with any

302 garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features.

Units manufactured between April 1,

1982 and January 1, 1993 may be equipped with safety stop and reverse features. If your unit does not have an external entrapment protection system, an easy test to confirm the function and performance of the safety stop and reverse feature is to lay a 2 × 4 under the closing door. The door should stop and reverse upon contacting the piece of wood.

As an additional safety feature, garage door openers manufactured after January 1, 1993 are required to have external entrapment protection systems, such as an electronic eye, which detect an object obstructing the door.

Important Saf ety Precautions

Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have this information, contact the manufacturer of the equipment.

Before programming HomeLink to a garage door or gate opener, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential injury or damage.

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage.

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１３：３０３１ＴＬ１６０００３０８



Training HomeLink

Bef ore you begin − If you just received your vehicle and have not trained any of the buttons in

HomeLink before, you should erase any previously learned codes before training the first button. To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons on the HomeLink transceiver for about 10 − 20 seconds, until the red indicator flashes.

Release the buttons, then proceed to step 1.

If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.

1.

Hold the end of the garage door opener remote transmitter 1 to 3 inches from HomeLink. Make sure you are not blocking your view of the red indicator in

HomeLink.

RED INDICATOR

2.

Press and hold the remote transmitter button and one of the

HomeLink buttons at the same time.

If the red indicator in HomeLink begins to flash slowly at first, then rapidly, release both buttons, and go to step 4.

If the red indicator in HomeLink continues to flash slowly (does not flash rapidly), your remote

2009 TSX transmitter may stop transmitting after a short time.

Go to step 3.

3.

Press and hold the remote transmitter button and one of the

HomeLink buttons at the same time. While continuing to hold the

HomeLink button, press and release the remote transmitter button every 2 seconds.

If the red indicator in HomeLink begins to flash slowly at first, then rapidly, release both buttons, and go to step 4.

If the red indicator in HomeLink continues to flash slowly (does not begin to flash rapidly), repeat steps 1 thru 3.

CONTINUED

303

０８／０２／０６２１：１３：４１３１ＴＬ１６０００３０９



4.

Test the HomeLink button by pushing it for about 1 second.

If the button works, programming is complete.

If the button does not work go to step 5.

5.

Push and hold the HomeLink button and watch the red indicator on HomeLink.

If the indicator stays on, press the HomeLink button again; the remotely controlled device should operate.

If the indicator flashes rapidly for 2 seconds then stays on, you have a rolling code transmitter: go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling

Code System.’’

6.

Repeat these steps to train the other two HomeLink buttons to operate any other compatible remotely controlled devices around your home (lighting, automatic gate, security system, etc.).

Training With a Rolling Code

System

For security purposes, newer garage door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’ or variable code. Information from the remote control and the garage door opener is needed before

HomeLink can operate the garage door opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’ procedure trains HomeLink to the proper garage door opener code.

The following procedure synchronizes HomeLink to the garage door opener so it sends and receives the correct codes.

1.

Make sure you have properly completed the ‘‘Training

HomeLink’’ procedure.

304 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１３：５３３１ＴＬ１６０００３１０



2.

Find the ‘‘learn’’ button on your garage door opener unit. The location will vary, depending on the manufacturer.

LEARN BUTTON

3.

Press the learn button on the garage door opener unit until the indicator next to the button comes on. The indicator may blink, or come on and stay on. You then have approximately 30 seconds to complete the following steps.

4.

Press and hold the button on

HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

5.

Press the HomeLink button again for about 1 second. It should operate the garage door.

Erasing Codes

To erase the codes stored in all three buttons, press and hold the two outside buttons until the red indicator begins to flash, then release the buttons.

You should erase all three codes before selling the vehicle.

Retraining a Button

If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory.

You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:

1.

Press and hold the HomeLink button to be trained until the

HomeLink indicator begins to flash slowly.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

305

０８／０２／０６２１：１４：０３３１ＴＬ１６０００３１１



If a rolling code transmitter was previously programmed, the indicator will flash rapidly for 2 seconds, and then stay on for about 23 seconds.

If a standard transmitter was programmed, the indicator will stay on for about 25 seconds.

2.

Once the HomeLink indicator begins to flash slowly, continue to hold the HomeLink button, and follow steps 2 thru 5 under

‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page

303 ).

Customer Assistance

If you have problems with training the HomeLink Universal Transceiver, or would like information on home products that can be operated by

HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On the Internet, go to www.homelink.com.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.









306 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１４：１４３１ＴＬ１６０００３１２


Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Your vehicle is equipped with

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL).

HFL uses Bluetooth technology to link your cell phone to your vehicle.

With HFL, you can place and receive calls through your vehicle’s audio system, without the distraction of handling your cell phone. To use this feature, you need a Bluetoothcompatible cell phone with the

Hands Free Profile. For more information, and a list of compatible cell phones, visit www.acura.com/ handsfreelink , or call 1-888-528-7876.


, or call

1-888-9-ACURA-9. The HFL is available in English on U.S. models, and in both English and French on

Canadian models. To change the language, see page 334 .

Here are the main features of the

HFL. Instructions for using the HFL begin on page 319 .

Voice Control

HFL recognizes simple voice commands, such as phone numbers and names. It uses these commands to automatically dial, receive, and store numbers. For more information on voice control, see

Using Voice Control on page 311 .

Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Bluetooth is the wireless technology that links your phone to the HFL.

The HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which means the maximum range between your phone and vehicle is

30 feet (10 meters).

To use the HFL, your phone must have approved Bluetooth capability along with the Hands Free Profile.

This type of phone is available through many phone makers and cellular carriers. You can also find an approved phone by visiting

2009 TSX www.acura.com/handsfreelink , or by calling the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876.


, or call

1-888-9-ACURA-9.

The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Honda

Motor Co., Ltd. is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

With a linked phone, the HFL allows you to send and receive calls in your vehicle without holding the phone.

307

０８／０２／０６２１：１４：２９３１ＴＬ１６０００３１３



Phonebook

The HFL can store up to 50 names and phone numbers in its phonebook.

With a linked phone, you can then automatically dial any name or number in the phonebook.


Your vehicle’s HFL system has the cellular phonebook import function.

This allows you to import your cellular phonebook to the HFL.

Using the navigation system, you can make a call directly and store a desired number in the HFL from the list shown on the navigation display.

For more information on how to import the phonebook or to make a call, see page 319 .

On all models

You can store the desired number to the HFL directly from your cellphone using the receive contact function in the HFL.

Microphone

The HFL microphone is on the ceiling, between the front spotlights.

The microphone is shared with the navigation system.

Audio System

When the HFL is in use, the sound comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers. If the audio system is in use while operating either of the HFL buttons or making a call, the HFL over-rides the audio system. To change the volume level, use the audio system volume knob, or the steering wheel volume controls.

HFL Buttons

HFL TALK BUTTON

HFL BACK BUTTON

To operate the HFL, use the HFL

Talk and Back buttons on the left side of the steering wheel.

The HFL buttons are used as follows:

HFL Talk: This button is used before you give a command, to answer incoming calls, and to confirm system information.

308 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１４：４２３１ＴＬ１６０００３１４



HFL TALK BUTTON

HFL BACK

BUTTON

On vehicle without navigation system

Press and release the button, then wait for a beep before giving a command.

HFL Back: This button is used to end a call, go back to the previous voice control command, and to cancel an operation.

Multi-Inf ormation Display

SIGNAL

STRENGTH

HFL

MODE

BATTERY

LEVEL STATUS

ROAM STATUS PHONE DIALING

When you are operating the HFL, or when you manually select HFL on the multi-information display, you will see this information on the screen:

Signal Strength ＊ − Indicates the network signal strength of the current phone. Five bars equals full strength.

ROAM Status ＊ − phone is roaming.

Indicates your

Battery Level Status ＊ − Indicates the power currently remaining in your phone’s battery. Five bars equals full battery strength.

HFL Mode − Indicates when you are dialing and receiving calls.

Phone Dialing − Indicates the number you entered or the number of the incoming call.

＊ : Some phones do not send this information to the HFL.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

309

０８／０２／０６２１：１４：５２３１ＴＬ１６０００３１５



On models with navigation system ‘‘ ’’ indicator will be displayed on the center display if your phone is linked to the Bluetooth compatible cell phone.

BLUETOOTH INDICATOR

When you are operating the HFL, dialing or receiving calls with the audio system in use, you will see the above screen on the navigation display.

You will also see ‘‘HANDS FREE

LINK’’ on the center display.


You will see ‘‘HANDS FREE LINK’’ and the ‘‘ ’’ indicator on the audio display when you operating the

HFL.

310 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１５：０６３１ＴＬ１６０００３１６


How to Use the HFL

The HFL is operated by the HFL

Talk and Back buttons on the left side of the steering wheel. The next few pages provide instructions for all basic features of the HFL.

NOTE: All phones may not operate identically, and some may cause inconsistent operation of the HFL.

Using Voice Control

Here are some guidelines for using voice control:

Adjust the airflow from both the dashboard and side vents so they do not blow against the microphone on the ceiling.

Close the windows and the moonroof.

To enter a command, press and release the Talk button. Then, after the beep, say your command in a clear, natural tone.

Lower the A/C fan speed during voice recognition operation.

2009 TSX


After pressing the Talk button, wait for the beep, then give a voice command.

Give a voice command in a clear natural speaking voice without pausing between words or numbers. If the system cannot recognize your command because of the background noise, speak louder.

If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the system may not interpret your voice commands correctly.

If the HFL does not recognize a command, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’

If it doesn’t recognize the command a second time, its response is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If it doesn’t recognize the command a third time, it plays the Help prompt.

CONTINUED

311

０８／０２／０６２１：１５：１５３１ＴＬ１６０００３１７



To hear a list of available options at any time, press the Talk button, wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Hands free help.’’

Many commands can be spoken together. For example, you can say, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’

To enter a string of numbers in a

Call or Dial command, you can say them all at once, or you can separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,

10, and 11.

To skip a voice prompt, press the

Talk button while the HFL is speaking. The HFL will then begin listening for your next command.

To go back one step in a command process, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or press the Back button.

If nothing is said while the HFL is listening for a command, the HFL will time out and stop its voice recognition. The next time you press the Talk button, the HFL begins listening from the point at which it timed out.

To end a command sequence at any time, press and hold the Back button, or press and release the

Talk button, wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Cancel.’’ The next time you press the Talk button, the HFL begins from its main menu.

When you finish a command sequence, the HFL goes back to its main menu. For example, when you store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ the

HFL response is, ‘‘Eric has been stored.’’ The next time you press the Talk button, you will be at the main menu.

312 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１５：２６３１ＴＬ１６０００３１８



Setting Up the System

The voice of the HFL can be set to male or female (U.S. models only).

Also, the incoming notification can be set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no notification.

To set up the system, do this:

1.

Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The

HFL response is, ‘‘System options are setup and clear.’’

2.


After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ The

HFL response is ‘‘Would you like male or female prompts?’’

3.


After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or

‘‘Female,’’ depending on the system voice you want. The HFL response is, ‘‘Male (Female) prompts have been selected.

Would you like an audible notification of an incoming call?’’

4.


If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, the

HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like the notification to be a ring tone or prompt?’’ If you say ‘‘No’’ after the beep, the HFL returns to its main menu. Saying ‘‘No’’ will result in no ring tone or prompt playback during an incoming call. The audio system will still mute, and a message will be displayed.

5.


After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or

‘‘Prompt.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘A ring tone will be used’’ or ‘‘An incoming call prompt will be used.’’

If you choose ‘‘Ring tone,’’ you will hear a ring tone through the audio speakers to announce an incoming call. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ you will hear this message to announce an incoming call: ‘‘You have an incoming call.’’

6.

The HFL response continues ‘‘A security option is available to lock the HFL system. Each time the vehicle is turned on, a passcode would be required to use this system. Would you like this security option turned on?’’ If you say ‘‘Yes,’’ you can set your passcode. Refer to the setting procedure in the next column.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

313

０８／０２／０６２１：１５：３９３１ＴＬ１６０００３１９



Setting Your Passcode

The HFL will accept a numeric, fourdigit passcode that you can use for security purposes.

To set your passcode, do this:

1.

Follow the system setup procedure as described previously.

2.


After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’

3.

The HFL response is ‘‘What is the four-digit number you would like to set as your passcode?’’

4.


After the beep, say the four-digit passcode you want to use. For example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’

5.


After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The

HFL response is ‘‘Security is on.

Each time the vehicle is turned on, the passcode will be required to use the system. The system setup is complete. Returning to the main menu.’’

6.


If you say ‘‘No.’’ after the beep, the

HFL response is ‘‘Security will not be used. The system setup is complete.’’

To enter your passcode, do this;

Once a passcode is set, you can lock the HFL so it only operates after the passcode is entered.

1.

The HFL will prompt you for your passcode each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position and you press the Talk button. You will only be asked for the passcode once per ignition

314 2009 TSX cycle. If the passcode is set, its response is ‘‘The system is locked.

What is the four-digit passcode?’’

2.


After the beep, say your four-digit passcode. For example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3,

4.’’

3.

If the passcode is correct, the HFL response is ‘‘Main menu.’’ If the passcode is not correct, the HFL response is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4 is incorrect.

Please try again.’’ Go back to the step 2.

If you forget your passcode and you cannot activate the HFL, consult your dealer to cancel the passcode.

０８／０２／０６２１：１５：５０３１ＴＬ１６０００３２０



Pairing Your Phone

Your Bluetooth compatible phone with HandsFree Profile must be paired to the HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.

To confirm that your phone is

Bluetooth compatible, visit www.

acura.com/handsfreelink , or call 1-888-

528-7876. In Canada, visit www.acura.

ca , or call 1-888-9-ACURA-9. Your phone retailer should also be able to confirm that your phone is Bluetooth compatible.

NOTE:

HFL does not allow you to pair your phone if the vehicle is moving.

For pairing, your phone must be in its Discovery mode.

Up to six phones can be paired to the HFL.

The following procedure works for most phones. If you cannot pair your phone to the HFL with this procedure, refer to your phone’s operating manual, visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink , call the Hands Free Link consumer support at (888) 528-7876, or call your phone retailer. In Canada, visit www.acura.ca

ACURA-9.

or call (888) 9-

During the pairing process, turn off any previously paired phones before pairing a new phone.

1.

With your phone on and the ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or

ON (II) position, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Phone setup options are status, pair, edit, delete, and list.’’

2.


After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ The

HFL response is ‘‘The pairing process requires operation of your mobile phone. For safety, only perform this function while the vehicle is stopped. State a fourdigit code for pairing. Note this code. It will be requested by the phone.’’

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 315

０８／０２／０６２１：１６：０１３１ＴＬ１６０００３２１



3.


After the beep, say the four-digit code you want to use. For example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’

4.



HFL response is ‘‘HFL is now searching for a Bluetooth phone.

Make sure the phone you are trying to pair is in discovery mode.’’

NOTE: Steps 5 and 6 show a common way to get your phone into its Discovery mode. If these steps do not work on your phone, refer to the phone’s operating manual.

5.

Follow the prompts on your phone to get it into its Discovery mode.

The phone will search for the HFL.

When it comes up, select

HandsFreeLink from the list of options displayed on your phone.

6.

When asked by the phone, enter the four-digit code from step 3 into your phone. The HFL response is

‘‘A new phone has been found.

What would you like to name this phone?’’

7.


After the beep, say the name you want to use. For example, say

‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Eric’s phone has been successfully paired. Returning to the main menu.’’

8.

If you want to pair another phone, repeat steps 1 through 7.

On U.S. vehicles with navigation system

Once the pairing process is completed, AcuraLink may display a connection confirmation screen. This screen is used to create a data connection between your cell phone and the AcuraLink system. You can choose to set up the data connection now, or do it later. If you want to do it now, exit the HFL menu by pressing the HFL Back button one or more times.

316 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１６：１２３１ＴＬ１６０００３２２



To rename a paired phone, do this:

1.


After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’

The HFL response is ‘‘Phone setup options are status, pair, edit, delete, and list.’’

2.


After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The

HFL response is ‘‘Which phone would you like to edit?’’

3.


After the beep, say the name of the phone you want to rename.

For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’

The HFL response is ‘‘What is the new name for Eric’s phone?’’

4.


After the beep, say the new name of the phone. For example, say

‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘The name has been changed.

Returning to the main menu.’’

To delete a paired phone, do this:

1.



The HFL response is, ‘‘Phone setup options are status, pair, edit, delete, and list.’’

2.


After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The

HFL response is, ‘‘Which phone would you like to delete?’’

3.


After the beep, say the name of the phone you want to delete. For example say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The

HFL response is ‘‘Would you like to delete Eric’s phone?’’

4.



HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to delete Eric’s phone. Say OK to continue, otherwise, say Go back, or Cancel.’’

5.


If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, the

HFL response is ‘‘The phone has been deleted. Returning to the main menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’ or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not be deleted.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 317

０８／０２／０６２１：１６：２１３１ＴＬ１６０００３２３



To list all paired phones, do this:

1.



The HFL response is ‘‘Phone setup options are status, pair, edit, delete, and list.’’

2.


After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The

HFL responds by listing the name of each paired phone. When all phones paired to the system have been read, the HFL response is

‘‘The entire list has been read.


To find out the status of the phone being used, do this:

1.



The HFL response is, ‘‘Phone setup options are status, pair, edit, delete, and list.’’

2.


After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ An example of the HFL response is,

‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Battery strength is three bars. Signal strength is five bars, and the phone is roaming. Returning to the main menu.’’

To change from the currently linked phone to another paired phone, do this:

1.


After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’

The HFL response is ‘‘Searching for the next phone.’’ The HFL then disconnects the linked phone and searches for another paired phone. If the HFL finds it, an example of the HFL response is,

‘‘Paul’s phone is linked.’’ If no other phones are found, the first phone remains linked.

318 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１６：３２３１ＴＬ１６０００３２４



Making a Call

You can make calls using any phone number, or by using a name in the

HFL phonebook. You can also redial the last number called. During a call, the HFL allows you to talk up to 30 minutes after you remove the key from the ignition switch. Continuing a call without running the engine may discharge and weaken the vehicle’s battery.

To make a call using a phone number, do this:

1.


ON (II) position, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘What name or number would you like to call/ dial?’’

2.


After the beep, say the number you want to call. For example, say

‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, or continue to add numbers.’’


You can also make a call directly from the list shown on the navigation display.

3.


After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’

The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or

‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob, or the steering wheel volume controls.

4.

To end the call, press the Back button.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

319

０８／０２／０６２１：１６：４４３１ＴＬ１６０００３２５



To make a call using a name in the HFL phonebook, do this:

1.


ON (II) position, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘What name or number would you like to call/ dial?’’

2.


After the beep, say the name you want to call. For example, say

‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is

‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’

3.



HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or

‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob, or the steering wheel volume controls.

4.

To end the call, press the Back button.

To redial the last number called by the phone, press and release the

Talk button. After the beep, say

‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,

‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob, or the steering wheel volume controls.

320 2009 TSX

Sending Numbers or Names

During a Call

The HFL allows you to send numbers or names during a call. This is useful when you call a menudriven phone system. You can also program account numbers into the

HFL phonebook for easy retrieval during menu-driven calls.

To send a number during a call, do this:

1.


After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The

HFL response is, ‘‘What name or number would you like to send?’’

2.


After the beep, say the number you want to send. For example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFL response is

‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue to add numbers.’’

NOTE: To send a pound ( ＃ ), say

‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’

０８／０２／０６２１：１６：５７３１ＴＬ１６０００３２６



3.


After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The dial tones will be sent, and the call will continue.

To send a name during a call, do this:

1.


After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The

HFL response is, ‘‘What name or number would you like to send?’’

2.


After the beep, say the name you want to send. For example, say

‘‘Account number.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Would you like to send account number?’’

3.


After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The dial tones will be sent, and the call will continue.

Receiving a Call

If you receive a call when you are not on the phone, the HFL interrupts the audio system (if it is on), and plays the incoming call notification, if activated. To answer the call, press the Talk button and begin speaking.

If you don’t want to answer the call, press the Back button.

If your phone has Call Waiting, and you receive a call when you are on the phone, press and release the

Talk button to answer it. When you do this, the original call is placed on hold. To return to the original call, press the Talk button again. If you don’t want to answer the new call, disregard it, and continue with your original call. If you want to hang up the original call and answer the new call, press the Back button.

Transf erring a Call

During a call, you can transfer it from the HFL to your phone, or from your phone to the HFL.

To transfer a call from the HFL to your phone, do this:


After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The audio switches from the HFL to the phone.

To transfer a call from your phone to the

HFL, do this:


After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The audio switches from your phone to the HFL.

2009 TSX 321

０８／０２／０６２１：１７：０９３１ＴＬ１６０００３２７



Muting a Call

During a call, you can mute or unmute your voice to the person you are talking to.

To mute your voice, do this:

1.


After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The

HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’

To unmute your voice, do this:

2.


After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The

HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is canceled.’’

Setting up the Phonebook

The HFL phonebook can store up to

50 names with their associated numbers. These can be any types of numbers. For example, you can store a phone number and use it to make a call, or you can store an account number and use it during a call to a menu-driven phone system.

To add a name, do this:

1.


After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’

The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, receive contact, and list.’’

2.


After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ The

HFL response is, ‘‘What name would you like to store?’’

3.


After the beep, say the name you would like to store. For example, say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’

The HFL response is ‘‘What is the number for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is the number for account number?’’

4.


After the beep, say the number.

For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’

The HFL response is ‘‘123 456

7891. Say enter, or continue to add numbers.’’

5.


After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The

HFL response is ‘‘Eric (or account number) has been stored.


322 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１７：２５３１ＴＬ１６０００３２８



To edit the number of a name, do this:

1.




2.


After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The

HFL response is, ‘‘What name would you like to edit?’’

3.


After the beep, say the name you would like to edit. For example, say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is

‘‘What is the new number for

Eric?’’

4.


After the beep, say the new number for Eric. For example, say

‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘987 654 3219. Say enter, or continue to add numbers.’’

5.


After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The

HFL response is ‘‘The number has been changed. Returning to the main menu.’’

To delete a name, do this:

1.




2.


After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The

HFL response is, ‘‘What name would you like to delete?’’

3.


After the beep, say the name you would like to delete. For example, say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is

‘‘Would you like to delete Eric?’’

4.



HFL response is, ‘‘The name has been deleted. Returning to the main menu.’’

To list all names in the phonebook, do this:

1.



The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit, receive contact, and list.’’

2.



HFL responds by listing the names in the phonebook in the order which they were stored.

When the end of the list is reached, the HFL response is,

‘‘The entire list has been read.


CONTINUED

2009 TSX 323

０８／０２／０６２１：１７：３６３１ＴＬ１６０００３２９



To call a name from the phonebook list, do this:

1.




2.



HFL responds by listing the names in the phonebook. When it says the name you want to call, for example, Eric, press the Talk button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ The

HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’

3.



HFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob, or the steering wheel volume controls.

Storing a Phone Number Directly f rom Your Phone

You can store the desired number to the HFL phonebook directly from your mobile phone.

NOTE: Your phone may not have this capability. Visit www.acura.com/ handsfreelink or call the

HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit www.acura.ca

, or call 1-888-9-ACURA-

9. You can see your phone’s owner’s manual for information.

To store a phone number from your phone:

1.

With your phone on and the ignition switch in the

ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, press and release the

Talk button. After the beep, say

‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, receive contact and list.’’

324 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１７：４５３１ＴＬ１６０００３３０



2.


After the beep, say ‘‘Receive contact.’’ The HFL response is,

‘‘The receive process requires operation of your Bluetooth device.

For safety, only perform this function while the vehicle is stopped. HFL is now waiting to receive a contact from a Bluetooth device.’’

3.

Select a desired number from the list on your phone, and transmit/ send (individual steps will vary for each type of phone, refer to your phone’s owner’s manual) via

Bluetooth. The HFL response is

‘‘One phone number has been received for this contact. What name would you like to store for the mobile number? To discard this number, say ‘Discard.’ ’’

4.


After the beep, say the name you would like to store. For example, say ‘‘Neil at work.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘Neil at work will be stored. Is this correct?’’

5.


After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or

‘‘No.’’ If you say ‘‘Yes,’’ the HFL response is, ‘‘Neil at work has been stored. Would you like HFL to receive another contact?’’ Go to step 6.

If you say ‘‘No,’’ the HFL response is ‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’

6.

If you want to continue to store any other numbers, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘HFL is now waiting to receive a contact from a

Bluetooth device.’’

7.

Select a desired number from the list on your phone, and transmit/ send (individual steps will vary for each type of phone, refer to your phone’s owner’s manual) via

Bluetooth. The HFL response is

‘‘One phone number has been received for this contact. What name would you like to store for the mobile number? To discard this number, say ‘Discard.’ ’’

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

325

０８／０２／０６２１：１７：５８３１ＴＬ１６０００３３１



8.


After the beep, say the name you would like to store. For example, say ‘‘Susan at work.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘Susan at work will be stored. Is this correct?’’

9.


After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or

‘‘No.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Susan at work has been stored. Would you like HFL to receive another contact?’’

10.

If you do not want to continue to store any other numbers, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘No.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’

Cellular Phonebook Options


The cellular phonebook option allows you to store up to 1,000 names and 10,000 phone numbers in the phonebook of Bluetooth

HandsFreeLink from your cellular phonebook. The maximum names and numbers to be stored varies on the data size. With the HFL, you can then automatically dial any name or number in the phonebook.

NOTE: Your phone may not have this capability. Visit www.acura.com/ handsfreelink or call the

HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit www.acura.ca

, or call 1-888-9-ACURA-

9. You can see your phone’s owner’s manual for information.

To use the cellular phonebook with the HFL, say or select ‘‘Cellular

Phonebook’’ from the Information screen. The navigation display will change as shown above.

If any phonebook is not stored and your phone is not linked to the HFL,

Cellular Phonebook is grayed out.

326 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１８：０９３１ＴＬ１６０００３３２



PIN Number. This option allows you to add, change, or remove a PIN number for any phonebook that has been imported.

Import Cellular Phonebook: This option allows you to store the phonebook of your cellular phone in the HFL. When you link your phone to the HFL and select this option, the system will start importing and loading the phonebook.

Search Imported Phonebook: This option allows you to search the phone numbers stored in the HFL.

When you enter keyword for a person’s name, such as the first name or last name, the system will find the number you want and let you make calls.

Delete Imported Phonebook: This option allows you to delete the stored phonebook from the HFL. When you link your phone to the HFL and select this option, the system will automatically delete the phonebook of the linked phone from the HFL

(see page 330 ).

NOTE: Before selling or discarding your vehicle, make sure to delete the imported phonebook data.

To import the cellular phonebook

You can import the phonebook of your cellular phone in the HFL. Link your phone to the HFL and select

‘‘Import Cellular Phonebook’’ from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen. When the message ‘‘The import was successful.’’ is displayed, push in on the Interface Dial to select ‘‘OK.’’

Example

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

327

０８／０２／０６２１：１８：２０３１ＴＬ１６０００３３３



NOTE:

HFL does not allow you to pair your phone if the vehicle is moving.

Up to six phones can be paired to the HFL.

For information on linking to the

HFL, see page 315 .

To search the imported phonebook

PIN ICON

Select a phonebook from the displayed list. If the phonebook you select has a PIN icon, you will need the 4-digit PIN number to access the phonebook. The following screen will appear.

IMPORTED

PHONEBOOK

IMPORTED DATE

You can search the stored number by entering keywords to make calls by using the HFL.

Select ‘‘Search Imported Phonebook’’ from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.

The display will change as shown above.

Enter the PIN number to access the phonebook. You cannot access a PIN protected phonebook if you do not use the correct PIN number.

328 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１８：３４３１ＴＬ１６０００３３４


Enter the keyword for a person’s name, such as the first name or last name, using the Interface Dial. If the system does not find an exact match, say or select ‘‘LIST’’ when you finish entering the keyword.

The system will display a list of person’s names, with the closest match to the name you entered at the top of the list.

Select the number (1 − 6) of the desired person from the list.

Up to three category icons are displayed in the right side of the list.

These category icons indicate how many numbers are stored for the person. If a name has more than three category icons, ‘‘ … ’’ is displayed.

The following category icons will appear:

Preference

Home

Mobile

2009 TSX


Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Voice

Other

CONTINUED

329

０８／０２／０６２１：１８：４６３１ＴＬ１６０００３３５



To store a number in the Bluetooth

HandsFreeLink

To delete the imported phonebook

After selecting a person, the system will display a list of the person’s phone numbers.

Select the desired number from the list to make a call.

Say or select ‘‘STORE IN

HandsFreeLink’’ from the ‘‘Select a number to call’’ screen. The screen shown above will appear.

Select the desired number from the list to store it in the HFL.

You can delete the stored phonebook from the HFL.

Link your phone to the HFL and select ‘‘Delete Imported Phonebook’’ from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.

The display will change as shown above.

330 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１８：５７３１ＴＬ１６０００３３６


Select a phonebook from the displayed list. If the phonebook you select has a PIN icon, you will need the 4-digit PIN number to access the phonebook. The following screen will appear.

After you enter the correct PIN number, or if the phonebook you select is not PIN protected, the following screen appears.


To add, change, or remove a PIN number from any phonebook

Enter the PIN number to access the phonebook. You cannot access a PIN protected phonebook if you do not use the correct PIN number.

Say or select ‘‘Yes’’, and the message

‘‘The imported phonebook has been deleted.’’ will appear. Select ‘‘OK’’ to complete the deletion.

You can add, change or remove a

PIN number from any phonebook.

Select ‘‘PIN Number’’ from the

‘‘Select an Option’’ screen. The display will change as shown above.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

331

０８／０２／０６２１：１９：０６３１ＴＬ１６０００３３７



To add a PIN number To change a PIN number

1.

Select the phonebook you wish to add the PIN number to. The phonebook you select cannot already have a PIN icon. The display will change as shown above.

2.

Enter the 4-digit PIN number. You will be asked to re-enter the PIN to verify.

1.

Select the phonebook that you wish to change the PIN number for. The display will change as shown above.

332 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１９：１７３１ＴＬ１６０００３３８



2.

Enter your current PIN number.

3.

Enter your new 4-digit PIN number. You will be asked to reenter the PIN to verify.

Clearing the System

This operation clears the HFL of your passcode, your paired phones, all names in the HFL phonebook, and all imported phonebooks.

Clearing is recommended before you sell your vehicle.

To clear the system, do this:

1.


After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The

HFL response is, ‘‘System options are setup and clear.’’

2.


After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ The

HFL response is, ‘‘This process will clear all paired phones, clear all entries in the phonebook, clear the passcode, and restore the defaults in the system setup. Is this what you would like to do?’’

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

333

０８／０２／０６２１：１９：２７３１ＴＬ１６０００３３９



3.



HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to clear all paired phones, all phonebook entries, the passcode, and restore the defaults in the system setup. Say OK to proceed, otherwise say go back or cancel.’’

4.


After the beep, say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed, or say ‘‘Go back’’ or

‘‘Cancel.’’

5.

If you said ‘‘OK,’’ the HFL response is, ‘‘Please wait while the system is cleared.’’ This may take up to 2 minutes to complete, then the HFL response is, ‘‘The system has been cleared. Returning to the main menu.’’

Changing Language

Canadian models only

To change from English to French, do this:

1.


After the beep, say ‘‘Change language.’’ The HFL response is

‘‘English or French?’’

2.


After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’ The

HFL response is ‘‘Vous avez selectionne Français. Les noms enregistres en mode Anglais ne seront pas accessible en mode

Français. Voulez-vous continuer?

You have selected French. Name tags that were stored while in

English mode will not be accessible in French mode. Would you like to continue? ’’

3.


After the beep, say ‘‘Oui’’ or ‘‘Yes.’’

If there are no paired phones without French name tags, the

HFL response is ‘‘Venillez attendre que le systeme change de langue. Please wait while the language is changed.’’ ‘‘La langue a ete changee. Retour au menu principal.’’

NOTE: If there are paired phones without French name tags, the following prompts will continue.

If there are paired phones without

French name tags, the HFL response is ‘‘Pour que le système identifie les téléphones qui ont été jumelés dans une autre langue, les noms des téléphones doivent être réenregistrés.’’

334 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１９：３６３１ＴＬ１６０００３４０



4.

The HFL response is, for example,

‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour

＜ Paul’s phone ＞ ?’’ Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’

The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour ＜ Pat’s phone ＞ ?’’ Press and release the

Talk button. Say ‘‘Téléphone de

Pat.’’ After all paired phones missing a French name tag are rerecorded, the HFL will prompt,

‘‘Retour au menu principal.’’

To change from French to English, do this:

1.


After the beep, say ‘‘Changer

Langue.’’ The HFL response is,

‘‘Anglais ou Français?’’

2.


After the beep, say ‘‘Anglais.’’ The

HFL response is, ‘‘You have selected English. Name tags that were stored while in French mode will not be accessible in English mode. Would you like to continue?

Vous avez selectionne Anglais. Les noms enregistres en mode

Français ne seront pas accessible en mode Anglais. Voulez-vous contnuez?’’

3.


After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ or ‘‘Oui.’’

If there are no paired phones without English name tags, the

HFL response is ‘‘Please wait while the language is changed.

Venillez attendre que le systeme change de langue.’’ ‘‘The language has been changed. Returning to the main menu.’’

NOTE: If there are paired phones without English name tags, the following prompts will continue.

If there are paired phones without

English name tags, the HFL response is ‘‘The language has been changed. For the system to identify phones that were paired while in another language, the phone names need to be rerecorded.’’

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

335

０８／０２／０６２１：１９：４５３１ＴＬ１６０００３４１



4.

The HFL says, for example, ‘‘What is the English name for

＜ Téléphone de Paul ＞ ?’’ Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ The

HFL response is ‘‘What is the

English name for ＜ Téléphone de

Pat ＞ ?’’ Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’s phone.’’ After all paired phones missing an English name tag are re-recorded, the HFL will say

‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’

HFL Limitations

While you are listening to the

Bluetooth audio, pause the system to operate the HFL.

U.S. models only

In addition, you cannot use the HFL while using AcuraLink.









336 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：１９：５５３１ＴＬ１６０００３４２


AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

U.S. TSX with navigation system

AcuraLink enhances your ownership experience by providing a direct communication link between your vehicle and the Acura Server.

Working through the XM radio satellite, AcuraLink works in conjunction with the navigation system, Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

(HFL), and audio system in your vehicle. It displays and receives several kinds of messages, including:

Operating tips and information on your vehicle’s features.

Important recall and safety information.

Maintenance information to keep your vehicle in top condition.

Diagnostic information to provide information about any problems with your vehicle.

Interf ace Dial

Most AcuraLink functions are controlled by the interface dial. The interface dial has two parts, a knob and a selector.

CANCEL BUTTON ENTER

KNOB

INTERFACE DIAL SELECTOR

The knob turns left and right. Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen.

The selector can be pushed left, right, up, down, and in. Use the selector to scroll through lists, to select menus, and to highlight menu items. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector

(ENTER) to go to that selection.

2009 TSX 337

０８／０２／０６２１：２０：０６３１ＴＬ１６０００３４３



Reading Messages

If you have new messages, an envelope icon appears in the top right corner of the navigation screen.

To view previously read messages:

To open a message:

Press ENTER on the interface selector, then select New Message from the navigation system map menu.

A list of all messages will be shown.

New Messages will be at the top.

Select the message you want to read by pressing ENTER.

A red exclamation will be marked on an envelope icon with an important message.

Press the INFO button. The information screen will be shown.

338 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２０：１８３１ＴＬ１６０００３４４


Select ‘‘Messages’’, then select a message category by pressing

ENTER. Select the message you want to read and press ENTER.


Unread messages have a closed envelope icon next to them. The icon disappears when it has already been read.

NOTE: Only Diagnostic Info messages appear on the navigation screen while driving. They indicate if your vehicle has a problem that may need immediate attention (see page

348 ).

After purchasing your vehicle, messages may not appear immediately.

Your dealer has to register the vehicle identification before you can receive messages. This can take several days to process.

Message Options

When you open a message, you can read a summary of it, and then choose one of several options. If an option is not available for a message, that option will not be highlighted.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

339

０８／０２／０６２１：２０：２７３１ＴＬ１６０００３４５



Delete − Select this option to delete the current message.

Voice − Select this option to hear a voice read the entire message. This gives you more information than the screen can display at one time. When you select the Voice option, it changes to a Stop Reading option.

Select the option again to stop the voice.

Call − Select this option to call a phone number embedded in the message. When you select Call , the

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) dials the number for you.

To make a call, your Bluetooth compatible phone must be paired to the vehicle’s HandsFreeLink system, powered on, and located within the vehicle (see page 315 ).

Find Nearest Dealer − Select this option to find the nearest Acura dealer using the navigation system.

Call Your Dealer − Select this option to call the Acura dealer you purchased your vehicle from.

AcuraLink also directs you to this dealer so you can schedule a maintenance appointment or receive information about a message. If your assigned servicing dealer changes,

AcuraLink will reset to call that dealer.

Diagnostic Inf o − Select this option to get more information about the current diagnostic message. To use this option, your cellphone must be paired with the HFL. In addition, the paired phone must have a compatible data service and be set up with the AcuraLink system to make a data connection. Access the handsfreelink.com website to find out which data services are currently compatible with AcuraLink.

Message Pref erences

To set your AcuraLink preferences

(the types of messages you want to receive, if any), visit the Owner Link website at www.owners.acura.com

, and choose what you would like to receive. If you do not have internet access, call Acura Client Services at

(800) 382-2238; they can set your message preferences for you.

340 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２０：４０３１ＴＬ１６０００３４６



Deleting Messages

NOTE: Diagnostic info and recall/ campaign messages can only be deleted by your dealer.

To delete a single message:

Press the INFO button to bring up the Information screen.

Scroll to the Messages option, then select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Select the message category that contains the message you want to delete.

Use the interface knob to scroll up or down to the message title you want to delete, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Scroll to Delete with the interface knob, and select it by pressing


To delete all messages:

NOTE: The Delete All Messages command does not apply to

Diagnostic Info and Recall messages.

They can only be deleted by your dealer.

Press the SETUP button to view the setup screen.

Select Other by pushing the interface selector to the right.

Use the interface knob to scroll to the AcuraLink/Messages option, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Scroll to the Delete Messages option, and select it by pressing


Scroll to the category with the messages you want to delete, and select the category by pressing


2009 TSX 341

０８／０２／０７１７：３３：３２３１ＴＬ１６０００３４７



Message Categories

There are six message categories in

AcuraLink: Quick Tips, Feature

Guide, Maintenance Minder,

Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info, and Scheduled Dealer Appointment.

The system can store up to 255 messages.

Message categories can be added, revised, or deleted through broadcast messages from Acura.

Quick Tips Feature Guide

These messages, based on updated vehicle information and comments from other TSX owners, supplement your Owner’s Manual and Quick

Start Guide. They provide you with relevant information for a safe and enjoyable ownership experience. For additional information, call Acura

Client Services directly through the

HFL.

During the first 90 days of ownership, one of up to 17 different messages appears each day. These messages help you to use and understand the features of your vehicle.

342 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２１：０３３１ＴＬ１６０００３４８



Maintenance Minder

These messages provide detailed information about the service needed for your vehicle. When a maintenance message appears on the multi-information display, a list of needed maintenance items is provided through an AcuraLink message. These messages tell you the exact maintenance needed, helping you to avoid unnecessary maintenance costs.

You can use the following message options:

Make an appointment from the schedule at the dealer.

Reschedule the appointment with the dealer.

Call your dealer for an appointment.

Find the nearest dealer.

Automated Appointment

You can make an appointment with your dealer through the AcuraLink when you receive a maintenance minder message.

To use the automated appointment function, you should visit the Owner

Link website at www.owners.acura.com

, register some required settings, and complete the

Phone-Data Connection set-up (see page 351 ). Your Bluetooth compatible phone should also be paired and linked to your vehicle’s

Bluetooth HFL (see page 315 ).

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

343

０８／０２／０６２１：２１：１３３１ＴＬ１６０００３４９



When you see the maintenance minder message on the multiinformation display, you will also receive a message in the navigation screen. Select ‘‘AcuraLink/

Messages’’ on the Setup screen, then press ENTER.

Select the received message, then press ENTER. You will see the message as shown. To make an appointment, select ‘‘Schedule

Dealer Appt.’’ then press ENTER.

The system will automatically connect to the Acura server, then show you an appropriate appointment date and time on the navigation screen. If you accept this appointment, select ‘‘Confirm

Appointment,’’ then press ENTER.

344 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０７１７：３３：４２３１ＴＬ１６０００３５０


Scheduled Dealer Appointment

To reschedule the appointment:


The confirmation message will be displayed on the screen. Make sure to confirm the appointment date, time and dealer. If it is OK, press

ENTER.

If you want to change or reschedule the appointment date, select ‘‘Cancel,’’ then press ENTER.

Select ‘‘AcuraLink/Messages’’ on the Setup screen, then press ENTER.

Select ‘‘Scheduled Dealer


You will see the screen to reschedule as shown. To make an appointment, select ‘‘Reschedule Appointment,’’ then press ENTER.

The system will automatically connect to the Acura server, then show you a new appointment date and time on the navigation screen. If you accept this appointment, select

‘‘Confirm Appointment,’’ then press

ENTER.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 345

０８／０２／０６２１：２１：３３３１ＴＬ１６０００３５１



To cancel the appointment:

Select ‘‘AcuraLink/Messages’’ on the Setup screen, then press ENTER.

Select the appointment message then press ENTER. You will see the screen to cancel as shown. To cancel the appointment, select ‘‘Cancel


The system will request you to confirm the cancel on the navigation screen. To cancel the appointment, select ‘‘YES,’’ then press ENTER. If you select ‘‘NO,’’ the screen goes back to the previous message display.

The system will automatically connect to the Acura server, then show you the confirmation on the navigation screen. If you accept the cancel, press ENTER.

346 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２１：４２３１ＴＬ１６０００３５２



If you select the cancel appointment, you cannot try to reschedule the appointment. If you want to change or reschedule the appointment date, call your dealer directly with the

HFL.

Using automated appointment, your registered dealer through Owner

Link is automatically selected. If you want to select another dealer, such as in case of an emergency, find the nearest dealer and call the dealer directly with the HFL.

When a maintenance appointment is due soon, you will also receive an appointment reminder message.

Recall/Campaigns

2009 TSX

If your vehicle is affected by a recall or other important safety information, a letter will be mailed to you about the issue and how to fix it.

If you don’t get your vehicle fixed, you will also receive a reminder message through AcuraLink. You can then use the message options to call your dealer for an appointment or to find the nearest dealer.

CONTINUED

347

０８／０２／０６２１：２１：５１３１ＴＬ１６０００３５３



For this reason, it is important that we retain your current phone number. Please update your information using Owner Link at www.owners.acura.com.

Diagnostic Inf o

When an indicator comes on or a message is displayed on the Multi-

Information Display (MID),

AcuraLink can provide information about the cause of the indicator or message and the recommended action to address it. This helps you handle the problem as it occurs, preventing or limiting costly repairs.

The AcuraLink system cannot determine some mechanical problems (such as squeaks or rattles) that are not triggered by the diagnostic indicator monitors.

For more information on the instrument panel indicators, see page

60 .

When any indicator comes on or a message is displayed on the MID,

AcuraLink immediately notifies you with the message, ‘‘An indicator is on.

AcuraLink can help you decide what to do.’’

If you do not want the information right away, select the Check Later option.

348 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２２：０４３１ＴＬ１６０００３５４



If you want the information now, select the Check Now option. (If the navigation screen is not active, you must select OK from the navigation disclaimer screen before you can check the information.)

Depending on the severity of the problem, the message will let you know if you should see your dealer immediately or if you can wait until a later date.

You can then use the message options to call your dealer for an appointment or to find the nearest dealer.

Reminder Message

When viewing a diagnostic info message through the INFO menu, you can use the Diagnostic Info option to connect to the Acura server and retrieve the latest information regarding the problem.

NOTE: There may not be any additional information, depending on the time elapsed since the previous time you retrieved the information from the Acura server.

When you make an appointment through the Owner’s Link Online

Maintenance Appointment Service, you can be reminded in advance about that appointment through

AcuraLink.

If you need to reschedule or cancel the appointment, see page 345 .

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 349

０８／０２／０６２１：２２：１３３１ＴＬ１６０００３５５



Turning the Automated Appointment preference off will disable appointment notifications in the vehicle based on appointments created or changed at the Owner

Link Online Scheduling website.

Appointments can still be created, rescheduled, and canceled from the vehicle; however the appointment information stored in the vehicle will not be updated. Any changes to those appointments should be made from the Owner Link website.

AcuraLink/Message Screen To access the following functions, press the SETUP option, push the interface selector to the right to select Other, then rotate the interface knob to select AcuraLink/

Messages.

Delete Messages − Select this option to delete all stored messages within a category, except for diagnostic info and recall campaign messages. These messages can only be deleted by a certified technician after the recall is done or the problem is corrected, or through a broadcast message from Acura.

350 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２２：２２３１ＴＬ１６０００３５６



New Message Notif ication −

Select ON if you want to be notified of new messages (envelope icon appears on the navigation screen).

Select OFF if you do not want to be notified of new messages (envelope icon does not appear on the screen).

Messages can still be accessed using the INFO menu. If you would like to stop receiving messages, visit the

OwnerLink website at acura.com

www.owners.

to change your messaging preferences.

Auto Reading − Select ON to have the system automatically read each message to you. Select OFF to manually select the Voice option when you want a message read to you.

Phone-Data Connection − Select this option to begin the process required to connect to Acura. This is used to access the most recent diagnostic information when a problem occurs.

NOTE: For the Phone Data

Connection button to be active, you need a Bluetooth compatible and enabled cellphone paired to the

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL).

To complete the data connection setup, the paired phone must have a compatible data service.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

351

０８／０２／０６２１：２２：２８３１ＴＬ１６０００３５７



To find more information on

Bluetooth compatible and enabled cell phones, visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink or call the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit www.acura.ca

ACURA-9.

, or call 1-888-9-

Connect to the Acura Server −

The default setting is prompt. When a diagnostic info message appears, and you select the Check Now option, the system will prompt you before connecting to the Acura server. If you do not wish to connect at that time, select No at the prompt, and you will see the information from the onboard database. The ‘‘Auto’’ setting will remove the prompt when you select the Check Now option and will automatically connect to the

Acura server. This setting only applies when you have a Bluetooth enabled phone that is paired with the

HFL and you have completed the

Phone-Data Connection setup.






352 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０７１７：３３：５１３１ＴＬ１６０００３５８


Rearview Camera and Monitor

On vehicles with navigation system

REARVIEW CAMERA

When in reverse, the navigation system ‘‘hard’’ buttons are locked out, except the ‘‘ ’’ button.

Pressing and releasing the button allows you to switch the brightness of the rearview camera image between the night and the day positions

You can also adjust the brightness of the rearview camera image by turning the knob on the interface dial.

Whenever you shift to reverse (R) with the ignition switch in the ON

(II) position, the rearview is shown on the navigation system screen.

For the best picture, always keep the rearview camera clean, and do not cover the camera lens. To avoid scratching the lens when you clean it, use a moist, soft cloth.

The camera brightness cannot be adjusted by voice control.

Since the rearview camera display area is limited, you should always back up slowly and carefully, and look behind you for obstacles.

2009 TSX 353

０８／０２／０６２１：２２：３９３１ＴＬ１６０００３５９


354 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２２：４３３１ＴＬ１６０００３６０

Main Menu

Before Driving

Before you begin driving your vehicle, you should know what gasoline to use and how to check the levels of important fluids. You also need to know how to properly store luggage or packages. The information in this section will help you. If you plan to add any accessories to your vehicle, please read the information in this section first.

Break-in Period .............................

Fuel Recommendation .................

.

.

356

356

Service Station Procedure ...........

.

357

Refueling ....................................

.

357

Tighten Fuel Cap Message .....

.

358

Opening and Closing the

Hood .......................................

.

359

Oil Check ...................................

Engine Coolant Check .............

.

.

361

361

Fuel Economy

Carrying Cargo

...............................

.

362

...

365

.............................

.

367

2009 TSX 355

０８／０２／０６２１：２２：５５３１ＴＬ１６０００３６１


Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period

Help assure your vehicle’s future reliability and performance by paying extra attention to how you drive during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).

During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid acceleration.

Do not change the oil until the scheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first

200 miles (300 km).

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow these recommendations with an overhauled or exchanged engine, or when the brakes are replaced.

Fuel Recommendation

Your vehicle is designed to operate on premium unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number of 91 or higher.

Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic knocking noises in the engine and will result in decreased engine performance. Use of a gasoline with a pump octane number less than 87 can lead to engine damage.

On vehicles with manual transmission

You may hear a knocking noise from the engine if you drive the vehicle at low engine speed (below about 1,000 rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this, raise the engine speed by shifting to a lower gear.

We recommend using quality gasolines containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits.

In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend, in areas where it is available, the use of gasoline that does NOT contain manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact your authorized dealer for service.

356 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２３：０７３１ＴＬ１６０００３６２


Service Station Procedure

Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol or

MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol by volume and up to 15% MTBE by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.

If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-related information, please refer to your

Quick Start Guide .

Ref ueling

FUEL FILL DOOR

Push

Pull out

1.

Park with the driver’s side closest to the gas pump.

2.

Make sure that the driver’s door is unlocked.

With the driver’s door locked, the fuel fill door is also locked.

3.

Outside of the vehicle, push on the right side edge of the fuel fill door in the middle. The fuel fill door

2009 TSX will pop up slightly. Pull it outward to open it.

Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away.

Handle fuel only outdoors.

Wipe up spills immediately.

CONTINUED

357

０８／０２／０６２１：２３：１６３１ＴＬ１６０００３６３


Service Station Procedures

HOLDER

FUEL FILL CAP

TETHER

4.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.

You may hear a hissing sound as pressure inside the tank escapes.

The fuel fill cap is attached to the fuel filler with a tether. Place the cap in the holder on the fuel fill door.

5.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on until it clicks at least once. If you do not properly tighten the cap, you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL

CAP’’ message on the multiinformation display. If the system still detects an evaporative system leak after retightening the cap, the malfunction indicator lamp may come on (see page 471 ).

6.

Push the fuel fill door closed until it latches.

Tighten Fuel Cap Message

Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic system will detect a loose or missing fuel fill cap as an evaporative system leak. The first time a leak is detected a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message appears on the multi-information display.

358 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２３：２５３１ＴＬ１６０００３６４



Turn the engine off, and confirm the fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen it, then retighten it until it clicks at least once. The message should go off after several days of normal driving once you tighten or replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another message, press the INFO button.

The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message will appear each time you restart the engine until the system turns the message off.

If the system still detects a leak in the vehicle’s evaporative emissions system, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill cap was not already tightened, turn the engine off, and check or retighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks at least once. The MIL should go off after several days of normal driving once the cap is tightened or replaced. If the MIL does not go off, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. For more information, see page 471 .

Opening and Closing the Hood

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

1.

Park the vehicle, and set the parking brake. Pull the hood release handle located under the lower left corner of the dashboard.

The hood will pop up slightly.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

359

０８／０２／０６２１：２３：３３３１ＴＬ１６０００３６５



GRIP SUPPORT ROD

To close the hood, lift it up slightly to remove the support rod from the hole. Put the support rod back into its holding clip. Lower the hood to about a foot (30 cm) above the fender, then let it drop. Make sure it is securely latched.

LATCH

2.

Reach in between the hood and the front grille with your fingers.

The hood latch handle is above the ‘‘A’’ logo. Push this handle up to the right until it releases the hood. Lift the hood.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the handle, the mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

360

CLIP

3.

Holding the grip, pull the support rod out of its clip. Insert the end into the designated hole in the hood marked by an arrow.

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２３：４７３１ＴＬ１６０００３６６


Oil Check


Engine Coolant Check

RESERVE TANK

DIPSTICK (orange handle)

Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Wait a few minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.

1.

Remove the dipstick (orange handle).

2.

Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel.

3.

Insert the dipstick all the way back into its hole.

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

4.

Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks.

If it is near or below the lower mark, see Adding Engine Oil on page 419 .

MAX

MIN

Look at the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is between the MAX and MIN lines. If it is below the MIN line, see Adding

Engine Coolant on page 423 for information on adding the proper coolant.

Refer to Owner’s Maintenance

Checks on page 416 for information about checking other items on your vehicle.

2009 TSX 361

０８／０２／０６２１：２３：５９３１ＴＬ１６０００３６７

Main Menu

Fuel Economy

Table Of Contents

Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel

Economy Estimates Comparison.

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.

It varies based on driving conditions, driving habits and vehicle condition.

Therefore, it is not possible for one set of estimates to predict fuel economy precisely for all drivers in all environments.

The EPA fuel economy estimates shown in the example to the right are a useful tool for comparison when buying a vehicle. EPA estimates include:

City MPG − Represents urban driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A range of miles per gallon achieved is also provided.

Highway MPG − Represents a mixture of rural and interstate driving, in a warmed-up vehicle, typical of longer trips in free-flowing traffic. A range of miles per gallon

362

City MPG Highway MPG

Combined Fuel

Economy

Estimated Annual

Fuel Cost

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown) achieved is also provided.

Combined Fuel Economy the class.

−

Represents a combination of city and highway driving. The scale represents the range of combined fuel economy for other vehicles in

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −

Provides an estimated annual fuel cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000 km) per year multiplied by the cost per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost data) divided by the combined fuel economy.

For more information on fuel economy ratings and factors that affect fuel economy, visit fueleconomy.gov

www.

(Canada: Visit www.

vehicles.gc.ca

)

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２４：１８３１ＴＬ１６０００３６８


Fuel Economy

Fuel Economy Factors

The following factors can lower your vehicle’s fuel economy:

Aggressive driving (hard acceleration and braking)

Excessive idling, accelerating and braking in stop-and-go traffic

Cold engine operation (engines are more efficient when warmed up)

Driving with a heavy load or the air conditioner running

Improperly inflated tires

Improving Fuel Economy

Vehicle Maintenance

A properly maintained vehicle maximizes fuel economy. Poor maintenance can significantly reduce fuel economy. Always maintain your vehicle according to the maintenance messages displayed on the multiinformation display (see Owner’s

Maintenance Checks on page 416 ).

For example:

Use the recommended viscosity motor oil, displaying the API

Certif ication Seal (see page

419 ).

Maintain proper tire inf lation

− An under inflated tire increases

‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces fuel economy.

Avoid carrying excess weight in your vehicle − It puts a heavier load on the engine, increasing fuel consumption.

Keep your vehicle clean − In particular, a build-up of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside adds weight and rolling resistance.

Frequent cleaning helps your fuel economy.

Drive Ef f iciently

Drive moderately − Rapid acceleration, abrupt cornering, and hard braking increase fuel consumption.

Observe the speed limit −

Aerodynamic drag has a big effect on fuel mileage at speeds above 45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your speed and you reduce the drag.

Trailers, car top carriers, roof racks and bike racks are also big contributors to increased drag.

Always drive in the highest gear possible − If your vehicle has a manual transmission, you can boost your fuel economy by up shifting as early as possible.

Avoid excessive idling − results in 0 miles per gallon.

Idling

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

363

０８／０２／０６２１：２４：２９３１ＴＬ１６０００３６９

Main Menu

Fuel Economy

Table Of Contents

Minimize the use of the air conditioning system − The A/C puts an extra load on the engine which makes it use more fuel. Use the fresh-air ventilation when possible.

Plan and combine trips −

Combine several short trips into one. A warmed-up engine is more fuel efficient than a cold one.

Calculating Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Direct calculation is the recommended source of information about your actual fuel economy.

Using frequency of fill-ups or taking fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate measures of fuel economy.

Fuel economy may improve over the first several thousand miles.

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Miles driven

100

Gallons of fuel

Liter

Miles per

Gallon

Kilometers

1)

2)

3)

4)

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.

Reset trip counter to zero.

Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.

Follow one of the simple calculations above.

L per 100 km

364 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２４：４０３１ＴＬ１６０００３７０


Accessories and Modifications

Modifying your vehicle, or installing some non-Acura accessories, can make your vehicle unsafe. Before you make any modifications or add any accessories, be sure to read the following information.

Accessories

Your dealer has Acura accessories that allow you to personalize your vehicle. These accessories have been designed and approved for your vehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Although non-Acura accessories may fit on your vehicle, they may not meet factory specifications, and could adversely affect your vehicle’s handling and stability.

Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding accessories and modifications.

When properly installed, cellular phones, alarms, two-way radios, and low-powered audio systems should not interfere with your vehicle’s computer controlled systems, such as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and tire pressure monitoring system.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does not obscure any lights, or interfere with proper vehicle operation or performance.

Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits

(see page 474 ) or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.

Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact your dealer for assistance.

If possible, have your dealer inspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the rear windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

2009 TSX 365

０８／０２／０６２１：２４：４９３１ＴＬ１６０００３７１


Accessories and Modifications

Modif ying Your Vehicle

Removing parts from your vehicle, or replacing components with non-

Acura components could seriously affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:

Lowering the vehicle with a non-

Acura suspension kit that significantly reduces ground clearance can allow the undercarriage to hit speed bumps or other raised objects, which could cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with a non-

Acura suspension kit can affect the handling and stability.

Non-Acura wheels, because they are a universal design, can cause excessive stress on suspension components and will not be compatible with the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).

366

Larger or smaller wheels and tires can interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and other systems.

Modifying your steering wheel or any other part of your vehicle’s safety systems could make the systems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle, consult your dealer.

2009 TSX

０８／０２／１２１２：３６：３２３１ＴＬ１６０００３７２


DOOR POCKETS

CENTER POCKETS

DRIVER’S

POCKET

GLOVE BOX

SEAT-BACK

POCKETS

CONSOLE

COMPARTMENT

SIDE POCKET

Carrying Cargo

Your vehicle has several convenient storage areas:

Glove box

Door and seat-back pockets

Trunk, including the rear seats when folded down

Center and side pockets

Driver’s pocket

Console compartment

However, carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. Before carrying any type of cargo, be sure to read the following pages.

TRUNK

2009 TSX 367

０８／０２／０６２１：２５：１５３１ＴＬ１６０００３７３

Main Menu

Carrying Cargo

Table Of Contents

Load Limits

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).

See Tire And Loading Information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb.

Label Example

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

368

Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.

Steps for Determining Correct Load

Limit

(1)

−

Locate the statement ‘‘The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is

650 lbs.

(1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２５：２１３１ＴＬ１６０００３７４


Example 1

Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight

(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)

Cargo Weight

(550 lbs)

Example 2


(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)

Cargo Weight

(250 lbs)

Example 3


(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)

Cargo Weight

(100 lbs)

Carrying Cargo

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

2009 TSX 369

０８／０２／１２１２：３６：４２３１ＴＬ１６０００３７５

Main Menu

Carrying Cargo

Table Of Contents

Carrying Items in the Passenger

Compartment

Store or secure all items that could be thrown around and hurt someone during a crash.

Do not put any items on top of the trunk panel. They can block your view and be thrown around the vehicle during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats and interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the proper operation of the seats, or the proper operation of the sensors under the seats.

Also, keep all cargo below the bottom of the windows. If it is higher, it could interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

Keep the glove box closed while driving. If it is open, a passenger could injure their knees during a crash or sudden stop.

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk

Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk, placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible.

If you fold down the back seat, tie down items that could be thrown about the vehicle during a crash or sudden stop.

If you carry large items that prevent you from closing the trunk lid, exhaust gas can enter the passenger area. To avoid the possibility of carbon monoxide poisoning , follow the instructions on page 55 .

370 2009 TSX

０８／０２／１２１２：３６：５０３１ＴＬ１６０００３７６


Cargo Hooks

HOOK

Cargo Net

Optional

The cargo net can be used to help hold down items stored in the trunk.

HOOK

To secure cargo, use the four floor hooks in the trunk. Make sure all stored items are secured before driving.

Carrying Cargo

2009 TSX 371

０８／０２／０６２１：２５：４３３１ＴＬ１６０００３７７


372 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２５：４８３１ＴＬ１６０００３７８

Main Menu

Driving

This section gives you tips on starting the engine under various conditions, and how to operate the manual and automatic transmissions.

It also includes important information on parking your vehicle, the braking system, the vehicle stability assist (VSA) system, the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS), and facts you need if you are planning to tow a trailer.

Preparing to Drive

Starting the Engine

........................

.

374

.......................

.

375

Manual Transmission ...................

.

376

Automatic Transmission ..............

.

379

Driving with the Paddle

Shifters .......................................

.

383

Parking ...........................................

.

388

Braking System .............................

.

389

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ...............

.

390

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) ........................

.

392

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability

Control (ESC), System ........

.

398

Towing a Trailer ...........................

.

400

2009 TSX 373

０８／０２／０６２１：２５：５９３１ＴＬ１６０００３７９


Preparing to Drive

You should do these checks and adjustments before you drive your vehicle:

1.

Make sure all windows, mirrors, and outside lights are clean and unobstructed. Remove frost, snow, or ice.

6.

Check the seat adjustment (see page 134 ).

7.

Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors (see page 145 ).

8.

Check the steering wheel adjustment (see page 118 ).

2.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

3.

Check that the trunk is fully closed.

9.

Make sure the doors are securely closed and locked.

10.

Fasten your seat belt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seat belts (see page 15 ).

4.

Visually check the tires. If a tire looks low, use a gauge to check its pressure.

5.

Check that any items you may be carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely.

11.

When you start the engine, check the gauges and indicators in the instrument panel, and the messages on the multi-information display (see pages

70 ).

59 , 68 and

374 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２６：１２３１ＴＬ１６０００３８０


Starting the Engine

1.

Apply the parking brake.

2.

In cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories to reduce the drain on the battery.

3.

Manual transmission:

Press the clutch pedal down all the way. The START (III) position does not function unless the clutch pedal is pressed.

Automatic transmission:

Make sure the shift lever is in

Park. Press on the brake pedal.

4.

Without touching the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to the

START (III) position. Do not hold the key in the START (III) position for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start right away, pause for at least

10 seconds before trying again.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, the engine’s f uel system is disabled. For more inf ormation, see page 121 .

5.

If the engine does not start within

15 seconds, or starts but stalls right away, repeat step 4 with the accelerator pedal pressed halfway down. If the engine starts, release pressure on the accelerator pedal so the engine does not race.

6.

If the engine fails to start, press the accelerator pedal all the way down and hold it there while starting to clear flooding. Return to step 5 if the engine does not start.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400 meters) adds to this problem.

2009 TSX 375

０８／０２／０６２１：２６：２０３１ＴＬ１６０００３８１


Manual Transmission

On models with manual transmission

The manual transmission is synchronized in all forward gears for smooth operation. It has a lockout so you cannot accidentally shift from any forward gear to reverse while the vehicle is moving at a certain speed (see page 378 ).

When shifting up or down, make sure you push the clutch pedal down all the way, shift to the next gear, and let the pedal up gradually. When you are not shifting, do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your clutch to wear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shift into reverse. You can damage the transmission by trying to shift into reverse with the vehicle moving.

Push down the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into reverse, or shift into one of the forward gears for a moment.

This stops the gears so they won’t

‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can get extra braking from the engine by shifting to a lower gear. This extra braking can help you maintain a safe speed and prevent your brakes from overheating while going down a steep hill. Before downshifting, make sure the engine speed will not go into the tachometer’s red zone in the lower gear.

Rapid slowing or speeding up can cause loss of control on slippery surfaces. If you crash, you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving on slippery surfaces.

376 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２６：２９３１ＴＬ１６０００３８２



Your vehicle is equipped with an aluminum shift lever. If you leave the vehicle parked outside for a long time on a hot day, be careful before moving the shift lever. Because of the heat, the shift lever may be extremely hot. If the outside temperature is low, the shift lever feels cold.

Recommended Shif t Points

Drive in the highest gear that lets the engine run and accelerate smoothly. This will give you good fuel economy and effective emissions control. The following shift points are recommended:

Shift up

1st to 2nd

2nd to 3rd

3rd to 4th

4th to 5th

5th to 6th

Normal acceleration

17 mph (27 km/h)

29 mph (46 km/h)

37 mph (59 km/h)

43 mph (69 km/h)

49 mph (79 km/h)

Engine Speed Limiter

If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometer’s red zone. If this occurs, you may feel the engine cut in and out. This is caused by a limiter in the engine’s computer controls. The engine will run normally when you reduce the rpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not go into the tachometer’s red zone.

2009 TSX 377

０８／０２／０６２１：２６：３８３１ＴＬ１６０００３８３



Reverse Lockout

The manual transmission has lockout so you cannot accidentally shift from any forward gear to reverse while the vehicle is moving at a certain speed. If you cannot shift to reverse when the vehicle is stopped, do the following.

Move the shift lever in sequence.

1.

With the clutch pedal pressed, move the shift lever to the first/ second gear side of the neutral gate, then shift to reverse.

2.

If you are still unable to shift to reverse, apply the parking brake, and turn the ignition key to the

ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) position.

3.

Press the clutch pedal, and shift to reverse.

4.

With the clutch pedal still pressed, start the engine.

If you need to use this procedure to shift to reverse, your vehicle may be developing a problem. Have it checked by your dealer.

378 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２６：４８３１ＴＬ１６０００３８４


Automatic Transmission

Shif t Lever Position Indicators

These indicators in the tachometer show which position the shift lever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it flashes while driving (in any shift position), it indicates a possible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator, there is a problem with the automatic transmission control system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and have the transmission checked by your dealer as soon as possible.

When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a possible problem with the transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK

TRANSMISSION’’ message on the multi-information display.

Shif ting

RELEASE

BUTTON

SHIFT LEVER

To shift from Park to any position, press firmly on the brake pedal, and press the release button on the front of the shift lever, then move the lever. You cannot shift out of Park when the ignition switch is in the

LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I) position.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 379

０８／０２／０６２１：２６：５７３１ＴＬ１６０００３８５



To shift from:

P to R

Do this:

Press the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button.

Press the shift lever release button.

R to P

N to R

D to S

S to D

D to N

N to D

R to N

Move the shift lever.

Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use

Park whenever you are turning off or starting the engine. To shift out of

Park, you must press on the brake pedal and have your foot off the accelerator pedal. Press the release button on the front of the shift lever to move it.

If you have done all of the above and still cannot move the lever out of

Park, see page 381 .

Shif t Lock Release on

You must also press the release button to shift into Park. To avoid transmission damage, come to a complete stop before shifting into

Park. The shift lever must be in Park before you can remove the key from the ignition switch.

Reverse (R) − Press the brake pedal and press the release button on the front of the shift lever to shift from Park to reverse. To shift from reverse to neutral, come to a complete stop, and then shift. Press the release button before shifting into reverse from neutral.

Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you need to restart a stalled engine, or if it is necessary to stop briefly with the engine idling. Shift to the Park position if you need to leave your vehicle for any reason. Press on the brake pedal when you are moving the shift lever from neutral to another gear.

Drive (D) − Use this position for your normal driving. The transmission automatically selects a suitable gear (1 through 5) for your speed and acceleration. You may notice the transmission shifting up at higher engine speeds when the engine is cold. This helps the engine warm up faster.

380 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２７：０６３１ＴＬ１６０００３８６



S Position (S) − To shift into the S position, press the release button on the front of the shift lever, and move the lever to S. This position is similar to D, except only gears from first to fourth are selected. The S position keeps the transmission from cycling between fourth and fifth gears in stop-and-go driving.

With the shift lever in D or S, you can also use the paddle shifters to shift the transmission up or down.

With the paddle shifters, you can operate the transmission much like a manual transmission without a clutch pedal. For more information on driving with the paddle shifters, see page 383 .

Engine Speed Limiter

If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometer’s red zone. If this occurs, you may feel the engine cut in and out. This is caused by a limiter in the engine’s computer controls. The engine will run normally when you reduce the rpm below the red zone.

Shif t Lock Release

This allows you to move the shift lever out of Park if the normal method of pushing on the brake pedal and pressing the release button does not work.

1.

Set the parking brake.

2.

Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

381

０８／０２／０６２１：２７：１４３１ＴＬ１６０００３８７



COVER

3.

Put a cloth on the edge of the shift lock release slot cover. Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver or metal fingernail file to carefully pry up the edge of the cover and remove it from the slot.

4.

Insert the key in the shift lock release slot.

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

5.

Push down on the key while you press the release button on the shift lever and move the shift lever out of Park to neutral.

6.

Remove the key from the shift lock release slot, then reinstall the cover. Make sure the notch on the cover is on the right side. Press the brake pedal, and restart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lock release, it means your vehicle is developing a problem. Have it checked by your dealer.

382 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２７：２４３１ＴＬ１６０００３８８


Using the Paddle Shif ters in D position (D-Paddle Shif t Mode)

When you are driving in D position, you can shift the transmission up or down manually with the paddle shifters.

To shift up or down, use the ＋

(right) or − (left) paddle shifter on each side of the steering wheel.

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

Each time you pull the ＋ (right) paddle, the transmission shifts to a higher gear. Pull the − (left) paddle to downshift. You will see the selected gear number on the instrument panel.

When you pull either paddle shifter, the gear position indicator shows you the selected gear number.

Driving with the Paddle Shifters

Downshifting with the paddle shifter allows you to increase the engine braking when going down steep or long hills, and provides more power when climbing uphills. You can upshift the transmission manually to reduce the rpm. Driving in the higher gear helps fuel economy.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

383

０８／０２／０６２１：２７：３５３１ＴＬ１６０００３８９



The transmission control system monitors the accelerator pedal use and your driving conditions. When you press the accelerator pedal as in normal driving, the system judges that you are driving at a constant cruising speed without using the paddle shifters. Under these conditions, D-paddle shift mode is canceled, and the transmission automatically returns to drive mode

(D).

When the transmission returns to drive mode (D), the displayed gear number goes out.

The transmission remains in the selected gear if you do not accelerate.

Each time you pull either paddle shifter, the transmission shifts one gear up or down. If you want to shift up or down more than two gears, pull the paddle shifter twice, pause, and then pull it again.

The automatic transmission will not allow you to shift up or down if:

You downshift before the engine speed falls below the upper limit of the lower gear.

If you try to do this, the gear position indicator will flash the number of the lower gear several times, then return to a higher gear.

Here are the speed ranges for downshifting.

To shift from

5 → 4 under 118 mph (190 km/h)

4 → 3

3 → 2

2 → 1

Speed range under 87 mph (140 km/h) under 55 mph (88 km/h) under 24 mph (38 km/h)

You upshift before the engine speed rises above the lower limit of the higher gear.

You press both paddle shifters at the same time.

The transmission downshifts to first gear and returns to drive mode (D) when the vehicle comes to a complete stop or the vehicle speed is about 6 mph (10 km/h).

If there is a problem in the transmission while you are driving with the paddle shifters, the D indicator flashes, the D-paddle shift mode is canceled, and the transmission returns to drive mode

(D).

384 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２７：４６３１ＴＬ１６０００３９０



Using the Paddle Shif ters in S position (Sequential Shif t Mode)

With the shift lever in S position, you can manually shift up or down with the paddle shifters. The transmission goes into the sequential shift mode and holds the selected gear.

To enter the sequential shift mode, press the release button on the front of the shift lever, move the lever to the S position, then pull either paddle shifter. To return to drive mode (D), move the shift lever to the D position.

While you are driving in the sequential shift mode, the transmission will not automatically return to drive mode (D).

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

‘‘M’’ INDICATOR

When you move the shift lever from

‘‘D’’ to ‘‘S’’ position and pull either paddle shifter, the gear position indicator displays ‘‘M’’ along with the selected gear number.

To upshift, pull the ＋ (right) paddle shifter. To downshift, pull the

(left) paddle shifter.

−

When you accelerate from a stop, the transmission starts in first gear, and you must manually upshift between first and fifth gears. Make sure you upshift before the engine speed reaches the tachometer’s red zone.

The transmission remains in the selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There is no automatic downshift when you push the accelerator pedal to the floor.

When you are driving in 4th or 5th gear, the transmission downshifts to the lower gear under the following conditions:

The vehicle slows down to a certain speed.

You press the brake pedal.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

385

０８／０２／０６２１：２７：５７３１ＴＬ１６０００３９１



Downshifting with the paddle shifter allows you to increase the engine braking when going down steep or long hills, and provides more power when climbing uphills. You can upshift the transmission manually to reduce the rpm. Driving in the higher gear helps fuel economy.

The transmission also shifts automatically as the vehicle comes to a complete stop. It downshifts to first gear when the vehicle speed reaches

6 mph (10 km/h) or less.

The automatic transmission will not allow you to shift up or down if:

You downshift before the engine speed falls below the upper limit of the lower gear.

If you try to do this, the gear position indicator will flash the number of the lower gear several times, then return to a higher gear.

If the vehicle speed decreases below the redline of the selected lower gear while the indicator is flashing, the transmission downshifts, and the indicator displays the selected gear.

You upshift before the engine speed rises above the lower limit of the higher gear.

You press both paddle shifters at the same time.

Here are the speed ranges for upshifting and downshifting.

To shift from

Speed range

1

2

→

→

2

3

3 → 4

4 → 5 over 0 mph (0 km/h) over 6 mph (10 km/h) over 20 mph (32 km/h) over 32 mph (52 km/h)

386 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２８：０２３１ＴＬ１６０００３９２


To shift from

Speed range

2 → 1

3 → 2

4 → 3 under 31 mph (50 km/h) under 62 mph (100 km/h) under 90 mph (145 km/h)

5 → 4 under 124 mph (200 km/h)

Starting in Second Gear

When you are in sequential shift mode, and the vehicle is stopped, pull the ＋ (right) paddle shifter to shift to second gear. You will see

‘‘M2’’ in the display. Starting in second gear helps to reduce wheelspin in deep snow or on a slippery surface.


2009 TSX 387

０８／０２／０６２１：２８：１４３１ＴＬ１６０００３９３


Parking

Always use the parking brake when you park your vehicle. Make sure the parking brake is set firmly, or your vehicle may roll if it is parked on an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, set the parking brake before you put the transmission in

Park. This keeps the vehicle from moving and putting pressure on the parking mechanism in the transmission.

Parking Tips

Make sure the moonroof and the windows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc., in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors.

Check the indicator on the instrument panel to verify that the security system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tall grass, or other flammable materials. The hot three way catalytic converter could cause these materials to catch on fire.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb. If your vehicle has a manual transmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels toward the curb. If your vehicle has a manual transmission, put it in reverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake is fully released before driving away.

Driving with the parking brake partially set can overheat or damage the rear brakes.

388 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２８：２４３１ＴＬ１６０００３９４


Braking System

Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The emergency brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system

(ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.

Resting your foot on the pedal keeps the brakes applied lightly, builds up heat, and reduces their effectiveness and reduces brake pad life. In addition, fuel economy can be reduced. It also keeps your brake lights on all the time, confusing drivers behind you.

Constant application of the brakes when going down a long hill builds up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the brakes by taking your foot off the accelerator and downshifting to a lower gear.

Check the brakes after driving through deep water. Apply the brakes moderately to see if they feel normal. If not, apply them gently and frequently until they do. Be extra cautious and alert in your driving.

Braking System Design

The hydraulic system that operates the brakes has two separate circuits.

Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle (the left-front brake is connected with the right-rear brake, etc.). If one circuit should develop a problem, you will still have braking at two wheels.

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

All four brakes have audible brake wear indicators.

If the brake pads need replacing, you will hear a distinctive, metallic screeching sound when you apply the brake pedal. If you do not have the brake pads replaced, they will screech all the time. It is normal for the brakes to occasionally squeal or squeak when you apply them.

2009 TSX 389

０８／０２／０６２１：２８：３３３１ＴＬ１６０００３９５


Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than a person can do it.

The electronic brake distribution

(EBD) system, which is part of the

ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.

You should never pump the brake pedal.

Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You will feel a pulsation in the brake pedal when the ABS activates, and you may hear some noise. This is normal: it is the ABS rapidly pumping the brakes. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the

ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

ABS Indicator

If this indicator comes on, the antilock function of the braking system has shut down. The brakes still work like a conventional system, but without anti-lock. You should have your dealer inspect your vehicle as soon as possible.

When the ABS indicator comes on, you will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS

SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display.

If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, test the brakes as shown on page 472 .

390 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２８：４３３１ＴＬ１６０００３９６


Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

If the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on together, and the parking brake is fully released, the EBD system may also be shut down.

Test your brakes as instructed on page 472 . If the brakes feel normal, drive slowly and have your vehicle repaired by your dealer as soon as possible. Avoid sudden hard braking which could cause the rear wheels to lock up and possibly lead to a loss of control.

The VSA indicator will come on along with the ABS indicator.

Important Saf ety Reminders

ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle.

It only helps with the steering control during braking.

ABS will not prevent a skid that results f rom changing direction abruptly, such as trying to take a corner too fast or making a sudden lane change. Always drive at a safe speed for the road and weather conditions.

ABS cannot prevent a loss of stability.

Always steer moderately when you are braking hard. Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause your vehicle to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road.

A vehicle with ABS may require a longer distance to stop on loose or uneven surfaces, such as gravel or snow, than a vehicle without antilock.

2009 TSX 391

０８／０２／０６２１：２８：５２３１ＴＬ１６０００３９７


Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that turns on every time you start the engine and monitors the pressure in your tires while driving.

Each tire has its own pressure sensor. If the air pressure of a tire becomes significantly low, the sensor in that tire immediately sends a signal that causes the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator in the instrument panel to come on. If this happens, you will see which tire is losing pressure on the multiinformation display along with a

‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’ message.

Low Tire Pressure/

TPMS Indicator

When the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator is on, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated.

You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard.

It is possible that the pressures shown on the multi-information display and the pressures you manually measure are slightly different.

If the difference is significant or you cannot make the low tire pressure/

TPMS indicator and message on the multi-information display go out after inflating the tires to the specified values, have your dealer check the system as soon as possible.

If you think you can safely drive a short distance to a service station, proceed slowly to the station, then inflate the tire to the recommended pressure.

If the tire is flat, or if the tire pressure is too low to continue driving, replace the tire with the compact spare tire (see page 458 ).

Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies by temperature and other conditions, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on unexpectedly.

392 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２９：０３３１ＴＬ１６０００３９８



For example, if you check and fill your tires in a warm area, then drive in extremely cold weather, the tire pressure will be lower than measured and could be underinflated and cause the low tire pressure/

TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if you check and adjust your tire pressure in cooler conditions, and drive into extremely hot conditions, the tires may become overinflated.

However, the low tire pressure/

TPMS indicator will not come on if the tires are overinflated.

Refer to page guidelines.

447 for tire inflation

If there is a problem with the TPMS, this indicator begins to flash. It stops flashing after approximately 1 minute, then stays on. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page 395 ).

Although your tire pressure is monitored, you must manually check the tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when the vehicle is cold, and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified on the vehicle placard and in the owner’s manual (see page

448 ).

Tire Pressure Monitor

To select the tire pressure monitor, press the INFO button several times with the ignition switch in the ON

(II) position.

You will see the above display on the multi-information display when all tire pressures are normal.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 393

０８／０２／０６２１：２９：１１３１ＴＬ１６０００３９９



U.S. model

To see the inflation pressures of all four tires, press the SEL/RESET button. The display changes as shown above.

Canadian model

Each tire pressure is shown in PSI

(U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadian models).

This shows that front left tire is losing pressure.

Each tire has its own pressure sensor. If the air pressure of a tire becomes significantly low, the sensor in that tire immediately sends a signal that causes the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator in the instrument panel to come on. If this happens, you will see which tire is losing pressure on the multiinformation display along with a

‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’ message.

394 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０８１４：３８：２８３１ＴＬ１６０００４００



TPMS System Failure

If any of the tires has low pressure, the tire pressure monitor also shows the above message to warn you about the low tire pressure when you select the display by pressing the

INFO button several times.

Following this display, press the

SEL/RESET button to see each tire pressure. When you continue driving after installing the spare tire, you will also see this message on the multiinformation display.

If there is a problem with the TPMS, the tire pressure monitor shows a

‘‘SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR’’ message and the tire pressure readings are not displayed. If this happens, you will first see a system warning message ‘‘CHECK TPMS

SYSTEM’’ on the multi-information display.

2009 TSX

If there is a problem with the TPMS, you will see the above message on the multi-information display.

If you see this message, the system is off and is not monitoring the tire pressures. Have the system checked by your dealer as soon as possible.

CONTINUED

395

０８／０２／０６２１：２９：２９３１ＴＬ１６０００４０１



Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator begins to flash, then stays on (see page 393 ).

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on, or the multiinformation display shows a

‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message, the VSA system automatically turns on even when the VSA system is turned off by pressing the VSA OFF switch (see page 399 ). If this happens, you cannot turn the VSA system off by pressing the VSA OFF switch again.

When you restart the vehicle with the compact spare tire, the TPMS system message will also be displayed on the multi-information display after several miles

(kilometers) driving.

Changing a Tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS and tire monitor indicators will come on. Replace the indicated flat tire with the compact spare tire (see page 458 ).

After the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/

TPMS indicator stays on while driving. After several miles

(kilometers) driving, this indicator begins to flash, then stays on again.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS

SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display. This is normal; the system cannot monitor the spare tire pressure. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure it is correct.

This indicator and the warning message on the multi-information display will go off, after several miles

(kilometers) driving, when the spare tire is replaced with the specified regular tire equipped with the tire pressure monitor sensor.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by your dealer or a qualified technician.

396 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２９：３５３１ＴＬ１６０００４０２



Never use a puncture-repairing agent in a flat tire. If used, you will have to replace the tire pressure sensor.

Have the flat tire repaired by your dealer as soon as possible.









2009 TSX 397

０８／０２／０６２１：２９：４７３１ＴＬ１６０００４０３


Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

The vehicle stability assist (VSA) system helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than desired. It also assists you in maintaining traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces. It does this by regulating the engine’s output and by selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator in the same way it does at other times. There may also be some noise from the VSA hydraulic system. You will also see the VSA activation indicator blink.

The VSA system cannot enhance the vehicle’s driving stability in all situations and does not control your vehicle’s entire braking system. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

VSA Activation Indicator

When VSA activates, you will see the

VSA Activation indicator blink.

Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA) System Indicator

If this indicator comes on while driving, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, and turn off the engine. Reset the system by restarting the engine. If the VSA system indicator stays on or comes back on while driving, have the VSA system inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position, there may be a problem with the VSA system. Have your dealer inspect your vehicle as soon as possible.

When the VSA system indicator comes on, you will also see a

‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display.

NOTE: The main function of the

VSA system is generally known as

Electronic Stability Control (ESC).

The system also includes a traction control function.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on (see page 392 ), or the multi-information display shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message with the indicator flashing

(see page 395 ), the VSA system automatically turns on even if the

VSA system is turned off with the

VSA OFF switch. In this case, you cannot turn the VSA system off by pressing the VSA OFF switch again.

398 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：２９：５８３１ＴＬ１６０００４０４


Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

Without VSA, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement.

VSA Of f Switch

VSA OFF SWITCH

This switch is under the driver’s side vent. To turn the VSA system on and off, press and hold it until you hear a beep.

When VSA is off, the VSA activation indicator comes on as a reminder.

Press and hold the switch again. It turns the system back on.

VSA is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA temporarily switched off. When the VSA system is off, the traction control system is also off. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA off if you are not able to free it when the

VSA is on.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA and traction control systems switched off.

VSA and Tire Sizes

Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the VSA to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are of the same size and type as your original tires (see page 452 ).

If you install winter tires, make sure they are the same size as those that were originally supplied with your vehicle. Exercise the same caution during winter driving as you would if your vehicle was not equipped with

VSA.

2009 TSX 399

０８／０２／０６２１：３０：０８３１ＴＬ１６０００４０５

Main Menu

Towing a Trailer

Table Of Contents

Your vehicle has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo. You can also use it to tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the guidelines in this section.

Break-In Period

Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)

(see page 356 ).

Load Limits

Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive.

Total Trailer Weight: The maximum allowable weight of the trailer and everything in or on it must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).

Towing a load that is too heavy can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling and performance. It can also damage the engine and drivetrain.

Tongue Load: The weight that the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer puts on the hitch should be approximately 10% of the total trailer weight. Too much tongue load reduces front-tire traction and steering control. Too little tongue load can make the trailer unstable and cause it to sway.

400 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３０：２２３１ＴＬ１６０００４０６


To achieve a proper tongue load, start by loading 60% of the load toward the front of the trailer and

40% toward the rear, then re-adjust the load as needed.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load is:


4,475 lbs (2,030 kg)


4,395 lbs (1,995 kg)


Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axles is:


2,410 lbs (1,095 kg) on the front axle

2,090 lbs (950 kg) on the rear axle


2,325 lbs (1,055 kg) on the front axle

2,090 lbs (950 kg) on the rear axle

Checking Loads

The best way to confirm that all loads are within limits is to check them at a public scale. For public scales in your area, check your local phone book, or contact your trailer dealer or rental agency for assistance.

If you cannot get to a public scale, you can estimate the total trailer weight by adding the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer) with everything in or on the trailer.

If you normally pull the same load each time you tow a trailer, you can use a suitable scale or a special tongue load gauge to check the tongue load the first time you set up a towing combination (a fully loaded vehicle and trailer), then recheck the tongue load whenever the conditions change.

2009 TSX 401

０８／０２／０６２１：３０：３４３１ＴＬ１６０００４０７

Main Menu


Table Of Contents

Towing Equipment and

Accessories

Towing can require a variety of equipment, depending on the size of your trailer, how it will be used, how much load you are towing, and where you tow.

To ensure the best quality, we recommend that you purchase Acura equipment whenever possible.

Discuss your needs with your trailer sales or rental agency, and follow the guidelines in this section. Also make sure that all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province, and local regulations.

Hitches

Any hitch used on your vehicle must be properly bolted to the underbody.

Saf ety Chains

Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Make sure the chains are secured to the trailer and hitch, and that they cross under the tongue and can catch the trailer if it becomes unhitched. Leave enough slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily, but do not let the chains drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric.

Surge brakes are common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet.

If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated.

Do not attempt to tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system. No matter how successful it may seem, any attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic system will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard.

See your trailer dealer or rental agency for more information on installing electric brakes.

402 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３０：４６３１ＴＬ１６０００４０８



Trailer Lights

Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province, and local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agencies for the requirements in the area where you plan to tow, and use only equipment designed for your vehicle.

Since lighting and wiring vary by trailer type and brand, you should have a qualified technician install a suitable connector between the vehicle and the trailer. Improper equipment or installation can cause damage to your vehicle’s electrical system and affect your vehicle warranty.

Additional Towing Equipment

Many states and Canadian provinces require special outside mirrors when towing a trailer. Even if they don’t, you should install special mirrors if you cannot clearly see behind you, or if the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation.

Pre-Tow Checklist

When preparing to tow, and before driving away, be sure to check the following:

The vehicle has been properly serviced, and the suspension and the cooling system are in good operating condition.

The trailer has been properly serviced and is in good condition.

All weights and loads are within limits.

The hitch, safety chains, and any other attachments are secure.

All items in or on the trailer are properly secured and cannot shift while you drive.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

403

０８／０２／０６２１：３０：５６３１ＴＬ１６０００４０９

Main Menu


Table Of Contents

The lights and brakes on your vehicle and the trailer are working properly.

Your vehicle tires and spare are properly inflated, and the trailer tires and spare are inflated as recommended by the trailer maker.

Driving Saf ely With a Trailer

The added weight, length, and height of a trailer will affect your vehicle’s handling and performance, so driving with a trailer requires some special driving skills and techniques.

For your safety and the safety of others, take time to practice driving maneuvers before heading for the open road, and follow the guidelines in this section.

Towing Speeds and Gears

Drive slower than normal in all driving situations, and obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.

Do not exceed the limited speed when towing a trailer. At higher speeds, the trailer may sway or affect vehicle handling (see ‘‘ Driving on Hills ’’ in the next page for additional gear information).

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, use the D position when towing a trailer on level roads.

404 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３１：０８３１ＴＬ１６０００４１０



On models with automatic transmission

When driving uphill and downhill, use the S position (without using the paddle shifters) to provide the proper engine power and engine braking on each gear. You can also use the paddle shifters. In this case, select third, second, or first gear with the paddle shifter; depending on the vehicle speeds and road condition. Do not use fourth and fifth gears. The recommended speed range for each gear position is shown in the table.

Gear position

1

2, 3

Speed range

0 − 42 mph

(0 − 67 km/h)

19 − 62 mph

(30 − 100 km/h)

If the automatic transmission fluid temperature increases and exceeds the specified limit, the transmission will also automatically downshift to the first gear even with the

Sequential Sportshift Mode. This prevents the automatic transmission from overheating. In this case, the gear position ‘‘1’’ next to the ‘‘M’’ indicator in the instrument panel blinks about for five seconds, then it stays on.

Making Turns and Braking

Make turns more slowly and wider than normal. The trailer tracks a smaller arc than your vehicle, and it can hit or run over something the vehicle misses. Allow more time and distance for braking. Do not brake or turn suddenly as this could cause the trailer to jackknife or turn over.

Driving on Hills

When climbing hills, closely watch your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn the air conditioning off, reduce speed and, if necessary, pull to the side of the road to let the engine cool.

When driving down hills, reduce your speed and always apply engine braking by shifting down. If your vehicle has a manual transmission, when going down a steep hill, use the second gear to provide greater engine braking.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

405

０８／０２／０６２１：３１：１８３１ＴＬ１６０００４１１

Main Menu


Table Of Contents

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, when driving down hills, reduce your speed and use the

S mode. You can also use the paddle shifters to change the gear position.

Select third, second or first gear depending on the vehicle speeds and road condition. When going down a steep hill, use second gear to provide greater engine braking. Shift down to first gear when driving up steep hills.

Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and remember, it will take longer to slow down and stop when towing a trailer.

If you must stop when facing uphill, use the foot brake or parking brake.

Do not try to hold the vehicle in place by pressing on the accelerator, as this can cause the automatic transmission to overheat.

Make sure to set the parking brake when starting off on an incline.

Handling Crosswinds and Buf f eting

Crosswinds and air turbulence caused by passing trucks can disrupt your steering and cause the trailer to sway. When being passed by a large vehicle, keep a constant speed, and steer straight ahead. Do not try to make quick steering or braking corrections.

Backing Up

Always drive slowly and have someone guide you when backing up.

Grip the bottom of the steering wheel, then turn the wheel to the left to get the trailer to move to the left. Turn the wheel to the right to move the trailer to the right.

Parking

Follow all normal precautions when parking, including firmly setting the parking brake and putting the transmission in Park (automatic) or in 1st or reverse (manual). Also, place wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s tires.

Towing Your Vehicle

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, see page 481 .

406 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３１：２４３１ＴＬ１６０００４１２

Main Menu

Maintenance

This section explains why it is important to keep your vehicle well maintained and how to follow basic maintenance safety precautions.

This section also includes instructions on how to read the maintenance minder messages on the multi-information display, and instructions for simple maintenance tasks you may want to take care of yourself.

If you have the skills and tools to perform more complex maintenance tasks on your vehicle, you may want to purchase the service manual. See page 505 for information on how to obtain a copy, or see your dealer.

Maintenance Safety ......................

Maintenance Minder ....................

.

.

408

409

Fluid Locations ..............................

.

418

Adding Engine Oil ........................

Changing the Engine Oil and

.

419

Filter ...........................................

Engine Coolant ..............................

.

.

421

423

Windshield Washers

Transmission Fluid

....................

.......................

.

424

.

425

Automatic Transmission ..........

.

425

Manual Transmission

Brake and Clutch Fluid

..............

.

427

................

.

428

Lights .............................................

Cleaning the Seat Belts ................

.

.

430

442

Floor Mats .....................................

Dust and Pollen Filter ..................

.

.

442

443

Exterior Care .................................

.

443

Wiper Blades

Tires

.................................

...............................................

.

444

.

447

Checking the Battery

Vehicle Storage

...................

.............................

.

454

.

455

2009 TSX 407

０８／０２／０６２１：３１：３６３１ＴＬ１６０００４１３


Maintenance Safety

All service items not detailed in this section should be performed by a certified technician or other qualified mechanic.

Important Saf ety Precautions

To eliminate potential hazards, read the instructions before you begin, and make sure you have the tools and skills required.

Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.

Improperly maintaining this vehicle, or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations and schedules in this owner’s manual.

Potential Vehicle Hazards

Carbon Monoxide poison f rom engine exhaust.

Be sure there is adequate ventilation whenever you operate the engine.

Burns f rom hot parts.

Let the engine and exhaust system cool down before touching any parts.

408 2009 TSX

Injury f rom moving parts.

not run the engine unless instructed to do so.

Do

Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner’s manual.

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task.

０８／０２／０６２１：３１：４６３１ＴＬ１６０００４１４



Your vehicle displays engine oil life and maintenance service items on the multi-information display to show you when you should have your dealer perform engine oil replacement and indicated maintenance service.

Based on the engine operating conditions, the onboard computer in your vehicle calculates the remaining engine oil life and displays it as a percentage.

Engine Oil Lif e Display

ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY

REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE

To see the current engine oil life displayed on the multi-information display, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and press the

SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly until engine oil life is displayed.

The remaining engine oil life is shown on the display according to this table:

Calculated Engine

Oil Life (%)

100%

90%

80%

70%

−

−

−

−

91%

81%

71%

61%

60% − 51%

50% − 41%

40% − 31%

30% − 21%

20% − 16%

15% − 11%

10% − 6%

5% − 1%

0%

Displayed

Engine Oil Life

(%)

100%

90%

80%

70%

60%

50%

40%

30%

20%

15%

10%

5%

0%

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

409

０８／０２／０６２１：３１：５５３１ＴＬ１６０００４１５



MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM CODE(S)

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM CODE(S)

When the remaining engine oil life is

15 to 6 percent, the multi-information display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE

SOON’’ message along with the maintenance item code(s) indicating the main and sub items required at the time of the oil change. Refer to page 417 for a complete list of the maintenance main items and sub items.

Pressing either INFO button ( ▲ ▼ ) switches the display from the message to another display. Once you switch the display, this message will go off.

Along with the message, the system message indicator comes on (see page 67 ).

The message appears on the multiinformation display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position.

This message reminds you that your vehicle will soon be due for scheduled maintenance.

SUB ITEM(S)

MAIN ITEM(S) REMAINING ENGINE

OIL LIFE

Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life information. Along with the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message, you will see the percentage of the remaining engine oil life and the maintenance item codes on the multi-information display.

410 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３２：０２３１ＴＬ１６０００４１６


Pressing either INFO button ( ▲ ▼ ) switches the display from the message to another display. To see the message again, press either

INFO button repeatedly.


When the remaining oil life is 5 to 1 percent, the multi-information display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE

NOW’’ message with the same maintenance items ‘‘SERVICE DUE

SOON’’ was displayed with. When you see this message, have the indicated maintenance performed as soon as possible.

2009 TSX

Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life. The message

‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with ‘‘5%,’’ and the maintenance item code are displayed on the multi-information display when the calculated engine oil life is

1 − 5 percent (see page 409 ).

CONTINUED

411

０８／０２／０６２１：３２：０９３１ＴＬ１６０００４１７



If the indicated maintenance service is not done and the remaining engine oil life reaches 0%, the multiinformation display will show the message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ and the maintenance item code(s).

This message is displayed when the total mileage is less than 10 miles

(for U.S. models) or 10 km (for

Canadian models) after the engine oil life became 0%.

These messages will come on every time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

Immediately have the service performed, and make sure to reset the display as described on page 414 .



Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life. The message

‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with ‘‘0%,’’ and the maintenance item code are displayed on the multi-information display when the calculated engine oil life is

0 − 1 percent.

412 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３２：１７３１ＴＬ１６０００４１８



U.S.

TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE

CANADA

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)

If the indicated required service is not done and the remaining engine oil life becomes 0%, the multiinformation display will show a

‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message, the total mileage after the remaining oil life became 0%, and the maintenance item code(s).

This message is displayed when you drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian models) after seeing the 0% message.

Immediately have the service performed, and make sure to reset the display as described on page 414 .



U.S.

CANADA

TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE

When you press the SEL/RESET button to select the engine oil life, the message ‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with the maintenance item code(s) and the total negative mileage after the oil life became 0%, will be displayed on the multi-information display.

2009 TSX 413

０８／０２／０６２１：３２：２７３１ＴＬ１６０００４１９



Maintenance Main Items and Sub

Items

MESSAGE

DISPLAY

ENGINE OIL LIFE

DISPLAY

MAINTENANCE

MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE

SUB ITEMS

All the maintenance items displayed in the multi-information display are in code.

For an explanation of the maintenance codes, see page 417 .

Resetting the Engine Oil Lif e

Display

Your dealer will reset the display after completing the required maintenance service. You will see

‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the next time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

If maintenance service is done by someone other than your dealer, reset the maintenance minder as follows:

1.


(II) position.

SEL/RESET BUTTON

INFO BUTTONS ( ▲ ▼ )

2.

If the engine oil life is not displayed, press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly.

3.

Press and hold the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 10 seconds. The remaining engine oil life reset mode will be shown on the multiinformation display.

414 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３２：３６３１ＴＬ１６０００４２０



4.

Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing the

INFO ( ▲ ▼ ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to reset the engine oil life display. The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and the engine oil life will reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want to cancel the oil life reset mode, select ‘‘CANCEL.’’

Important Maintenance

Precautions

If you have the required service done but do not reset the display, or reset the display without doing the service, the system will not show the proper maintenance intervals. This can lead to serious mechanical problems because you will no longer have an accurate record of when maintenance is needed.

Your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best and can provide competent, efficient service.

However, service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect. Maintenance may be done by any qualified service facility or person who is skilled in this type of automotive service. Keep all receipts as proof of completion, and have the person who does the work fill out your Maintenance Journal or

Canadian Maintenance Log. Check your warranty booklet for more information.

We recommend using Acura parts and fluids whenever you have maintenance done. These are manufactured to the same high quality standards as the original components, so you can be confident of their performance and durability.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

415

０８／０２／０６２１：３２：４６３１ＴＬ１６０００４２１



U.S. Vehicles:

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individual using parts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPA standards.

According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the items marked with ＃ will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the multiinformation display.

416

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

You should check the following items at the specified intervals. If you are unsure of how to perform any check, turn to the appropriate page listed.

Engine oil level − Check every time you fill the fuel tank. See page 361 .

Engine coolant level − Check the radiator reserve tank every time you fill the fuel tank. See page 361 .

Automatic transmission − Check the fluid level monthly. See page

425 .

Brakes − Check the fluid level monthly. See page 428 .

Tires − Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. See page

447 .

2009 TSX

Lights − Check the operation of the headlights, parking lights, taillights, high-mount brake light, and license plate lights monthly.

See page 430 .

０８／０２／０６２１：３２：５６３１ＴＬ１６０００４２２



Symbol

A

B

Maintenance Main Items

Replace engine oil ＊

Inspect front and rear brakes

Check parking brake adjustment

Inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots

Suspension components

Driveshaft boots

Brake hoses and line (including ABS)

All fluid levels and condition of fluids

Exhaust system ＃

Fuel lines and connections ＃

＊ : If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

＃ : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 416 .

NOTE: Independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-information display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

Symbol

1

2

3

4

5

Maintenance Sub Items

Rotate tires

Replace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filter

If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive belt

Replace transmission fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission and transfer temperatures. This requires transmission and transfer fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the maintenance minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission and transfer fluid changed at 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). (For A/T only.)

Replace spark plugs

Inspect valve clearance

Replace engine coolant

2009 TSX 417

０８／０２／０６２１：３３：０２３１ＴＬ１６０００４２３

Main Menu

Fluid Locations

Table Of Contents

BRAKE FLUID

(Black cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK

(Orange handle)

WASHER FLUID

(Blue cap)

418

ENGINE COOLANT

RESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

2009 TSX

CLUTCH FLUID

(Manual

Transmission only)

(Light gray cap)

ENGINE OIL

FILL CAP

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION

FLUID DIPSTICK

(Yellow loop)

０８／０２／０６２１：３３：１０３１ＴＬ１６０００４２４


ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Adding Engine Oil

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely. Wait a few minutes, and recheck the oil level on the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill above the upper mark; you could damage the engine.

Recommended Engine Oil

Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity.

Always use a premium-grade 5W-20 detergent oil displaying the API

Certification Seal. This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving, and that it meets the American Petroleum

Institute’s latest requirements.

Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap on top of the valve cover.

Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately. Spilled oil could damage components in the engine compartment.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

419

０８／０２／０６２１：３３：１９３１ＴＬ１６０００４２５

Main Menu

Adding Engine Oil

Table Of Contents

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred

5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is highly recommended that you use

Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for optimum engine protection. Make sure the API Certification Seal says

‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The oil viscosity or weight is provided on the container’s label.

5W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your vehicle to improve cold weather starting and fuel economy.

Synthetic Oil

You may use a synthetic motor oil if it meets the same requirements given for a conventional motor oil: it displays the API Certification Seal and it is the proper weight. You must follow the oil and filter change intervals shown on the multiinformation display.

Engine Oil Additives

Your vehicle does not require any oil additives. Additives may adversely affect the engine or transmission performance and durability.

Ambient Temperature

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

420 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３３：３０３１ＴＬ１６０００４２６


Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

Always change the oil and filter according to the maintenance messages shown on the multiinformation display. The oil and filter collect contaminants that can damage your engine if they are not removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requires special tools and access from underneath the vehicle. The vehicle should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service.

Unless you have the knowledge and proper equipment, you should have this maintenance done by a skilled technician.

1.

Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, then shut it off.

2.

Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap.

BOLT

UNDER COVER

3.

Remove the bolts located on the underside of the body with a wrench, then remove the under cover.

OIL DRAIN BOLT

WASHER

4.

Remove the oil drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine. Drain the oil into an appropriate container.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

421

０８／０２／０６２１：３３：４３３１ＴＬ１６０００４２７


Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

OIL FILTER

5.

Remove the oil filter and let the remaining oil drain. A special wrench (available from your dealer) is required.

Make sure the oil filter gasket is not stuck to the engine block. If it is, remove it before installing a new oil filter.

6.

Install a new oil filter according to the instructions that come with it.

Make sure to clean off any dirt and dust on the connecting surface of a new oil filter.

10.

Let the engine run for several minutes, then check the drain bolt and oil filter for leaks.

7.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt.

Tighten it to:

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

11.

Turn off the engine, let it sit for several minutes, then check the oil level on the dipstick. If necessary, add more oil.

12.

Install the under cover and tighten the bolts securely.

8.

Refill the engine with the recommended oil.

Engine oil change capacity

(including filter):

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

9.

Replace the engine oil fill cap.

Start the engine. The oil pressure indicator should go out within 5 seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work.

Improper disposal of engine oil can be harmf ul to the environment. If you change your own oil, please dispose of the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not discard it in a trash bin or dump it on the ground.

422 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３３：５２３１ＴＬ１６０００４２８


Engine Coolant

Adding Engine Coolant

RESERVE TANK

If the coolant level in the reserve tank is at or below the MIN line, add coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.

Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Always use Honda Long-Life

Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant is pre-mixed with 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Never add straight antifreeze or plain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major-brand non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Make sure it is a high-quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines.

Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with

Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

If you regularly drive your vehicle under severe conditions in very low temperature (under − 31°F, − 35°C), a higher concentration of coolant should be used. Consult your Acura dealer f or more inf ormation of the proper coolant.

If the reserve tank is completely empty, you should also check the coolant level in the radiator.

Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 423

０８／０２／０６２１：３４：０３３１ＴＬ１６０００４２９


Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers

RADIATOR CAP

1.

Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.

2.

Relieve any pressure in the cooling system by turning the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pressing down.

3.

Remove the radiator cap by pushing down and turning counterclockwise.

4.

The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly and carefully so you do not spill any.

Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.

5.

Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.

6.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.

Fill it to halfway between the MAX and MIN marks. Put the cap back on the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or engine components.

Windshield Washers

Check the fluid level in the windshield washer reservoir at least monthly during normal use.

LEVEL GAUGE

Check the reservoir’s fluid level by removing the cap and looking at the level gauge attached to the cap.

424 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３４：１３３１ＴＬ１６０００４３０


Windshield Washers, Transmission Fluid

Canadian models only

If the washer fluid is low, a

‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ message appears on the multi-information display.

Fill the reservoir with a good-quality windshield washer fluid. This increases the cleaning capability and prevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, clean the edges of the windshield wiper blades with windshield washer fluid on a clean cloth. This will help to condition the blade edges.

Do not use engine antif reeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze can damage your vehicle’s paint, while a vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump. Use only commercially-available windshield washer f luid.


DIPSTICK

Check the fluid level with the engine at normal operating temperature.

1.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Start the engine, let it run until the radiator fan comes on, then shut off the engine. For accurate results, wait about 60 seconds (but no longer than 90 seconds) before doing step 2.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 425

０８／０２／０６２１：３４：２７３１ＴＬ１６０００４３１


Transmission Fluid

GUIDE

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

2.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth.

3.

Insert the dipstick all the way back into the transmission securely as shown in the illustration.

4.

Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper and lower marks.

5.

If the level is below the lower mark, add fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to the level between the upper and lower marks.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.

Always use Honda Genuine

ATF-Z1 (automatic transmission fluid).

6.

Insert the dipstick all the way back into the transmission securely as shown in the illustration.

Make sure the rubber cap on the dipstick fits in the dipstick guide and that you push the dipstick in all the way.

The transmission should be drained and refilled with new fluid when this service is shown on a maintenance message in the multi-information display.

If you are not sure how to add fluid, contact your dealer.

Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1

(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do not mix with other transmission f luids.

Using transmission f luid other than

Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause deterioration in transmission operation and durability, and could result in damage to the transmission.

Damage resulting f rom the use of transmission f luid other than Honda

Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the

Acura new vehicle warranty.

426 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３４：３８３１ＴＬ１６０００４３２


Transmission Fluid


FILLER BOLT

BOLT UNDER COVER

Check the fluid level with the transmission at normal operating temperature and the vehicle sitting on level ground.

To check the transmission fluid level, remove the bolts with a wrench, then remove the under cover carefully.

Correct level

Remove the transmission filler bolt, and carefully feel inside the bolt hole with your finger.

The fluid level should be up to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is not, add

Honda Manual Transmission Fluid

(MTF) until it starts to run out of the hole. Reinstall the filler bolt, and tighten it securely.

Reinstall the under cover and tighten the bolts securely. Make sure the under cover is installed under the edge of the front bumper.

If Honda MTF is not available, you may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 viscosity motor oil with the API

Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR

GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a temporary replacement. However, motor oil does not contain the proper additives, and continued use can cause stiffer shifting. Replace as soon as it is convenient.

The transmission should be drained and refilled with new fluid when this service is shown on a maintenance message in the multi-information display.

If you are not sure how to check and add fluid, contact your dealer.

2009 TSX 427

０８／０２／０６２１：３４：４８３１ＴＬ１６０００４３３


Brake and Clutch Fluid

Check the fluid level in the reservoirs monthly. There are up to two reservoirs, depending on the model. They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)

Clutch fluid reservoir

(manual transmission models only)

You will also see the ‘‘BRAKE

FLUID LOW’’ message on the multiinformation display when the brake fluid level is low.

Replace the brake fluid when this service is indicated on a maintenance message in the multi-information display.

Always use Honda Heavy Duty

Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed container, as a temporary replacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid

DOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive damage.

Brake Fluid

MAX MIN

The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. If the level is at or below the MIN mark, your brake system needs attention. Have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads.

428 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３４：５６３１ＴＬ１６０００４３４


Clutch Fluid

Manual Transmission only

MAX

A low fluid level can indicate a leak in the clutch system. Have this system inspected as soon as possible.

Brake and Clutch Fluid

MIN

The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. If it is not, add brake fluid to bring it up to that level.

Use the same fluid specified for the brake system.

2009 TSX 429

０８／０２／０６２１：３５：０４３１ＴＬ１６０００４３５


Lights

Headlight Aiming

The headlights were properly aimed when your vehicle was new. If you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment may be required. Adjustments should be done by your dealer or other qualified technician.

Low Beam Headlight Bulb

Replacement


The low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge tube.

High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the light switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you should not attempt to examine or change a low beam headlight bulb yourself. If a low beam headlight bulb fails, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it replaced.

Replacing a Headlight Bulb

High beam headlights on all models

Low beam headlights on Canadian TSX

Your vehicle has halogen headlight bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.

430 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３５：１４３１ＴＬ１６０００４３６


Lights

Low Beam Headlight

Canadian TSX

1.

To change the passenger’s side bulb, start the engine, turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and turn off the engine. To change the driver’s side bulb, turn the steering wheel to the right.

HOLDING CLIP

COVER

TAB

SCREW

2.

Use a flat-tip screwdriver to remove the holding clip from the inner fender, and remove the screw with a Phillips-head screwdriver.

3.

Pull the inner fender cover away from the fender and bumper.

4.

Remove the cover on the back of the headlight assembly by turning the tab counterclockwise.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

431

０８／０２／０６２１：３５：２５３１ＴＬ１６０００４３７


Lights

5.

Unclip the end of the hold-down wire from its slot. Pivot it out of the way.

6.

Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling the connector straight back, then remove the bulb.

7.

Insert the new bulb into the hole, making sure the tabs are in their slots.

8.

Push the electrical connector onto the new bulb. Make sure it is connected securely.

9.

Pivot the hold-down wire back in place, and clip the end into the slot.

10.

Reinstall the cover over the back of the headlight assembly and turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

11.

Turn on the headlights to test the new bulb.

12.

Put the inner fender cover in place.

Install the holding clip. Lock it in place by pushing on the center.

Tighten the screw securely.

High Beam Headlights

STAY

1.

Open the hood.

To change the turn signal bulb on the passenger’s side, remove the engine coolant reserve tank by pulling it out of its stay.

432 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３５：３７３１ＴＬ１６０００４３８


Lights

COVER

AIR INTAKE DUCT

To change a bulb on the left side, remove the two fasteners by turning the head of each fastener with a flat-tip screwdriver, then remove the cover and upper part of the air intake duct.

2.

Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pushing on the tab to unlock it, then slide the connector off the bulb.

3.

Remove the bulb by turning it approximately one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

4.

Install the new bulb, and turn it one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

5.

Push the electrical connector back onto the bulb. Make sure it is on all the way.

6.

Turn on the headlights to test the new bulb.

7.

On the passenger’s side

Reinstall the coolant reserve tank.

On the driver’s side

Reinstall the fasteners. Reinstall the cover and upper part of the air intake duct securely.

2009 TSX 433

０８／０２／０６２１：３５：４６３１ＴＬ１６０００４３９


Lights

Replacing a Front Turn Signal/

Parking and Side Marker Light

Bulb

1.

To change the bulb on the driver’s side, start the engine, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right, then turn off the engine. To change the bulb on the passenger’s side, turn the steering wheel to the left.

HOLDING CLIP

SCREW

2.

Use a flat-tip screwdriver to remove the holding clip from the inner fender, and remove the screw with a Phillips-head screwdriver.

3.

Pull the inner fender cover away from the fender and bumper.

4.

Remove the socket from the headlight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

5.

To remove the burned out bulb, push it in and turn it counterclockwise until it unlocks.

434 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３５：５１３１ＴＬ１６０００４４０


6.

Install the new bulb and turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

7.

Insert the socket back into the headlight assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

8.

Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.

9.

Put the inner fender cover in place.

Install the holding clip. Lock it in place by pushing on the center.

Tighten the screw securely.

2009 TSX

Lights

435

０８／０２／０６２１：３６：０１３１ＴＬ１６０００４４１


Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs

(In Fenders)

COVER

1.

Open the trunk.

2.

Remove the light assembly cover by pulling its outside edge.

3.

Determine which of the three bulbs is burned out: stop/taillight, rear side-marker, or turn signal light.

4.

Remove the socket by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise, and pull the bulb straight out of its socket.

436 2009 TSX

5.

Push a new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms, and reinstall the socket into the light assembly by turning it clockwise until it locks.

6.

Test the new bulb to make sure it works.

7.

Reinstall the light assembly cover.

０８／０２／０６２１：３６：１２３１ＴＬ１６０００４４２


Replacing a Back-up Light Bulb

(in Trunk Lid)

Lights

SOCKET

FASTENERS

1.

Open the trunk.

2.

To replace a bulb on either side, remove the two fasteners on the left side, or a fastener on the right side.

3.

Pull back the appropriate corner of the trunk lid lining carefully.

4.

Remove the socket by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

5.

Pull the bulb straight out of its socket. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

437

０８／０２／０６２１：３６：１９３１ＴＬ１６０００４４３


Lights

6.

Insert the socket back into the light assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

7.

Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.

8.

Reinstall the trunk lid lining. Make sure it is installed under the edge of the trunk seal.

9.

Install the fasteners.

Side Turn Signal Lights

Each outside mirror has side turn signal lights. The lights should be replaced by your dealer.

Rear License Plate Light Bulbs

The license plate has two lights above it. The bulbs should be replaced by your dealer.

438 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３６：２５３１ＴＬ１６０００４４４


Replacing the High-mount Brake

Light

3.

Reinstall the socket. Turn it clockwise until it locks. Make sure the new bulb is working.

1.

Open the trunk, and remove the socket from the light assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

2.

Pull the bulb straight out of its socket. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms.

2009 TSX

Lights

439

０８／０２／０６２１：３６：３３３１ＴＬ１６０００４４５


Lights

Replacing a Fog Light Bulb

If equipped

Your vehicle uses halogen light bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle it by its plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

HOLDING CLIPS

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.

The fog lights were properly aimed when your vehicle was new. If you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment may be required. Adjustment should be done by your dealer or other qualified technician.

UNDER COVER

1.

Remove the three holding clips with a flat-tip screwdriver.

2.

Pull down the under cover from the bumper carefully.

440 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３６：４２３１ＴＬ１６０００４４６


3.

Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pushing on the tab and pulling the connector down.

4.

Remove the bulb from the fog light assembly by turning it onequarter turn counterclockwise.

5.

Install the new bulb into the hole and turn it one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

6.

Push the electrical connector back onto the bulb. Make sure it is on all the way.

7.

Turn on the fog lights to test the new bulb.

8.

Reinstall the holding clips, and push in its head of each clip.

2009 TSX

Lights

441

０８／０２／０６２１：３６：５０３１ＴＬ１６０００４４７


Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

Cleaning the Seat Belts

OPENING

Dirt build-up around the openings of the seat belt anchors can cause the belts to retract slowly. Wipe the openings with a clean cloth dampened in mild soap and warm water or isopropyl alcohol.

Floor Mats

To unlock

If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean them. Do not use bleach, dye, or cleaning solvents. Let the belts air dry before you use the vehicle.

Driver’s floor mat is shown.

The driver’s floor mat that came with your vehicle hooks over the floor mat anchors. To lock each hook, turn the knob clockwise. This keeps the floor mat from sliding forward and possibly interfering with the pedals.

When cleaning or replacing, turn the knob counterclockwise to unhook the floor mat.

442 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３６：５９３１ＴＬ１６０００４４８


Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter, Exterior Care

If you remove a floor mat, make sure to re-anchor it when you put it back in your vehicle.

If you use a non-Acura floor mat, make sure it fits properly and that it can be used with the floor mat anchors. Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mats.

Make sure the rear floor mats are properly positioned. If not, the floor mat will prevent the seat operation and make the front passenger’s weight sensors ineffective.

Dust and Pollen Filter

This filter removes the dust and pollen that is brought in from the outside through the climate control system.

Have your dealer replace the filter when this service is indicated by a maintenance message on the multiinformation display. It should be replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air, or if the flow from the climate control system becomes less than usual.

Exterior Care

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle.

2009 TSX 443

０８／０２／０６２１：３７：０８３１ＴＬ１６０００４４９


Wiper Blades

Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.

Replace them if you find signs of cracking in the rubber, areas that are getting hard, or if they leave streaks and unwiped areas when used.

WIPER BLADES

444

To replace a wiper blade:

1.

Raise each wiper arm off the windshield, lifting the driver’s side first, then the passenger’s side.

LOCK TAB

2.

Disconnect the blade assembly from the wiper arm:

Put a cloth on the edge of the lock tab, then push up on the lock tab carefully with a flat-tip screwdriver.

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised, or you will damage the hood and wiper arms.

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３７：１７３１ＴＬ１６０００４５０


Pivot the blade assembly toward the wiper arm until it releases from the wiper arm.

When replacing a wiper blade, make sure not to drop the wiper blade or wiper arm down on the windshield.

BLADE

3.

Remove the blade from its holder by grabbing the tabbed end of the blade. Pull firmly until the tabs come out of the holder.

Wiper Blades

4.

Examine the new wiper blades. If they have no plastic or metal reinforcement along the back edge, remove the metal reinforcement strips from the old wiper blade, and install them in the slots along the edge of the new blade.

REINFORCEMENT

TOP

BLADE

2009 TSX

Make sure the three rubber tabs inside the blade fit to each notch of the reinforcement, as shown.

CONTINUED

445

０８／０２／０６２１：３７：２５３１ＴＬ１６０００４５１


Wiper Blades

TAB

6.

Slide the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm. Push down the lock tab. Make sure the wiper blade assembly locks in place.

7.

Lower the wiper arm down against the windshield, the passenger’s side first, then the driver’s side.

INDENT

5.

Place the top of the wiper blade on the end of the blade assembly, and slide the blade onto the assembly in the direction pointed to by the arrow.

Make sure the tab on the blade assembly fits in the indent of the wiper blade and the blade is completely installed.

446 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３７：３７３１ＴＬ１６０００４５２


Tires

To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give more detailed information on how to take care of your tires and what to do when they need to be replaced.

Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.

Inf lation Guidelines

Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best combination of handling, tread life, and riding comfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make your vehicle ride more harshly, are more prone to damage from road hazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) will warn you when a tire pressure is low. See page information on the TPMS.

392 for

Even though your vehicle is equipped with TPMS, we recommend that you visually check your tires every day. If you think a tire might be low, check it immediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the air pressure in each tire at least once a month. Even tires that are in good condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to

20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month. Remember to check the spare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when the tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6

km). Add or release air, if needed, to match the recommended cold tire pressures on the next page.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

447

０８／０２／０６２１：３７：５２３１ＴＬ１６０００４５３


Tires

If you check air pressures when the tires are hot [driven for several miles

(kilometers)], you will see readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4

kgf/cm ) higher than the cold readings. This is normal. Do not let air out to match the recommended cold air pressure. The tire will be underinflated.

You should get your own tire pressure gauge and use it whenever you check your tire pressures. This will make it easier for you to tell if a pressure loss is due to a tire problem and not due to a variation between gauges.

While tubeless tires have some ability to self-seal if they are punctured, you should look closely for punctures if a tire starts losing pressure.

Recommended Tire Pressures

The following chart shows the recommended cold tire pressures for most normal driving conditions.

Tire Size

P225/50R17 93V

Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving

Front/Rear:

33 psi (230 kPa ,

2.3 kgf/cm )

The compact spare tire pressure is:

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

For convenience, the recommended tire sizes and cold tire pressures are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information about your tires, see page 491 .

High Speed Driving

We strongly recommend that you do not drive faster than the posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you ever drive in a sanctioned competitive event at sustained high speeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/h), be sure to adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below. If you do not, excessive heat can build up and cause sudden tire failure.

Tire Size

P225/50R17 93V

Cold Tire Pressure

35 psi (240 kPa ,

2.4 kgf/cm )

448 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３８：０３３１ＴＬ１６０００４５４


Tires

Tire Inspection

Every time you check inflation, you should also examine the tires for damage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread or side of the tire. Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace the tire if you can see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

Your tires have wear indicators molded into the tread. When the tread wears down, you will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the tread. This shows there is less than

1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire.

A tire this worn gives very little traction on wet roads. You should replace the tire if you can see three or more tread wear indicators.

Tire Service Lif e

The service life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including, but not limited to, driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to your regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. It is also recommended that all tires, including the spare, be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

2009 TSX 449

０８／０２／０６２１：３８：１０３１ＴＬ１６０００４５５


Tires

The last four digits of the TIN (tire identification number) are found on the sidewall of the tire and indicate the date of manufacture (See

Labeling on page 491 ).

Tire

Tire Maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. A tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel. When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This increases riding comfort and tire life. For best results, have the installer perform a dynamic balance.

Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use only Acura wheel weights f or balancing.

450 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３８：２０３１ＴＬ１６０００４５６


Tires

Tire Rotation

Front

(For non-directional tires and wheels)

(For directional tires and wheels)

To help increase tire life and distribute wear more evenly, rotate the tires according to the maintenance messages displayed on the multi-information display. Move the tires to the positions shown in the illustration each time they are rotated. If you purchase directional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

When the tires are rotated, make sure the air pressures are checked.

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Replace your tires with radial tires of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on your vehicle can reduce braking ability, traction, and steering accuracy. Using tires of a different size or construction can cause the

ABS and vehicle stability assist system (VSA) to work inconsistently.

The ABS and VSA system work by comparing the speed of each wheel.

When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Tire size and construction can affect wheel speed and may cause the system to activate.

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that is not possible or necessary, replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair.

Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

451

０８／０２／０６２１：３８：３１３１ＴＬ１６０００４５７


Tires

If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMS specific wheels. If you do not, the tire pressure monitoring system will not work.

Replacement wheels are available at your dealer.

Wheel and Tire Specif ications

Wheel:

17 x 7 1/2 J

Tire:

P225/50R17 93V

See page 489 for DOT tire quality grading information, and page

491 for tire size information.

Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner’s manual.

Winter Driving

Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All

Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for most winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowy or icy conditions, you should install snow tires or tire chains. They may be required by local laws under certain conditions.

Snow Tires

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels. The traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may be lower than your original tires.

Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

452 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３８：４１３１ＴＬ１６０００４５８


Tires

Tire Chains

Mount tire chains on your tires when required by driving conditions or local laws. Install them only on the front tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, Acura strongly recommends using the chains listed below, made by Security Chain

Company (SCC).

Cable-type : SCC Radial Chain

SC1034

When installing cables, follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and mount them as tight as you can.

Make sure they are not contacting the brake lines or suspension. Drive slowly with them installed. If you hear them coming into contact with the body or chassis, stop and investigate. Remove them as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.

Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.

2009 TSX

Wheels

Clean the wheels as you would the rest of the exterior. Wash them with the same solution, and rinse them thoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff brush can damage the clear-coat. To clean the wheels, use a mild detergent and a soft brush or sponge.

453

０８／０２／０６２１：３８：４９３１ＴＬ１６０００４５９


Checking the Battery

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

Check the condition of the battery monthly by looking at the test indicator window. The label on the battery explains the test indicator’s colors.

The location of the test indicator window varies between manufacturers.

Check the terminals for corrosion (a white or yellowish powder). To remove it, cover the terminals with a solution of baking soda and water. It will bubble up and turn brown. When this stops, wash it off with plain water. Dry off the battery with a cloth or paper towel. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance is needed, see your dealer or a qualified technician.

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds.

Wash your hands af ter handling.

If you need to connect the battery to a charger, disconnect both cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system. Always disconnect the negative ( − ) cable first, and reconnect it last.

The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do the battery maintenance.

454 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３９：０４３１ＴＬ１６０００４６０


If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected, or goes dead, the time setting may be lost. To reset the time, see page 290 .

If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead, the audio system may disable itself. The next time you turn on the radio, you will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the frequency display. Use the preset buttons to enter the code (see page

289 ).

On vehicles with navigation system

The navigation system will also disable itself. The next time you turn on the ignition switch, the system will require you to enter a PIN before it can be used. Refer to the navigation system manual.

Vehicle Storage

If you need to park your vehicle for an extended period (more than 1 month), there are several things you should do to prepare it for storage.

Proper preparation helps prevent deterioration and makes it easier to get your vehicle back on the road. If possible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Wash and dry the exterior completely.

Clean the interior. Make sure the carpeting, floor mats, etc., are completely dry.

Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage

Leave the parking brake off. Put the transmission in reverse

(manual) or Park (automatic).

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for a longer period, it should be supported on jackstands so the tires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (if the vehicle is being stored indoors).

Disconnect the battery.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

455

０８／０２／０６２１：３９：０９３１ＴＬ１６０００４６１

Main Menu

Vehicle Storage

Table Of Contents

Support the front wiper blade arms with a folded towel or rag so they do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply a silicone spray lubricant to all door and trunk seals. Also, apply a vehicle body wax to the painted surfaces that mate with the door and trunk seals.

Cover the vehicle with a

‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made from a porous material such as cotton. Non-porous materials, such as plastic sheeting, trap moisture, which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run the engine until it reaches full operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle on and off twice). Preferably, do this once a month.

456 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３９：１４３１ＴＬ１６０００４６２

Main Menu

Taking Care of the Unexpected

This section covers the more common problems that motorists experience with their vehicles. It gives you information about how to safely evaluate the problem and what to do to correct it. If the problem has stranded you on the side of the road, you may be able to get going again.

If not, you will also find instructions on getting your vehicle towed.

Compact Spare Tire

Changing a Flat Tire

......................

.

458

....................

.

459

If the Engine Won’t Start

Jump Starting

.............

................................

.

464

.

466

If the Engine Overheats ..............

Low Oil Pressure Indicator .........

.

.

468

470

Charging System Indicator ..........

.

470

Malfunction Indicator Lamp .......

.

471

Readiness Code .........................

.

471

Brake System Indicator ...............

Opening the Fuel Fill Door

.

472

Manually

Fuses

....................................

..............................................

.

473

.

474

Fuse Locations ..............................

.

478

Emergency Towing ......................

.

481

2009 TSX 457

０８／０２／０６２１：３９：２４３１ＴＬ１６０００４６３


Compact Spare Tire

Use the compact spare tire as a temporary replacement only. Get your regular tire repaired or replaced, and put it back on your vehicle as soon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of the compact spare tire every time you check the other tires. It should be inflated to:

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride and less traction on some road surfaces. Use greater caution while driving.

Do not mount snow chains on the compact spare tire.

Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle unless it is the same make and model.

After the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator stays on.

After several miles (kilometers) driving with the spare, this indicator begins to flash, then stays on again. You will also see a

‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page 395 ).

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

Replace the tire when you can see the tread wear indicator bars. The replacement should be the same size and design tire, mounted on the same wheel. The spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular wheel, and the spare wheel is not designed for mounting a regular tire.

458 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３９：３２３１ＴＬ１６０００４６４


Changing a Flat Tire

If you have a flat tire while driving, stop in a safe place to change it.

Drive slowly along the shoulder until you get to an exit or an area that is far away from the traffic lanes.

The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.

1.

Park the vehicle on firm, level and non-slippery ground. Put the transmission in Park (automatic) or reverse (manual). Apply the parking brake.

2.

Turn on the hazard warning lights, and turn the ignition switch to the

LOCK (0) position. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle while you change the tire.

TRUNK FLOOR LID

HANDLE

3.

Open the trunk. Pull up the handle on the trunk floor lid. Raise the lid by lifting it up with the handle, then hook the handle to the trunk opening to keep the lid open.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

459

０８／０２／０６２１：３９：４０３１ＴＬ１６０００４６５



JACK

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

SPARE TIRE JACK

TOOL KIT

CASE

4.

Take the tool kit case out of the trunk.

5.

Unscrew the wing bolt and take the spare tire out of its well.

6.

Take the jack out of the tool kit case.

7.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn with the wheel nut wrench.

460 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：３９：５０３１ＴＬ１６０００４６６


EXTENSION


JACKING POINT

8.

Place the jack under the jacking point nearest the tire you need to change. Turn the end bracket clockwise until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. Make sure the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch.

BRAKE HUB

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

9.

Use the extension and the wheel nut wrench as shown to raise the vehicle until the flat tire is off the ground.

10.

Remove the wheel nuts, then remove the flat tire. Handle the wheel nuts carefully; they may be hot from driving. Place the flat tire on the ground with the outside surface facing up.

11.

Before mounting the spare tire, wipe any dirt off the mounting surface of the wheel and hub with a clean cloth. Wipe the hub carefully; it may be hot from driving.

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 461

０８／０２／０６２１：３９：５８３１ＴＬ１６０００４６７



12.

Put on the spare tire. Put the wheel nuts back on finger-tight, then tighten them in a crisscross pattern with the wheel nut wrench until the wheel is firmly against the hub. Do not try to tighten the wheel nuts fully.

13.

Lower the vehicle to the ground, and remove the jack.

CENTER CAP

14.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely in the same crisscross pattern. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility.

Tighten the wheel nuts to:

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

15.

Remove the center cap before storing the flat tire in the trunk well.

462 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４０：１０３１ＴＬ１６０００４６８


WING BOLT


SPACER CONE

19.

Store the jack and tools in the tool kit case. Place the tool kit case in the flat tire.

For normal tire

For compact spare tire

SPACER CONE

16.

Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well.

17.

Remove the spacer cone from the wing bolt, turn it over, and put it back on the bolt.

TAB

To remove the spacer cone, squeeze the tabs on the wing bolt to disengage it from the center of the spacer cone, then pull the bolt downward.

To install the wing bolt to the spacer cone, reverse this procedure.

18.

Secure the flat tire by screwing the wing bolt back into its hole.

Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and could seriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.

20.

Store the center cap in the trunk.

Make sure it does not get scratched or damaged.

Unhook the handle from the trunk opening and lower the trunk floor lid, then close the trunk lid.

21.

Your vehicle’s original tire has a tire pressure monitoring system sensor. To replace a tire, refer to

Changing a Tire with TPMS page 396 ).

(see

2009 TSX 463

０８／０２／０６２１：４０：２０３１ＴＬ１６０００４６９


If the Engine Won’t Start

Diagnosing why the engine won’t start falls into two areas, depending on what you hear when you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position:

You hear nothing, or almost nothing. The engine’s starter motor does not operate at all, or operates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motor operating normally, or the starter motor sounds like it is spinning faster than normal, but the engine does not start up and run.

464

Nothing Happens or the Starter

Motor Operates Very Slowly

When you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, you do not hear the normal noise of the engine trying to start. You may hear a clicking sound, a series of clicks, or nothing at all.

Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.

If you have a manual transmission, the clutch pedal must be pushed all the way to the floor or the starter will not operate. With an automatic transmission, it must be in Park or neutral.


(II) position. Turn on the headlights, and check their brightness. If the headlights are very dim or do not come on at all, the battery is discharged. See

Jump Starting on page 466 .

2009 TSX

Turn the ignition switch to the

START (III) position. If the headlights do not dim, check the condition of the fuses. If the fuses are OK, there is probably something wrong with the electrical circuit for the ignition switch or starter motor. You will need a qualified technician to determine the problem. See

Emergency Towing on page 481 .

If the headlights dim noticeably or go out when you try to start the engine, either the battery is discharged or the connections are corroded. Check the condition of the battery connections (see page 454 ).

You can then try jump starting the vehicle from a booster battery (see page 466 ).

０８／０２／０６２１：４０：２８３１ＴＬ１６０００４７０


The Starter Operates Normally

In this case, the starter motor’s speed sounds normal, or even faster than normal, when you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using a properly coded key? An improperly coded key will cause the immobilizer system indicator in the instrument panel to blink rapidly (see page 121 ).

Are you using the proper starting procedure? Refer to

Engine on page 375

Starting the

.

Do you have fuel? Check the fuel gauge; the low fuel indicator may not be working.

There may be an electrical problem, such as no power to the fuel pump. Check all the fuses

(see page 474 ).

If you find nothing wrong, you will need a qualified technician to find the problem. See

Towing on page

Emergency

481 .

If the Engine Won’t Start

2009 TSX 465

０８／０２／０６２１：４０：３９３１ＴＬ１６０００４７１


Jump Starting

Although this seems like a simple procedure, you should take several precautions.

To jump start your vehicle:

1.

Open the hood, and check the physical condition of the battery.

In very cold weather, check the condition of the electrolyte. If it seems slushy or frozen, do not try jump starting until it thaws.

A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.

You cannot start your vehicle with an automatic transmission by pushing or pulling it.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, the electrolyte inside can f reeze.

Attempting to jump start with a f rozen battery can cause it to rupture.

2.

Turn off all the electrical accessories: climate control, audio system, lights, etc. Put the transmission in neutral (manual) or Park (automatic), and set the parking brake.

BOOSTER BATTERY

The numbers in the illustration show you the order to connect the jumper cables.

3.

Connect one jumper cable to the positive ( ＋ ) terminal on your battery. Connect the other end to the positive ( ＋ ) terminal on the booster battery.

466 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４０：４８３１ＴＬ１６０００４７２


Vehicles with automatic transmission

4.

Connect the second jumper cable to the negative ( − ) terminal on the booster battery. Connect the other end to the engine mounting bolt (automatic) or the transmission mounting bolt

(manual), as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part of the engine.

Vehicles with manual transmission

2009 TSX

Jump Starting

5.

If the booster battery is in another vehicle, have an assistant start that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

6.

Start the vehicle. If the starter motor still operates slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

7.

Once your vehicle is running, disconnect the negative cable from your vehicle, then from the booster battery. Disconnect the positive cable from your vehicle, then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cables away from each other and any metal on the vehicle until everything is disconnected.

Otherwise, you may cause an electrical short.

CONTINUED

467

０８／０２／０６２１：４０：５９３１ＴＬ１６０００４７３


If the Engine Overheats

The pointer of the vehicle’s temperature gauge should stay in the midrange. If it climbs to the red mark, you should determine the reason (hot day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).

You will also see a ‘‘WATER TEMP

HOT’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 69 ).

If your vehicle overheats, you should take immediate action. The only indication may be the temperature gauge climbing to or above the red mark. Or you may see steam or spray coming from under the hood.

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer at the red mark can cause serious damage to the engine.

Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

1.

Safely pull to the side of the road.

Put the transmission in neutral

(manual) or Park (automatic), and set the parking brake. Turn off all accessories, and turn on the hazard warning indicators.

2.

If you see steam and/or spray coming from under the hood, turn off the engine. Wait until you see no more signs of steam or spray, then open the hood.

3.

If you do not see steam or spray, leave the engine running and watch the temperature gauge. If the high heat is due to overloading, the engine should start to cool down almost immediately. If it does, wait until the temperature gauge comes down to the midpoint, then continue driving.

4.

If the temperature gauge stays at the red mark, turn off the engine.

5.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks, such as a split radiator hose.

Everything is still extremely hot, so use caution. If you find a leak, it must be repaired before you continue driving (see Emergency

Towing on page 481 ).

468 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４１：１０３１ＴＬ１６０００４７４


If the Engine Overheats

6.

If you do not find an obvious leak, check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. Add coolant if the level is below the MIN mark.

7.

If there was no coolant in the reserve tank, you may need to add coolant to the radiator. Let the engine cool down until the pointer reaches the middle of the temperature gauge or lower before checking the radiator.

Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

8.

Using gloves or a large heavy cloth, turn the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pushing down, to the first stop. After the pressure releases, push down on the cap, and turn it until it comes off.

9.

Start the engine, and set the temperature to maximum heat

(climate control to AUTO at

‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. If you do not have the proper coolant mixture available, you can add plain water.

Remember to have the cooling system drained and refilled with the proper mixture as soon as you can.

10.

Put the radiator cap back on tightly. Run the engine, and check the temperature gauge. If it goes back to the red mark, the engine needs repair (see

Towing on page

Emergency

481 ).

11.

If the temperature stays normal, check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. If it has gone down, add coolant to the

MAX mark. Put the cap back on tightly.

2009 TSX 469

０８／０２／０６２１：４１：２２３１ＴＬ１６０００４７５


Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure

Indicator

This indicator should never come on when the engine is running. If it starts flashing or stays on, the oil pressure has dropped very low or lost pressure. Serious engine damage is possible, and you should take immediate action.


ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message on the multi-information display when this indicator comes on.

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately. Turn of f the engine as soon as you can saf ely get the vehicle stopped.

1.

Safely pull off the road, and shut off the engine. Turn on the hazard warning indicators.

2.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.

Open the hood, and check the oil level (see page 361 ). An engine very low on oil can lose pressure during cornering and other driving maneuvers.

3.

If necessary, add oil to bring the level back to the full mark on the dipstick (see page 419 ).

4.

Start the engine, and watch the oil pressure indicator. If it does not go out within 10 seconds, turn off the engine. There is a mechanical problem that needs to be repaired before you can continue driving

(see Emergency Towing on page

481 ).

Charging System

Indicator

If the charging system indicator comes on brightly when the engine is running, the battery is not being charged.


CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page 61 ).

Immediately turn off all electrical accessories. Try not to use other electrically operated controls such as the power windows. Keep the engine running; starting the engine will discharge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garage where you can get technical assistance.

470 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４１：３３３１ＴＬ１６０００４７６


Malfunction Indicator Lamp

If this indicator comes on while driving, it means one of the engine’s emissions control systems may have a problem. Even though you may feel no difference in your vehicle’s performance, it can reduce your fuel economy and cause increased emissions. Continued operation may cause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the indicator coming on could be due to a loose or missing fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it clicks at least once. Tightening the cap will not turn the indicator off immediately; it can take several days of normal driving.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly, even though it may turn off as you continue driving, have your vehicle checked by the dealer as soon as possible.

If you keep driving with the malf unction indicator lamp on, you can damage your vehicle’s emissions controls and engine. Those repairs may not be covered by your vehicle’s warranties.

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the malfunction indicator lamp may also come on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.


EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page 60 ).

Readiness Code

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness codes’’ that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set. If they are not

2009 TSX set, the test cannot be completed.

If the battery in your vehicle has been disconnected or gone dead, these codes may be erased. It can take several days of driving under various conditions to set the codes again.

To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, without starting the engine.

The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set.

If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set. If possible, do not take your vehicle for an emissions test until the readiness codes are set.

Refer to Emissions Testing more information (see page for

498 ).

471

０８／０２／０６２１：４１：４２３１ＴＬ１６０００４７７


Brake System Indicator

U.S.

Canada

The brake system indicator normally comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and as a reminder to check the parking brake. It will stay on if you do not fully release the parking brake.

If the brake system indicator comes on while driving, the brake fluid level is probably low. Press lightly on the brake pedal to see if it feels normal.

If it does, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop at a service station (see page 428 ).

You will also see a ‘‘BRAKE FLUID

LOW’’ message on the multiinformation display.

If the fluid level is low, take your vehicle to a dealer, and have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does not feel normal, you should take immediate action. A problem in one part of the system’s dual circuit design will still give you braking at two wheels. You will feel the brake pedal go down much farther before the vehicle begins to slow down, and you will have to press harder on the pedal.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE

SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display when this indicator comes on.

Slow down by shifting to a lower gear, and pull to the side of the road when it is safe. Because of the long distance needed to stop, it is hazardous to drive the vehicle. You should have it towed and repaired as soon as possible (see

Towing on page 481

Emergency

).

If you must drive the vehicle a short distance in this condition, drive slowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator and the VSA system indicator come on with the brake system indicator, have your vehicle inspected by your dealer immediately.

472 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４１：４８３１ＴＬ１６０００４７８


COVER

Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually

If there is a problem with the power door lock system and you cannot unlock the driver’s door, use the release lever behind the left side cover in the trunk.

If you also cannot unlock the trunk due to the power door lock system malfunction, see page 132 and open the trunk manually.

RELEASE LEVER

To open the fuel fill door, pull the release lever rearward.

2009 TSX 473

０８／０２／０６２１：４１：５６３１ＴＬ１６０００４７９


Fuses

INTERIOR (Driver’s side) INTERIOR (Passenger’s side) UNDER-HOOD

NOTCH

FUSE LABEL FUSE BOX

The vehicle’s fuses are contained in three fuse boxes.

The driver’s side interior fuse box is under the dashboard on the driver’s side. The fuse label is attached to the side panel.

The passenger’s side interior fuse box is on the lower passenger’s side panel. To remove the fuse box lid, put your finger in the notch on the lid, and pull it upward slightly, then pull it toward you and take it out of its hinges.

TAB

The under-hood fuse box is on the driver’s side. To open it, push the tabs as shown.

474 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４２：０６３１ＴＬ１６０００４８０


Fuses

Checking and Replacing Fuses

If something electrical in your vehicle stops working, the first thing you should check for is a blown fuse.

Determine from the chart on pages and 480 , or the diagram on the fuse box lid or the fuse label, which fuse or fuses control that component. Check those fuses first, but check all the fuses before deciding that a blown fuse is not the cause. Replace any blown fuses and check if the device works.

1.

Turn the ignition switch to the

LOCK (0) position. Make sure the headlights and all other accessories are off.

2.

On the under-hood and passenger’s side interior fuse boxes, remove the cover from each fuse box.

FUSE

BLOWN

3.

Check each of the large fuses in the under-hood fuse box by looking at the wire inside.

Removing these fuses requires a

Phillips-head screwdriver.

BLOWN

Also check the combined fuse box in the under-hood fuse box.

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

475

０８／０２／０６２１：４２：１４３１ＴＬ１６０００４８１


Fuses

FUSE PULLER BLOWN

4.

Check the smaller fuses in the under-hood fuse box and all the fuses in the interior fuse boxes by pulling out each one with the fuse puller provided on the back of the under-hood fuse box cover.

5.

Look for a blown wire inside the fuse. If it is blown, replace it with one of the spare fuses of the same rating or lower.

FUSE PULLER SPARE FUSES

Your vehicle has spare fuses on the back of the under-hood fuse box cover.

476 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４２：２１３１ＴＬ１６０００４８２


Fuses

If you cannot drive the vehicle without fixing the problem, and you do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse of the same rating or a lower rating from one of the other circuits. Make sure you can do without that circuit temporarily (such as the accessory power socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with a spare fuse that has a lower rating, it might blow out again. This does not indicate anything wrong. Replace the fuse with one of the correct rating as soon as you can.

Replacing a f use with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system. If you do not have a replacement f use with the proper rating f or the circuit, install one with a lower rating.

6.

If the replacement fuse of the same rating blows in a short time, there is probably a serious electrical problem with your vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in that circuit, and have your vehicle checked by a qualified technician.

If the radio fuse is removed, the audio system may disable itself. The next time you turn on the radio, you will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the frequency display. Use the preset buttons to enter the five-digit code

(see page 289 ).

2009 TSX 477

０８／０２／０６２１：４２：３１３１ＴＬ１６０００４８３

Main Menu

Fuse Locations

Table Of Contents

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

No.

1 − 1

1 − 2

2 − 1

2 − 2

2 − 3

2 − 4

2 − 5

Amps.

100 A

40 A

70 A

(40 A)

30 A

−

30 A

Circuits Protected

Battery

Passenger’s Side Fuse Box

EPS

(Passenger’s Side Fuse Box)

ABS/VSA FSR

Not Used

ABS/VSA Motor

No. Amps.

2 − 6

3 − 1

3 − 2

3 − 3

3 − 4

3 − 5

3 − 6

−

30 A

−

30 A

30 A

60 A

30 A

Circuits Protected

Not Used

Wiper

Not Used

Main Fan Motor

Driver’s Side Light Main

(Driver’s Side Fuse Box)

Passenger’s Side Light Main

Amps.

(40 A)

50 A

40 A

20 A

15 A

15 A

10 A

7.5 A

15 A

15 A

−

7.5 A

7.5 A

−

−

40 A

15 A

10 A

−

15 A 12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

8

9

6

7

10

11

No.

3 − 7

3 − 8

4

5

Circuits Protected

Driver’s Side Fuse Box

IG Main

Rear Defroster

Sub Fan Motor

Not Used

Not Used

Heater Motor

Hazard

Horn

Not Used

Stop

IG Coil

FI Sub

Back Up

Interior Lights

FI Main

DBW

Not Used

MG Clutch

Engine Oil Level

478 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４２：４２３１ＴＬ１６０００４８４


INTERIOR FUSE BOX (Driver’s Side)

No.

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

8

Amps.

−

(7.5 A)

15 A

10 A

7.5 A

7.5 A

15 A

(7.5 A)

Circuits Protected

Not Used

Seat Memory

Washer

Wiper

Meter

ABS/VSA

ACG

STS ＊

No.

9

10

11

12

Amps.

20 A

(10 A)

10 A

7.5 A

13

14

15

(7.5 A)

−

7.5 A

Circuits Protected

Fuel Pump

VB SOL ＊

SRS

ODS (Occupant Detection

System)

IG1 ＊

Not Used

Daytime Running Lights

Fuse Locations

No.

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

Amps.

7.5 A

7.5 A

7.5 A

(20 A)

(20 A)

(20 A)

20 A

23

24

25

26

27

20 A

20 A

15 A

(10 A)

10 A

28

29

30

31

32

10 A

10 A

15 A

−

(7.5 A)

A/C

Circuits Protected

Accessory, Key, Lock

Accessory

Driver’s Power Seat Sliding

Moonroof

Driver’s Power Seat Reclining

Rear Driver’s Side Power

Window

Front Accessory Power Socket

Driver’s Power Window

Driver’s Side Door Lock

Left Front Fog Light ＊

Left Side Small Lights

(Exterior)

Left Headlight High Beam

TPMS

Left Headlight Low Beam

Not Used

(Engine Oil Level)

＊ : If equipped

2009 TSX 479

０８／０２／０６２１：４２：５３３１ＴＬ１６０００４８５

Main Menu

Fuse Locations

Table Of Contents

INTERIOR FUSE BOX (Passenger’s Side)

No.

1

2

Amps.

10 A

10 A

7

8

5

6

3

4

(10 A)

15 A

−

7.5 A

−

20 A

Circuits Protected

Right Headlight High Beam

Right Side Small Lights

(Exterior)

Right Front Fog Light ＊

Right Headlight Low Beam

Not Used

Interior Lights

Not Used

Passenger’s Side Power Seat

Reclining

480

No.

9

Amps.

(20 A)

10

11

10 A

20 A

12 20 A

13

14

20 A

−

Circuits Protected

Passenger’s Side Power Seat

Sliding

Right Side Door Lock

Rear Passenger’s Side

Power Window

Rear Accessory Power

Socket

Front Passenger’s Power

Window

Not Used

2009 TSX

19

20

21

22

No. Amps.

15 (20 A)

16

17

18

−

−

−

(20 A)

−

−

−

Circuits Protected

Premium AMP ＊

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Seat Heater

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

＊ : If equipped

０８／０２／０６２１：４３：１１３１ＴＬ１６０００４８６


Emergency Towing

If your vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service or organization. Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous.

There are two ways to tow your vehicle:

Flat-bed Equipment − The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.

This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

Wheel-lif t Equipment − The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground.

This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.

If, due to damage, your vehicle must be towed with the front wheels on the ground, do this:


Release the parking brake.

Shift the transmission to neutral.

Leave the ignition switch in the

ACCESSORY (I) position so the steering wheel does not lock.


Start the engine.

Press on the brake pedal. Move the shift lever through all its positions.

Shift to D position for 5 seconds, then to N.

Turn off the engine.

Release the parking brake.

Leave the ignition switch in the

ACCESSORY (I) position so the steering wheel does not lock.

Improper towing preparation will damage the transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If you cannot shif t the transmission or start the engine (automatic transmission), your vehicle must be transported with the f ront wheels of f the ground.

With the front wheels on the ground, it is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

481

０８／０２／０６２１：４３：１５３１ＴＬ１６０００４８７


Emergency Towing

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage.

The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle’s weight.

The steering system can be damaged if the steering wheel is locked. Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) position, and make sure the steering wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin towing.

482 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４３：２０３１ＴＬ１６０００４８８

Main Menu

Technical Information

The diagrams in this section give you the dimensions and capacities of your vehicle and the locations of the identification numbers. It also includes information you should know about your vehicle’s tires and emissions control systems.

Identification Numbers

Specifications

................

................................

.

484

.

486

DOT Tire Quality Grading

(U. S. Vehicles) .........................

.

489

Tire Labeling .................................

.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

491

(TPMS) − Required Federal

Explanation ............................

.

493

Emissions Controls .......................

.

495

..

497

Emissions Testing ........................

.

498

2009 TSX 483

０８／０２／０６２１：４３：２６３１ＴＬ１６０００４８９


Identification Numbers

Your vehicle has several identifying numbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the 17-digit number your dealer uses to register your vehicle for warranty purposes. It is also necessary for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The easiest place to find the VIN is on a plate fastened to the top of the dashboard. You can see it by looking through the windshield on the driver’s side. It is also on the certification label attached to the driver’s doorjamb, and is stamped on the engine compartment bulkhead. The VIN is also provided in bar code on the certification label.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

CERTIFICATION LABEL

484 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４３：３２３１ＴＬ１６０００４９０


The engine number is stamped into the front of the engine block.

The transmission number is on a label on top of the transmission.

ENGINE NUMBER

Identification Numbers

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

2009 TSX 485

０８／０２／０６２１：４３：５２３１ＴＬ１６０００４９１

Main Menu

Specifications

Table Of Contents

Dimensions

Length

Width

Height

Wheelbase

Track Front

Rear

＊ : Canadian TSX

Weights

Gross vehicle weight rating

Seating Capacities

Total

Front

Rear

Air Conditioning

Refrigerant type

Charge quantity

Lubricant type

Capacities

Fuel tank

186.1 in (4,726 mm)

72.4 in (1,840 mm)

56.7 in (1,440 mm)

56.7 in (1,439 mm)

106.5 in (2,705 mm)

62.2 in (1,580 mm)

62.2 in (1,580 mm)

＊

See the certification label attached to the driver’s doorjamb.

5

2

3

HFC-134a (R-134a)

15.8

− 17.6 oz (450 − 500 g)

SP-10

Approx.

18.5 US gal (70 )

Capacities

Engine coolant

Engine oil

Manual transmission fluid

Automatic transmission fluid

Windshield washer reservoir

Change ＊ 1

Manual

Automatic

Total

Manual

Automatic

Change ＊ 2

Including filter

Without filter

Total

Change

Total

Change

Total

U.S. Models

Canada Models

1.64 US gal (6.2 )

1.61 US gal (6.1 )

2.19 US gal (8.3 )

2.17 US gal (8.2 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

4.0 US qt (3.8 )

5.4 US qt (5.1 )

2.0 US qt (1.9 )

2.1 US qt (2.0 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

6.9 US qt (6.5 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

＊ 1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine

＊ 2 :

Reserve tank capacity: 0.196 US gal (0.74 )

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

486 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４４：１６３１ＴＬ１６０００４９２


Specifications

Battery

Capacity 12 V

12 V

12 V

−

−

−

36 AH/5 HR

45 AH/20 HR

47 AH/20 HR

Fuses

Interior

Under-hood

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

See page 479 or the fuse label attached on the side panel.

See page 480 or the fuse label attached to the inside of the fuse box door.

See page 478 or the fuse box cover.

Engine

Type

Bore x Stroke

Displacement

Compression ratio

Spark plugs

Water cooled 4-stroke, DOHC i-VTEC 4-cylinder, gasoline engine

3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)

NGK:

144 cu-in (2,354 cm )

DENSO:

11.0 : 1

ILZKR7B-11S

SXU22HCR11S

Lights

Headlights High

Low

Fog lights ＊ 3

Front turn signal/

Front parking lights/

Side marker lights

Rear turn signal lights

Stop/Taillights

High-mount brake light

Back-up lights

Rear side marker lights

License plate lights

Ceiling light

Spotlights

Trunk light

Door courtesy lights

Vanity mirror lights

12 V

12 V

12 V

12 V

12 V

−

−

−

−

−

60 W (HB3)

35 W (D2S) ＊ 1

55 W (H1) ＊ 2

55 W (H11)

21/5 W

12 V

12 V

12 V

12 V

12 V

12 V

12 V

12 V

12 V

12 V

12 V

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

21 W

21/5 W

21 W

21 W

3 CP

5 W

8 W

8 W

5 W

3.8 W

2 W

＊ 1 : On vehicles with high voltage discharge type headlights, replacement of a headlight bulb should be done by your dealer.

＊ 2 : Canadian TSX

＊ 3 : If equipped

2009 TSX

CONTINUED

487

０８／０２／０６２１：４４：２４３１ＴＬ１６０００４９３

Main Menu

Specifications

Table Of Contents

Alignment

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Tires

Size

Pressure

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Front/Rear

Spare

Front/Rear

Spare

0.00 in (0.0 mm)

0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°

− 1°

3°48’

P225/50R17 93V

T135/80D16 101M

33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

488 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４４：３４３１ＴＬ１６０００４９４


DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

The tires on your vehicle meet all

U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.

All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to

Department of Transportation

(DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.

Unif orm Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200

Traction AA

Temperature A

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

2009 TSX 489

０８／０２／０６２１：４４：３９３１ＴＬ１６０００４９５


DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.

109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

490 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４４：５２３１ＴＬ１６０００４９６


Tire Labeling

The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below.

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

(1)

Tire Size

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size. Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means.

P225/50R17 93V

P − Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).

225 − Tire width in millimeters.

50 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a percentage of its width).

R − Tire construction code (R indicates radial).

17 − Rim diameter in inches.

93 − Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry).

V − Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).

(3)

(4) (2)

(1) Tire Size

(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN)

(3) Maximum Tire Pressure

(4) Maximum Tire Load

(1)

CONTINUED

2009 TSX 491

０８／０２／０６２１：４５：０２３１ＴＬ１６０００４９７


Tire Labeling

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN)

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the following example.

TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

DOT − This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of

Transportation.

B97R − Manufacturer’s identification mark.

FW6X − Tire type code.

2202 − Date of manufacture.

Year

Week

Maximum Tire Pressure

Max Press − The maximum air pressure the tire can hold.

Maximum Tire Load

Max Load − The maximum load the tire can carry at maximum air pressure.

492 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４５：１１３１ＴＬ１６０００４９８


Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

2009 TSX 493

０８／０２／０６２１：４５：１７３１ＴＬ１６０００４９９


Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.

This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the

TPMS to continue to function properly.

494 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４５：２８３１ＴＬ１６０００５００


Emissions Controls

The burning of gasoline in your vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen

(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).

Gasoline evaporating from the tank also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO, and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of sunlight and climate, NOx and HC react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’

Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a poisonous gas.

The Clean Air Act

The United States Clean Air Act ＊ sets standards for automobile emissions. It also requires that automobile manufacturers explain to owners how their emissions controls work and what to do to maintain them. This section summarizes how the emissions controls work.

＊ In Canada, Acura vehicles comply with the Canadian emission requirements, as specified in an agreement with Environment

Canada, at the time they are manufactured.

Crankcase Emissions Control

System

Your vehicle has a positive crankcase ventilation system. This keeps gasses that build up in the engine’s crankcase from going into the atmosphere. The positive crankcase ventilation valve routes them from the crankcase back to the

2009 TSX intake manifold. They are then drawn into the engine and burned.

Evaporative Emissions Control

System

As gasoline evaporates in the fuel tank, an evaporative emissions control canister filled with charcoal adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this canister while the engine is off. After the engine is started and warmed up, the vapor is drawn into the engine and burned during driving.

Onboard Ref ueling Vapor

Recovery

The onboard refueling vapor recovery (ORVR) system captures the fuel vapors during refueling. The vapors are adsorbed in a canister filled with activated carbon. While driving, the fuel vapors are drawn into the engine and burned off.

495

０８／０２／０６２１：４５：３９３１ＴＬ１６０００５０１


Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions Controls

The exhaust emissions controls include three systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing control, and three way catalytic converter. These three systems work together to control the engine’s combustion and minimize the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust emissions control systems are separate from the crankcase and evaporative emissions control systems.

PGM-FI System

The PGM-FI system uses sequential multiport fuel injection. It has three subsystems: air intake, engine control, and fuel control. The powertrain control module (PCM) in automatic transmission vehicles or the engine control module (ECM) in manual transmission vehicles uses various sensors to determine how much air is going into the engine. It then controls how much fuel to inject under all operating conditions.

Ignition Timing Control System

This system constantly adjusts the ignition timing, reducing the amount of HC, CO, and NOx produced.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

The three way catalytic converter is in the exhaust system. Through chemical reactions, it converts HC,

CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust

Replacement Parts

The emissions control systems are designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to levels that comply with the Clean Air

Act. To make sure the emissions remain low, you should use only new

Acura replacement parts or their equivalent for repairs. Using lower quality parts may increase the emissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems are covered by warranties separate from the rest of your vehicle. Read your warranty manual for more information.

496 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４５：４７３１ＴＬ１６０００５０２


Three Way Catalytic Converter

The three way catalytic converter contains precious metals that serve as catalysts, promoting chemical reactions to convert the exhaust gasses without affecting the metals.

The catalytic converter is referred to as a three-way catalyst, since it acts on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement unit must be an original Acura part or its equivalent.

The three way catalytic converter must operate at a high temperature for the chemical reactions to take place. It can set on fire any combustible materials that come near it. Park your vehicle away from high grass, dry leaves, or other flammables.

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

A defective three way catalytic converter contributes to air pollution, and can impair your engine’s performance. Follow these guidelines to protect your vehicle’s three way catalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.

Even a small amount of leaded gasoline can contaminate the catalyst metals, making the three way catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed and repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not running properly.

2009 TSX 497

０８／０２／０６２１：４５：５７３１ＴＬ１６０００５０３

Main Menu

Emissions Testing

Table Of Contents

Testing of Readiness Codes

If you take your vehicle for an emissions test shortly after the battery has been disconnected or gone dead, it may not pass the test.

This is because of certain ‘‘readiness codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions systems. These codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.

If the testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you will be requested to return at a later date to complete the test. If you must get the vehicle retested within the next two or three days, you can condition the vehicle for retesting by doing the following.

1.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly, but not completely, full (around

3/4).

2.

Make sure the vehicle has been parked with the engine off for 6 hours or more.

3.

Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40° and

95°F (4° and 35°C).

4.

Without touching the accelerator pedal, start the engine, and let it idle for 20 seconds.

5.

Keep the vehicle in Park

(automatic) or neutral (manual).

Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there until the temperature gauge rises to at least

1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

6.

Without touching the accelerator pedal, let the engine idle for 20 seconds.

498 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４６：０３３１ＴＬ１６０００５０４


7.

Select a nearby lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph

(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in

D (automatic) or 5th (manual). Do not use the cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).

8.

Then drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes.

When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.

9.

Make sure the vehicle has been parked with the engine off for 30 minutes.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see your dealer.

Emissions Testing

2009 TSX 499

０８／０２／０６２１：４６：０６３１ＴＬ１６０００５０５


500 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４６：０９３１ＴＬ１６０００５０６

Main Menu

Warranty and Client Relations

Client Service Information

Warranty Coverages

..........

....................

.

502

.

503

Reporting Safety Defects

(U.S. Vehicles) ..........................

.

504

Authorized Manuals .....................

.

505

2009 TSX 501

０８／０２／０６２１：４６：１８３１ＴＬ１６０００５０７


Client Service Information

Acura dealership personnel are trained professionals. They should be able to answer all your questions.

If you encounter a problem that your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the dealership’s management. The service manager or general manager can help. Almost all problems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with the decision made by the dealership’s management, contact the Acura

Client Services Office.

U.S. Owners:

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Acura Client Services

Mail Stop 500-2N-7E

1919 Torrance Blvd.

Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Canadian Owners:

Acura Client Services

Honda Canada Inc.

715 Milner Avenue

Toronto, ON

M1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9

Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin

Islands:

Vortex Motor Corp.

Bella International

P.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

When you call or write, please give us this information:

Vehicle Identification Number

(see page 484 )

Name and address of the dealer who services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Mileage on your vehicle

Your name, address, and telephone number

A detailed description of the problem

Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

502 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４６：３１３１ＴＬ１６０００５０８


Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty − covers your new vehicle, except for the battery, emissions control systems, and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems Def ects

Warranty and Emissions

Perf ormance Warranty − these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.

Original Equipment Battery Limited

Warranty − this warranty gives up to 100% credit toward a replacement battery.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty.

Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Rust Perf oration Limited Warranty

− all exterior body panels are covered for rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.

Accessory Limited Warranty −

Acura accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty manual for details.

Replacement Parts Limited

Warranty − covers all Acura replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.

Replacement Battery Limited

Warranty − provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.

Replacement Muf f ler Lif etime

Limited Warranty − provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the

2009 Acura warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

Canadian Owners

Please refer to the 2009 warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

2009 TSX 503

０８／０２／０６２１：４６：３６３１ＴＬ１６０００５０９


Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying American Honda Motor

Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.saf ercar.gov

; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New

Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC

20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov

.

504 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４６：４８３１ＴＬ１６０００５１０

Main Menu

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm

Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)

Go online at www. helminc. com

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.

at 1-800-782-4356.

Form Description Publication

Form Number

61TL200

61TL100EL

61TL230

31TL1600

31TL1800

31TL1M00

31TL1Q00

ACU-R

2009 Acura TSX Service Manual

2009 Acura TSX

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2009 Acura TSX Body Repair Manual

2009 Acura TSX Owner’s Manual

2009 Acura TSX Navigation

System Owner’s Manual

2009 Acura TSX Maintenance Journal

2009 Acura TSX Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in your vehicle.

Body Repair Manual:

Describes the procedures involved in the replacement of damaged body parts.

2009 TSX 505

０８／０２／０６２１：４６：５１３１ＴＬ１６０００５１１

Main Menu

506 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４６：５７３１ＴＬ１６０００５１２

Main Menu

Index

A

AAC ........................................

.

210

Accessories ....................................

, 271

.

365

ACCESSORY

(Ignition Key Position)

Accessory Power Sockets

............

.

122

............

.

156

Active Head Restraints

AcuraLink (U.S. only)

................

.

137

..................

.

337

Additives, Engine Oil ....................

.

420

Advanced Airbags

Airbag (SRS)

...........................

...............................

.

27

.

9 , 23

Airbag System Components

Air Conditioning System

..........

.

23

..............

.

166

Usage .........................................

Air Pressure, Tires ...............

.

448 ,

.

167

488

Antifreeze ......................................

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

.

423

Indicator ...............................

.

62 , 390

Operation ...................................

.

390

Anti-theft, Audio System ..............

.

289

Anti-theft Steering Column

Lock ............................................

.

122

Audio System ................................

Auto Door Locking/

.

174

Unlocking ..........................

.

100 , 106

...

21

Automatic Speed Control .............

.

299

Automatic Transmission ..............

.

379

Capacity, Fluid

Paddle Shifters

..........................

..........................

.

.

486

383

Shifting .......................................

.

379

Shift Lever Position

Indicators ...............................

.

379

Shift Lever Positions ................

.

380

Shift Lock Release

Auxiliary Input Jack

....................

......................

.

381

.

288

B

Battery

Charging System

Indicator ...........................

.

61 , 470

Jump Starting ............................

.

466

Maintenance ..............................

.

454

Specifications

Before Driving

............................

..............................

.

487

.

355

Belts, Seat ....................................

Beverage Holders

.

8 , 19

.........................

.

155

Bluetooth Audio ..................

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

.

217 , 279

.......

.

307

Booster Seats ..................................

.

52

Brakes

Anti-lock System (ABS)

Break-in, New Linings

...........

.

390

.............

.

356

Bulb Replacement

Fluid

....................

...........................................

.

436

.

428

Parking .......................................

.

153

System Indicator .................

.

61 , 472

Wear Indicators ........................

.

389

Braking System .............................

.

389

Break-in, New Vehicle

Brightness Control,

.................

.

356

Instruments ...............................

Bulb Replacement

.

115

Back-up Lights ..........................

.

437

Brake Lights ..............................

.

436

Fog Lights .................................

.

440

Front Parking Lights ................

.

435

Headlights .................................

High-mount Brake Light .........

.

.

430

439

Rear Lights ........................

Specifications

.

436 , 437

............................

.

487

Turn Signal Lights ............

Bulbs, Halogen ......................

.

.

434 , 436

430 , 440

CONTINUED

2009 TSX I

０８／０２／０６２１：４７：０３３１ＴＬ１６０００５１３

Main Menu

Index

C

Capacities Chart ............................

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

.

486

.............

.

55

Carrying Cargo .............................

CAUTION, Explanation of

.

367

.............

.

iii

CD Care .........................................

.

256

CD Changer ...................................

CD Player .......................................

.

244

.

189

Certification Label

Ceiling Light

........................

..................................

.

.

484

161

Chains ............................................

Changing a Flat Tire ....................

.

.

453

459

Changing Oil

How to ........................................

When to ......................................

Checklist, Before Driving ............

.

.

421

409

Charging System Indicator ...

.

61 , 470

.

374

Child Safety .....................................

Booster Seats ..............................

.

.

36

52

Child Seats .............................

.

43 , 44

Important Safety

Reminders ..........................

.

36 54

Infants ..........................................

Larger Children ..........................

.

.

41

51

LATCH .........................................

.

46

Risks with Airbags ......................

.

37

Small Children .............................

.

42

Tether ..........................................

.

50

Warning Labels ...........................

Where Should a Child Sit ..........

.

.

56

37

Child Seats .......................................

.

36

LATCH .........................................

.

46

Tether Anchorage Points

Childproof Door Locks

..........

................

.

50

.

125

Cleaning the Seat Belts ................

Client Service Information ..........

.

.

442

502

Climate Control System

Clock

...............

..............................................

.

166

.

290

Clutch Fluid ...................................

.

429

CO in the Exhaust ..................

Cold Weather, Starting in

.

55 , 495

............

.

375

Compact Spare ..............................

.

458

Compass .........................................

.

295

Console Compartment .................

.

156

Consumer Information .................

.

502

Controls, Instruments and

Coolant

.............

.

57

Adding ........................................

.

423

Checking ....................................

.

361

Proper Solution .........................

Temperature Gauge

.

423

...................

.

69

Courtesy Lights ............................

Crankcase Emissions Control

.

162

System ........................................

.

495

Cruise Control Indicator

Cruise Control Operation

................

.

66

............

.

299

Customer Service Office

Customized Settings

.............

.

.......................

502

.

81

D

DANGER, Explanation of

Dashboard

...............

...................................

.

iii

.

3 , 58

Daytime Running Lights ..............

.

114

Dead Battery .................................

.

466

Defects, Reporting Safety ............

.

504

Defogger, Rear Window

Defrosting the Windows

..............

..............

.

.

117

170

Dimensions ....................................

Dimming the Headlights .............

.

.

486

111

Dipstick


.

425

Engine Oil ..................................

Directional Signals ........................

.

.

361

111

Disc Brake Wear Indicators ........

.

389

Disposal of Used Oil .....................

.

422

II 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４７：０９３１ＴＬ１６０００５１４

Main Menu

Index

Doors

Auto Door Lock ................

.

100 , 124

Auto Door Unlock ............

Childproof Door Locks

.

106 , 124

............

.

125

Locking and Unlocking ............

DOT Tire Quality Grading ..........

.

124

.

489

Downshifting, Manual

Transmission .............................

.

376

Driver and Passenger Safety ...........

.

5

Driving ...........................................

Economy ....................................

.

.

373

362

Driving Position Memory

System ........................................

Dual Temperature Control ..........

.

142

.

171

Dust and Pollen Filter ..................

.

443

E

Economy, Fuel ..............................

.

362

Electric Power Steering (EPS)

Indicator .......................................

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

.

65

System ........................................

Emergencies ..................................

Battery, Jump Starting .............

.

.

398

457

.

466

Brake System Indicator ...........

.

472

Changing a Flat Tire ................

.

459

Charging System Indicator .....

.

470

Checking the Fuses ..................

.

474

Fuel Fill Door, Opening

Manually ................................

.

473

Hazard Warning Flashers .......

.

117

Jump Starting ............................

.

466

Low Oil Pressure Indicator .....

.

470

...

471

Overheated Engine

Towing

..................

.......................................

.

468

.

481

Emergency Brake .........................

Emergency Flashers ....................

.

.

153

117

Emergency Towing

Emissions Controls

......................

.

481

.......................

.

495

Emissions Testing

Engine

........................

.

498

Adding Engine Coolant ............

.

423

Coolant Temperature Gauge ....

.

69

If It Won’t Start .........................

.

464

...

471

Oil Life Display .........................

Oil Pressure Indicator ..............

.

.

409

470

Oil, What Kind to Use ..............

.

419

Overheating ...............................

.

468

Specifications ............................

.

487

Speed Limiter ....................

.

377 , 381

Starting .......................................

.

375

Engine Speed Limiter

Ethanol in Gasoline

..........

.

377

......................

, 381

.

357

.

495

Exhaust Fumes ...............................

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

.

55

Belts by ........................................

.

17

F

Fan, Interior ...................................

.

169

Features .........................................

Filling the Fuel Tank ....................

.

.

165

357

Filters

Dust and Pollen

Oil

........................

.

443

...............................................

.

421

Flashers, Hazard Warning ...........

.

117

Flat Tire, Changing a ...................

.

459

Floor Mats .....................................

.

442

CONTINUED

2009 TSX III

０８／０２／０６２１：４７：１７３１ＴＬ１６０００５１５

Main Menu

Index

Fluids


.

425

Brake

Clutch

..........................................

.

428

.........................................

.

429

Manual Transmission

Windshield Washer

..............

..................

.

427

.

110

Fog Lights .....................................

Folding Rear Seats ........................

.

.

115

138

Four-way Flashers ........................

.

117

Front Airbags

Fuel

..............................

.

.................................................

9 , 25

.

356

Fill Door and Cap ......................

.

357

Gauge ...........................................

Low Fuel Indicator .....................

.

.

68

67

Octane Requirement

Oxygenated

................

...............................

.

.

356

357

Tank, Refueling ........................

.

357

Tighten Fuel Cap Message .....

.

358

Fuel Economy ...............................

Fuses, Checking the .....................

.

.

362

474

G

Gas Mileage, Improving ......

.

362 , 363

Gasoline .........................................

.

356

Gauge ...........................................

.

68

Low Fuel Indicator .....................

Octane Requirement ................

.

.

67

356

Tank, Refueling ........................

.

357

Gas Station Procedures ................

.

357

Gauges

Engine Coolant Temperature ...

.

69

Fuel ...............................................

.

68

Gearshift Lever Positions


.

379

Manual Transmission

Glove Box

..............

......................................

.

376

.

157

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) .............................

.

369 , 401

H

Halogen Headlight Bulbs .............

.

430

HandsFreeLink ...........................

.

307

Hazard Warning Flashers ............

.

117

Headlights .....................................

.

111

Aiming ........................................

Automatic Lighting Off ............

.

.

430

113

Automatic Lighting On ............

Daytime Running Lights .........

.

.

112

114

High Beam Indicator

Lights On Indicator

..................

....................

.

66

.

66

Reminder Chime .......................

Replacing Halogen

.

111

Bulbs ..............................

Turning on

.

430 , 440

.................................

.

111

Head Restraints

Heated Mirrors

......................

.

14 , 135

.............................

.

146

Heaters, Seat .................................

HomeLink Universal

.

141

Transceiver ................................

.

302

Hood, Opening and Closing

Horn

........

...........................................

.

359

.

4 , 109

Hydraulic Clutch ...........................

.

429

I

...

484

Ignition

Keys ............................................

.

119

Switch .........................................

.

122

Timing Control System ............

.

496

Immobilizer System ......................

Important Safety Precautions

.

121

.........

.

6

IV 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０８１７：４６：１０３１ＴＬ１６０００５１６

Main Menu

Index

...

60 , 79

ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ...............

Brake (Parking and Brake

.

62

System) ............................

Charging System ................

.

.

61 , 472

61 , 470

Cruise Control

Cruise Main

.............................

.................................

.

66

.

66

Door/Trunk Open ................

DRL (Daytime Running

.

11 , 65

Lights) ....................................

.

114

.

65

Fog Light .....................................

High Beam ...................................

.

.

66

66

High Temperature (Coolant) ....

.

69

Key (Immobilizer System) ........

.

61

Lights On

Low Fuel

.....................................

......................................

.

.

66

67

Low Oil Pressure ................

Low Tire Pressure/

.

60 , 470

TPMS ...............................

.

64 , 392

...

471

Security System

Side Airbag Off

..........................

.

67

...........................

.

62

Seat Belt

SRS

.................................

.........................................

.

19 , 60

.

31 , 62

System Message .........................

.

67

TPMS .................................

Turn Signal and Hazard

.

392 , 395

Warning ...................................

.

64

VSA Activation

VSA System

............................

.................................

.

63

.

63

Indicators, Instrument Panel .........

.

60

Infant Restraint

Infant Seats

...............................

......................................

.

.

41

41

Tether Anchorage Points ..........

.

50

Inflation, Proper Tire

INFO Buttons

...........

.

448 ,

..................................

488

.

71

Inside Mirror .................................

Inspection, Tire .............................

.

.

145

449

Installing a Child Seat ....................

Tether Anchorage Points ..........

.

.

44

50

Using LATCH

Instrument Panel

.............................

.

46

............................

.

59

Instrument Panel Brightness ......

.

115

Instruments and Controls ..............

.

57

Interface Dial .................................

.

222

Interior Lights

Introduction

...............................

.

161

........................................

.

i iPod .......................................

.

199 , 259

J

Jacking up the Vehicle .................

.

461

Jack, Tire .......................................

Jump Starting ................................

.

.

460

466

K

Keys ................................................

.

119

L

Label, Certification .......................

Lane Change, Signaling ...............

.

.

484

111

Language Selection ........................

.

87

Lap/Shoulder Belts

LATCH System

..................

.

14

...............................

.

, 20

46

Lights

Bulb Replacement

Indicator

....................

.

430

.......................................

.

59

Parking .......................................

.

111

Turn Signal ................................

.

111

Load Limits ....................................

.

368

LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....

.

122

CONTINUED

2009 TSX V

０８／０２／０６２１：４７：３２３１ＴＬ１６０００５１７

Main Menu

Index

Locks

Anti-theft Steering Column .....

.

122

Childproof Door

Fuel Fill Door

........................

............................

.

125

.

357

Glove Box ..................................

Lockout Prevention ..................

.

.

157

125

Power Door

Trunk

...............................

.........................................

.

124

.

130

Low Coolant Level ........................

.

361

Low Fuel Indicator .........................

.

67

...

376

...

60 , 470

Lower Anchors ................................

Lubricant Specifications

.

46

Chart ..........................................

Luggage, Storing (Cargo) ...........

.

.

486

367

M

Maintenance ..................................

Automated Appointment .........

.

407

.

343

Minder ........................................

.

409

Main Items and Sub Items ......

.

414

Owner’s Maintenance

Checks ...................................

.

416

Safety ..........................................

.

408

Malfunction Indicator Lamp .......

.

471

Manual Transmission ...................

.

376

Manual Transmission Fluid

Memory, Driving Position

........

...........

.

427

.

142

Meters, Gauges .........................

.

59 , 68

Methanol in Gasoline

Mirrors

....................

...........................................

.

357

.

145

Adjusting ....................................

.

145

Heated ........................................

Reverse Tilt ...............................

.

.

146

146

Modifying Your Vehicle

Moonroof

...............

.......................................

.

366

.

151

MP3 ........................

.

190 , 210 , 251 , 271

Multi-information Display ..............

.

70

N

Neutral Gear Position ...................

.

380

New Vehicle Break-in

Normal Shift Speeds

..................

.....................

.

356

.

377

NOTICE, Explanation of

Numbers, Identification

...................

.

...............

.

484 i

O

...

356

Odometer

Oil

.........................................

.

73

Change, How to ........................

.

421

Change, When to

Checking Engine

......................

......................

.

.

409

361

Pressure Indicator ..............

Selecting Proper Viscosity

.

60 , 470

Chart ......................................

.

420

ON (Ignition Key Position)

Onboard Refueling Vapor

.........

.

122

Recovery ....................................

Outside Mirrors ............................

.

.

495

145

Outside Temperature

Overheating, Engine

.....................

.

74

....................

.

468

Owner’s Maintenance Checks ....

.

416

Oxygenated Fuels .........................

.

357

P

Paddle Shifters ..............................

.

383

Panel Brightness Control

Park Gear Position

............

........................

.

115

.

380

Parking ...........................................

Parking Brake ...............................

.

.

388

153

Parking Brake and Brake

System Indicator .................

.

61 , 472

VI 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４７：３８３１ＴＬ１６０００５１８

Main Menu

Index

Parking Lights ...............................

.

111

..

388

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ....

.

33

PGM-FI System

Pollen Filter

.............................

...................................

.

.

496

443

Power Door Locks ........................

Power Seat Adjustments ..............

.

.

124

134

Power Socket Locations ......

.

154 , 156

Power Windows ............................

.

147

Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .........

Protecting Adults and Teens .........

.

17

.

11

...

18

Advice for Pregnant Women .....

.

17

Protecting Children ........................

General Guidelines .....................

.

.

36

36

Protecting Infants .......................

.

41

Protecting Larger Children .......

.

51

Protecting Small Children

Using Child Seats with

.........

.

42

Tethers .....................................

.

50

Using LATCH .............................

.

46

R

Radiator Overheating ...................

.

468

Radio/Disc Sound System ...........

.

174

Radio Theft Protection .................

.

289

RDS ........................................

.

179 , 227

Readiness Code .............................

.

471

Rear Lights, Bulb

Replacement ......................

.

436 , 437

Rear Seats, Folding .......................

.

138

Rearview Camera

Rearview Mirror

..........................

.

353

...........................

.

145

Rear Window Defogger ...............

.

117

Reclining the Seat Backs .............

Recommended Shift Speeds .......

.

.

134

377

Refueling ........................................

Reminder Indicators

.

357

.......................

.

60

Remote Audio Controls ................

.

287

Remote Transmitter .....................

Replacement Information

.

126

Engine Oil and Filter

Fuses

................

..........................................

.

421

.

474

Light Bulbs ................................

.

430

Tires ...........................................

Wiper Blades .............................

.

.

451

444

Replacing Seat Belts After a

Crash ............................................

.

22

Reserve Tank, Engine

Coolant ...............................

.

361 , 423

Restraint, Child ...............................

.

36

Reverse Gear Position

Reverse Lockout

..................

...........................

.

380

.

378

Rotation, Tire ................................

.

451

S

Safety Belts ..................................

.

8 , 19

Safety Defects, Reporting ............

.

504

Safety Features

Airbags

.................................

...........................................

.

7

.

9

Seat Belts .......................................

.

8

Safety Labels, Location of

Safety Messages

.............

..............................

.

56

.

iii

Satellite Radio, XM .............

.

183 , 236

CONTINUED

2009 TSX VII

０８／０２／０６２１：４７：４３３１ＴＬ１６０００５１９

Main Menu

Index

Seat Belts .....................................

.

8 , 19

Additional Information ...............

.

19

Automatic Seat Belt

Tensioners ...............................

.

21

Cleaning .....................................

.

442

Lap/Shoulder Belt

Maintenance

................

.

15

................................

, 20

.

22

Reminder Indicator and

Beeper ................................

.

19 , 60

System Components ...................

.

19

Use During Pregnancy ...............

.

17

...

20

Seats

Adjusting ....................................

.

134

Folding .......................................

Heaters .......................................

.

138

.

141

Security System ............................

Selecting a Child Seat

.

293

.....................

.

43

Selector Knob (Disc Player) .......

.

175

Sequential SportsShift Mode ......

.

385

Paddle Shifters

Serial Number

..........................

...............................

.

383

.

484

Service Minder

Service Manual

..............................

.

409

.............................

.

505

Service Station Procedures .........

.

357

Setting the Clock ..........................

.

290

...

379

Shift Lock Release

Side Airbags

........................

................................

.

381

.

9 , 29

...

29


Indicator Works ......................

.

32

Side Curtain Airbags ..................

How Your Side Curtain

.

9 , 31

Airbags Work ..........................

.

31

Signaling Turns

Snow Tires

.............................

.....................................

.

111

.

452

Sound System

Spare Tire

................................

.

174

Inflating ......................................

.

458

Specifications

Spark Plugs

............................

....................................

.

488

.

487

Specifications

Speed Control

Speed Limiter

................................

................................

........................

.

377

.

.

,

486

299

381

Speedometer

Spotlights

...................................

.......................................

.

68

.

161

SRS, Additional Information ..........

.

23

Airbag Service

...

34

.............................

.

34

Airbag System Components ......

.

23

How the Passenger Airbag Off

Indicator Works ......................

.

33


Indicator Works ......................

.

32

..

31

How Your Front Airbags

Works .......................................

.

25

.

29

How Your Side Curtain Airbags

Work .........................................

.

31

SRS Indicator .............................

.

31 , 62

..

123

Starting the Engine .......................

.

375

In Cold Weather at High

Altitude ..................................

.

375

With a Dead Battery ................

Steam Coming from Engine ........

.

.

466

468

Steering Wheel

Adjustments ..............................

Anti-theft Column Lock ...........

.

.

118

122

Steering Wheel

Buttons ................

.

71 , 287 , 299 , 309

Stereo Sound System

Sun Visors

...................

......................................

.

174

.

159

Sunglasses Holder ........................

.

158

VIII 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４７：４９３１ＴＬ１６０００５２０

Main Menu

Index

Supplemental Restraint

System ..................................

.

9 , 23

Servicing ......................................

.

34

SRS Indicator .........................

.

31 , 62

System Components ...................

.

23

SVC (Speed-sensitive

...

182 , 235

Synthetic Oil ..................................

System Message Indicator

.

420

............

.

67

System Warning Messages,

Multi-information Display ..........

.

78

T

.

457

Technical Descriptions

DOT Tire Quality Grading ......

.

489

Emissions Control Systems .....

.

495

Three Way Catalytic

Converter ...............................

.

497

Temperature Gauge .......................

Temperature, Outside ....................

.

.

69

74

Tether Anchorage Points ..............

.

50

Theft Protection, Radio ................

.

289

..

497

Tighten Fuel Cap Message .........

.

358

Time, Setting the

Tire Chains

..........................

....................................

.

290

.

453

Tire, How to Change a Flat .........

.

459

Tire Information

Tire Labeling

...................

.

489

.................................

, 491

.

491

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) ............

.

392 , 493

Check TPMS .............................

Low Tire Pressure/

.

395

TPMS Indicator

Required Federal

..............

.

64 , 392

Explanation ............................

.

493

Tires ...............................................

Air Pressure ......................

.

448 ,

.

447

488

Chains ........................................

Checking Wear .........................

.

.

453

449

Compact Spare ..........................

.

458

DOT Tire Quality Grading ......

.

489

Inflation ......................................

.

447

Inspection

Pressure Monitor ................

.

76 , 393

Replacing

..................................

.

449

...................................

.

451

Rotating ......................................

.

451

Service Life ................................

.

449

Snow ...........................................

Specifications ....................

.

448 ,

.

452

452

Tools, Tire Changing

Towing

...................

.

460

A Trailer .....................................

.

400

Emergency Wrecker

Weight Limit

................

.....................

.

481

.

400 , 401

Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,

Automatic ..............................

.

425

Checking Fluid Level,

Manual ...................................

.

427

Fluid Selection ..................

.

426 , 427

Identification Number ..............

.

485

Shifting the Automatic .............

.

379

Shifting the Manual

Treadwear

..................

.....................................

.

376

.

449

Trip Computer

Trip Meter

................................

.......................................

.

.

74

73

Trunk ..............................................

.

130

Emergency Opener ..................

.

132

Main Switch ...............................

.

131

Opening ......................................

.

130

Open Indicator ......................

Opening Manually

.

11 , 65

....................

.

132

Turn Signals ..................................

.

111

CONTINUED

2009 TSX IX

０８／０２／０６２１：４７：５６３１ＴＬ１６０００５２１

Main Menu

Index

U

Unexpected, Taking Care of the ...............................................

.

457

Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....

.

489

Unleaded Gasoline

USB Adapter

........................

.

356

Cable ..................

.

201 , 211 , 261 , 272

.

208 , 269

Used Oil, How to Dispose of .......

.

422

V

Vanity Mirror ................................

Vehicle Capacity Load .................

.

.

159

368

Vehicle Dimensions ......................

.

486

Vehicle Identification Number ....

.

484

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA )

System ....................................

.

398

...

63 , 398

VSA Off Switch .........................

VSA System Indicator ........

.

63 ,

.

399

398

Vehicle Storage

Ventilation

.............................

.....................................

.

.

455

169

VIN .................................................

.

484

Viscosity, Oil ..................................

.

420

Voice Control System ...........

.

167 , 222

W

WARNING, Explanation of

Warning Labels, Location of

............

.

iii

.........

.

56

Warranty Coverages

Washers, Windshield

....................

.

503

Checking the Fluid Level ........

.

424

Low Level Message ..................

.

425

Operation

Wheels

...................................

.

110

Adjusting the Steering

Alignment and Balance

.............

.

118

............

.

450

Compact Spare ..........................

.

458

Wrench, Nut

Windows

..............................

.

460

Auto Reverse .............................

.

148

Operating the Power

Rear, Defogger

................

.........................

.

147

.

117

Windshield

Cleaning .....................................

.

110

Defroster

Washers

...................................

.

170

.....................................

.

110

Wipers, Windshield

Changing Blades .......................

.

444

Operation

WMA

...................................

......................

.

110

.

190 , 210 , 251 , 271

Worn Tires ....................................

.

449

Wrecker, Emergency Towing .....

.

481

X

XM Satellite Radio ..............

.

183 , 236

X 2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４７：５９３１ＴＬ１６０００５２２

Main Menu

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４８：０１３１ＴＬ１６０００５２３

Main Menu

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４８：０４３１ＴＬ１６０００５２４

Main Menu

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２１：４８：２０３１ＴＬ１６０００５２５

Main Menu

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Premium unleaded gasoline, pump octane number of 91 or higher.

Fuel Tank Capacity:

18.5 US gal (70 )

Recommended Engine Oil:

API Premium grade 5W-20 detergent oil (see page 419 ).

Oil change capacity (including filter):

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Honda Genuine ATF-Z1

(Automatic Transmission Fluid)

(see page 426 ).

Manual Transmission Fluid:

Honda Manual Transmission

Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 motor oil as a temporary replacement (see page

427 ).

Capacity:

2.0 US qt (1.9 )

Brake Fluid:

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid

DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or

DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary replacement (see page 428 ).

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Front/Rear:

33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )

Compact Spare Tire:

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

2009 TSX

０８／０２／０６２０：２３：４０３１ＴＬ１６０００００１

Main Menu

Owner’s Identification

OWNER

ADDRESS

STREET

STATE/PROVINCE CITY

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME

ADDRESS

CITY

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

ZIP CODE/

POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

DEALER NO.

STREET

STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/

POSTAL CODE

2009 TSX

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models of the TSX. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,

Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever.

POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN

AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur en f rançais, veuillez demander à votre concessionnaire de commander le numéro de pièce

33TL1C00

Acura 2009 TSX Owner's Manual

2009 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual

Related manuals

Acura

2005 TSX

Acura

2010 TSX

Acura

2008 TSX

Acura

2004 TSX

Honda

Civic Hybrid

Honda

Civic Sedan

Honda

Civic Sedan

Honda

Civic Sedan

Honda

2007 Civic Hybrid

Honda

Accord Hybrid

Honda

Accord Hybrid

Honda

2004 Civic Coupe